Home

HPLC

1. Description Part No Qty Remarks 1 Auto injector 221 44527 30 1 2 User s manual 221 40268 1 Standard Auto injector accessories Description Part No Qty Remarks 1 ACC cable 221 44819 1 2 Rack short 221 45608 91 1 3 Large Vial Holder for solvent waste 221 34949 01 1 purge 4 Small Vial Holder 221 45609 92 1 5 Syringe 101 221 34618 1 6 Cable clamp 072 60330 01 1 7 Needle guide 221 44584 2 8 Plunger holder 221 44790 5 9 Barrel holder 221 44780 2 10 Plunger Knob 037 02820 1 11 Large Vial 4ml 221 34267 91 1 set 5pcs 12 Large Cap for 4ml 221 34268 91 1 set 5pcs 13 Large Septum for 4ml 221 34266 91 1 set 15pcs 14 Small Vial 1 5ml 221 34272 91 1 set 20pcs 15 Small Cap for 1 5ml 221 34273 91 1 set 20pcs 16 Large Septum for 1 5ml 221 41239 92 1 set 40pcs AOC power supply For 115V model P N 221 48401 91 Description Part No Qty Remarks 1 AOC power supply 221 48402 91 1 2 READY START cord 221 48405 91 1 Accessories for power supply 3 RS 232C cable for AOC 221 48406 91 1 P N 221 48403 91 For 230V model P N 221 48401 38 Description Part No Qty Remarks 1 AOC power supply 221 48402 38 1 2 READY START cord 221 48405 91 1 3 RS 232C cable for AOC 221 48406 91 1 Che pee sed 4 Ferrite core 075 08023 03 3 Installation parts P N 221 44548 92 Description Part No Qty Remarks 1 Spacer back left 221
2. HAIR Close up 3 column hanger 10 jc GC 2010 AAA B Rear E m D NJ VAN XI NI XU NJ lU m A Y do m E m X AR 2 Installation 2 2 Component description AN WARNING HIGH VOLTAGE Danger of electrical shock Only qualified service personnel may remove the rear cover Ensure that the power distribution board power is off before starting installation if the power cable will be connected directly to terminals on the power distribution board Ensure that the power supply is properly grounded Never put heavy objects on the power cable HIGH TEMPERATURE Hot air is exhausted from the back of the unit Do not place flammable items behind the unit Do not touch the back of the GC near the exhaust HIGH PRESSURE GAS Frequently check gas flow lines for leaks In particular accumulations of hydrogen gas can cause an explosion e alle Cb mme tin ob 000 66 Q990 Fig 2 2 3 GC 2010 3 gt 11 12 2 Installation
3. No Meaning of Event xx Example Event 1 Meaning of Event xx Example Event 1 0 Reverses contact status of Events 1 to 16 and Opens contact of Events 1 to 16 and switches Events 91 to 96 contact of events 91 to 96 to N C type normal 4 Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit option PRG option PRG 2 Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit option PRG option PRG 3 Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit option PRG option PRG 4 Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit option PRG option PRG 5 Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit option PRG option PRG 6 Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit option PRG option PRG 7 Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit option PRG option PRG 8 Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit option PRG option PRG 9 Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit option PRG option PRG 40 Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns o
4. ana 1 Brot cC Baa n e650 bo90o nn good popa Bo ooo oo oo H o oo ADD UUUU Oooo c suso gor lo Of voocoaoauonde n ANNN Cc EIGHICIEIEICIBIEELICIE IDE poc EGEIEDIEIBELGOGELE loba Doc SOGSOS00000cr GCEID Doc BGOIEBIEIBEEIGELE 000 onoc ogogoagodsade boba UUUU onoc SCSSSDSS0000r baba BOSC SOSSSDSS0000r pana BO SOSOSGOCS000c0 2005 nnnn BOSE 20000000000 boga Doc 3ouogoguoouer o00 poc aduoguosuaoner Spp ODE 3EHEEIEIBHEISELTE 90H Bic SOOCSOCO000C 35 UUUU Ob seoconbouonoc 30 O SOOS00S00005c 3 pobngsgaduac a e a e ooo0o CEE FPREFFZFREREREF FFXEFEFYEEEYT FEV ET EVEL EVE Fig 2 2 2 No Name Description Column connection injection port side Attaches the column to the injection port close up 2 Column connection detector side Attaches the column to the detector close up 3 Column hanger Install the capillary column here Attaches to the top of the oven close up GC 2010 gt Close up T injection port side Close up 2 detector side E E Capillary column Graphite ferrule Column nut Injection port column nut Column nut with split
5. Print Prints out the results of the diagnosis to a Chromatopac GC 2010 gt 181 182 14 Diagnosis 14 1 Standard Diagnosis E diagnosis results Good Not Good N T Not Tested N A Not Applicable N S Not Selected N I Not Installed Displayed when the diagnosis result satisfies the requirements Displayed when the diagnosis result does not satisfy the require ments Displayed when the diagnostic test was stopped or when an item is excluded from the test Displayed when diagnostic test is disabled for the item ignition test for a TCD for example Displayed when the diagnosis were not perfomed on an item because it has not been configured in an analytical line Certain diagnosis items can be performed for components which have not been configured For example for a detector not configured in any line Make Up Gas Control is not checked but its detector ROM check can be executed Displayed when the diagnosis item is not installed E Troubleshooting items which are Not Good Diagnosis item Countermeasures SEPTUM COUNTER Replace the septum Refer to 18 3 Inspection and Maintenance Septum INSERT COUNTER Replace the glass insert Refer to 18 5 Inspection and Maintenance Glass Insert ROOM TEMPERATURE Check the operation range ATMOSPHERIC PRESS Check the operation range GAS PRIMARY PRESS
6. Fig 16 9 7 Parameter unlock screen when a password is set GC 2010 3 gt 267 3 16 Special Functions 1 6 10 ROM Version No The system ROM version No can be displayed 16 10 1 Screen description Press Version PF menu from the FUNC key screen to display the version screen shown in Fig 16 10 1 Version Version Build No MEE Fig 16 10 1 ROM version No screen 16 10 2 Parameter list VERSION BUILD NO The ROM version may be required during system maintenance 268 GC 2010 29 17 Printing 1 7 1 Printing 17 1 1 Connection to Chromatopac Connect the gas chromatograph to the Chromatopac then press Print PF menu from the GC screen to print to the Chromatopac For the GC and Chromatopac connection refer to 2 7 Connecting external device cables 17 1 2 Parameters to be printed 17 1 2 1 Program The current file program can be printed This includes the following screens temperature program COL INJ1 INJ2 pressure program CAR1 CAR2 CAR3 flow rate program CAR1 CAR2 CAR3 and split ratio program CAR1 CAR2 Press Print PF menu from any screen to print the same parameters for a saved pro gram COLUMN OVEN TEMP PROGRAM RATE TEMP TIME Q 0 100 0 1 00 1 6 00 220 0 25 00 INJ1 TEMP PROGRAM RATE TEMP TIME Q0 0 25 0 0 00 INJ1 PRESSURE PROGRAM RATE TEMP TIME Q 100 0 0 00 INJ1 SPRIT RATIO T
7. When you use snoop liquid etc take care that the liquid is not splashed to the electric wiring and detector There is a risk to get an electrical shock When using snoop liquid for detecting leaks there is always a possibility that a part of the liquid creeps into the pipings which in case of trace analysis can give ghost peaks which may interfere your peaks of interest Then it is recommended to use a leak detector instead GC 2010 gt 18 Maintenance and Inspection 1 8 5 Inspection and Maintenance Glass Insert NOTE 18 5 1 18 5 2 NM WARNING Danger of burns Do not perform injection port maintenance until the tempelature of the injection on port has dropped below 50 C NM CAUTION Wait until the injection port has cooled to loosen screws and nuts to prevent them from binding For the details of handling of the glass insert refer to 12 Injection Port Inspection maintenance cycle Inspect the glass insert before starting a series of analysis In addition inspect and maintain the glass insert if the following problems occur f the retention time shifts or reproducibility is poor If ghost peaks are detected When the problems above occur the silica wool may have moved or become dirty or the glass insert could be dirty Inspection maintenance E Preparing the gas chromatograph NOTE Select Maint INJ PF menu from the SY
8. Clear key Clears the current numeric value CE key Clears display and alarm during an error ENTER key Validates parameter input or item selection GC 2010 5 1 2 E Return PF menu Return PF menu displayed in the PF menu line returns the display to the previous screen Return PF menu is displayed in PF1 E Actual and set values Actual current values are highlighted while set values are underlined The actual value blinks when it is NOT READY the actual value has not reached the set value When the values are equal READY status the actual value stops blinking If all items cannot be displayed on one screen line Scroll through the screen by moving the cursors 5 Basic Key Operation 5 1 Keypad Description and Operation The areas of the 16 line screen display a variety of items These items are divided by lines A and V are displayed in the message Monitor Main EN lt EN aai 13 Tue 17 43 51 154 0t FID 150 02 108 OkPa x18 83 90 au Kb RemainTime 1 42min A Amin 32000 Sienali fe bent Lon Tine 7 Displays the screen title and the GC status READY NOT READY or RUN etc Aiten speed scroll ChngGraph Chng Line Displays a message or error about the operating procedure Fig 5 1 1 Displays the menu selected by the PF key Flow CARL Inlet pre
9. Fig 16 9 5 Password setup screen NOTE If the Old Password or Confirm new password is incorrect an error message appears Confirm the password to be input entering it correctly NOTE Only the system supervisor should have password access Change the factory set password promptly Do not forget your password and keep it secure 266 GC 2010 E Unlocking the parameters without password If parameters are locked and no password is required when you select 9 LOCK from the FUNC key screen the screen shown in Fig 16 9 6 appears When the parameter are unlocked the screen shown in Fig 16 9 4 appears 16 Special Functions 16 9 Key Lock and Parameter Lock This screen is displayed when parameters are locked Parameter Locking Press PF2 key to remove PAR METER LOCK mode ar Return Unlock Fig 16 9 6 Parameter unlock screen without password E Unlocking parameters with password If parameters are locked and a password is set when you select 9 LOCK from the FUNC key screen the screen shown in Fig 16 9 7 appears When you input the correct password and press the Unlock PF menu key the parameters are unlocked and the screen shown in Fig 16 9 4 appears This screen is displayed when parameters are locked Parameter Locking Password Press PF2 key to remove PAR METER LOCK mode A Return Unlock
10. Setting range 100 Purge flow rate ml min 50 0 1 L 1 0 100 200 300 400 500 Column inlet pressure kPa Fig 3 5 3 Allowable APC settings are shown below for a supply pressure of 500 kPa When the supply pressure is less than 500 kPa the available maximum flow rate decreases proportionally When the set value is more than the set range displayed values may not be accurate or APC cannot control the flow Air detector FID 0 to 1 000 ml min H2 detector FID 0 to 200ml min Makeup gas detector FID O to 100ml min Makeup gas detector TCD 0 to 20ml min GC 2010 3 gt 45 46 3 AFC APC gt 6 AFC and APC Offset Calibration The AFC and APC pressure and flow rate sensors can be calibrated zeroed This calibration is required to correct minute deviations of the sensor values which may occur after long periods of use If the sensor values deviate 0 5 kPa or 0 5 ml min could be displayed for example even through there is no actual pressure of flow When data reproducibility is important perform the offset calibration For the AFC perform the offset calibration using the following procedure In the case of WBI analysis remove the WBI column from the injection port before the fol lowing procedure After the proceduce attach the column to injection port as before 1 Press SYSTEMIkey toggle key PF1 key and change Start GC to Manual Start r
11. The components that are WBIZ Temp tt aa 25 included in the current ana gt FIDI Temp tti 156 6 lytical line are underlined TEDE Temp A Ara Flow Hon Fig 9 2 1 Temperature monitor NOTE Heated zones without installed components are not displayed on the screen 9 2 2 PF menu PF menu Description Reference section Flow Mon Monitor pressure and flow rate for the injection ports and detectors 9 3 GC 2010 29 9 Monitoring the GC 3 Monitoring the Flow Rate with Flow Mon 9 3 1 Screen description Press Flow Mon PF menu from the MONIT key main screen to display the Flow Monitor screen shown in Fig 9 3 1 Monitor the flow rate and the pressure of the injection ports and the detector gas flow rates of the detectors Displayed items depend on the type of injection ports detectors and flow controllers Flow Monitor The name of injection port and detectors constructing the current line are under lined SPLi Inlet laa Total 23 9 Purge 3 8 WEITZ Inlet iaa Total 3 0 Jg 30 0 Air Ton 400 0 TCD MakeUpF 1 owl 30 0 Fig 9 3 1 Flow rate monitor NOTE Flow controllers that have hot been installed are not displayed on the screen 9 3 2 PF menu PF menu Description Reference section Temp Mon Monitor temperature of the column oven injec
12. Return i Fig 8 2 1 File list screen 8 2 2 PF menu PF menu Description pube Load Selects the current file Copy Copies file name and file contents from the source file to a destination file 8 2 3 i Initializes file name and file contents ile init The current file cannot be initialized d s Rename Changes the file name 8 24 GC 2010 89 90 8 Setting the Analytical Parameters and File Management 8 2 File Management 8 2 3 Copying a file Select Copy PF menu on the file list screen to display the file copy screen shown in Fig 8 2 2 Enter the source file number Src File and the destination File number Dst File then press Copy PF menu The name and contents of the source file are copied to the destination file Q FILEO Src File E Dst File 1 WII File List DTI FILE LE1 LEZ LEZ LE4 LES LEG LET LES FILES File has been copied ama n n n nn 8 CONVUCONaS Fig 8 2 2 Copying File 8 2 4 Renaming a file Select Rename PF menu on the file list screen to display the file rename screen shown in Fig 8 2 3 Move the cursor using the A and V keys to select the file to be renamed Enter the new file name using the numeric keys and the lt and gt keys Refer to 5 3 5 Changing item names for more information Rename File GC 2a1e TUA List DIDI A Oe EMEF GH QUE ON
13. Display the diagnosis log The replacement timing of the septum or the glass insert can be displayed as an warning message Menu Log 2 Analysis Log 3 Parameter Log 4 Error Log 5 Diagnostic Log _ 3 Analysis Countur 4 Coolant Consumption The total time that the CRG is On can be confirmed If the consumption counter is larger than the time of setting to warm the warning message is displayed GC 2010 321 322 20 Appendix 20 1 Key Function List FUNC 1 Time Scheduler 2 Batch The key operations of the gas chromatograph can be automated by setting the weekly or daily schedule using the timer 3 Time Program Use batch schedule when the analytical condition is changed on the midway for example when running continuous analysis in which used files are changed over 4 Pre Pun Use time program when the parameter is changed during analysis 5 Direct Operation Use Pre Run program when the parameter is changed before analysis is started Input the event No and run at once 6 GC Configuration Date Time Setting Use to set tha date and the time Max Temperature Use to set the maximum temperature of each heater ports Transmission Parameter Use to set th
14. Fig 16 7 4 Installation status setup screen Fig 16 7 5 Installation status setup screen continued 16 7 4 2 Parameter list E Carrier gas flow controller settings The names CAR1 CAR2 and CARS are automatically assigned in ascending order of the slot No for each installed AFC Specify the flow controller carrier gas settings for each CAR UNIT TYPE For display only When an AFC is installed this is automatically displayed If a manual flow controller is installed specify the installation Slot No See below SPLITTER is automatically displayed for the Unit Type SLOT NO Selection NON SLOT1 SLOT3 SLOT5 SLOT6 Default NON This item can be set only when a manual flow controller is installed Select the Slot No where the manual flow controller is installed Slot No which have already been set cannot be selected The slot No of an installed AFC is automatically recognized and displayed 258 GC 2010 NOTE 16 Special Functions 16 7 Service and Maintenance TEMP PORT Selection NON INJ1 INJ2 DET1 DET2 AUX3 AUX4 AUX5 Default NON Specify the injection port heated zone where the flow controller tubing is connected This assosiates the flow controller to an injection port E Detector gas flow controller settings When installing detector flow control units the names DET 1 to DET 4 are automatically assigned starting with the one nearest to the GC Specify the to flow controller detector gas settings for eac
15. Fig 5 3 2 E Moving the cursor using only the A and V keys Example Main screen of the FLOW key CARL Flow Move the cursor to each parameter using the A and V keys LIHE 1 Inlet press kPa Column flow Liner yeli Split ratio Total flow 3s Items marked with lt and split mode DP use the lt and D gt Control mode keys to change the selection i For example these keys Carrier gas type He change the Split mode setting in the following order SPLIT SPLITLESS gt DIRECT gt SPLIT Column G er On Off GC 2010 61 62 5 Basic Key Operation 5 3 Basic Key Operations 5 3 3 Entering numeric values Enter a numeric value using the following procedure 1 Move the cursor to an item to be set 2 Use the numeric keys to enter a number 3 Press the ENTER key to validate the input NOTE The value becomes valid when the ENTER key is pressed If you move the cursor or display another screen before pressing the ENTER key the value is deleted To clear a value before pressing the ENTER key press the CE key 5 3 4 Changing a selection Parameters marked with lt j and gt are changed by making another selection Change the selection using the following procedure 1 Move the cursor to the item 2 Select a desired choice by pressing the 41
16. Next Toggles among the AOC parameters AUX APC CRG screens inthat order GC 2010 3 gt 16 Special Functions 1 6 1 Time Scheduler Use the Time scheduler to establish a weekly or daily schedule of automated GC operations 16 1 1 description Screen Select 1 TIME SCHEDULER from the FUNC key main screen to display the Time sched uler menu shown in Fig 16 1 1 schedule Ho Start Stop El Copy Delete Fig 16 1 1 Time scheduler menu 16 1 2 Parameter list MODE Select whether the same schedule will be executed every day or a different schedule will be executed on each day of the week EDIT Edit the schedule START STOP Set the schedule start stop procedure COPY Copy the contents of a schedule to a specified schedule DELETE Delete the contents of a specified schedule GC 2010 211 212 16 Special Functions 16 1 Time Scheduler 16 1 3 Setting the mode Select 1 MODE from the time scheduler menu to display the mode setup screen shown in Fig 16 1 2 Select whether to use the same schedule every day or to use a different schedule on each day of the week Up to 8 schedules can be set with the time scheduler Hode schedule schedule Number Number No Ho The schedule number can be set only when in Number mode Fig 16 1 2 Mode setup screen E Schedule number and day of the week N
17. Silica wool inside glass insert is packed incorrectly Re pack the silica wool If the gas supply pressure is fluctuating due to failure of the gas sylinder pressure regu lator repair or replace it Contact your Shimadzu representative GC 2010 19 Messages 29 19 Troubleshooting The system is programmed to diagnosis certain errors When an error is detected an alarm sounds and one of the error messages shown below is displayed The detected errors are recorded in the Error Log When confirmation screens are shown select one of the following actions Re set Error selecting reset Resets the system parameters restoring the conditions prior to the error System control resumes Remove the cause of the error before Ignore Error Keep the system as it is Check for the error to resolve it The codes provided with the errors help the service representative identify the errors Provide the code when calling about an error These codes are also recorded in the error log 19 2 1 System errors Power supply failure Code Message cs Note 1 DC 5V is out of range No 2 DC 24V is out of range No 3 DC 15V is out of range No 4 DC 24V FTD is out of range No PCB failure Code Message CS Note 7 10 DET n PCB error No n 1 4 11 12 CARm AFC PCB error No m 1 2 13 16 Det APCn PCB error No n 1 4
18. Fronting the column Column is overloaded Dilute sample Decrease injection volume or increase split ratio Use a column with a greater film thickness Peaks are co eluting Decrease column oven temperature Replace column to obtain better separation Tailing fronting Injection port temperature is low Increase injection port temperature Tailing Column is contaminated Condition column Refer to 18 7 Inspection and Maintenance Capil lary Column in Instruction Manual Tailing Glass insert is damaged Replace glass insert Refer to 18 5 Inspection and Maintenance Glass Insert in Instruction Manual Tailing Septum purge is not flowing or is too low Verify septum purge flow Increase septum purge flow rate Refer to 3 AFC APC in Instruction Manual Tailing Septum fragments are present inside glass insert or column Clean or replace glass insert Clip the injection port end of the column GC 2010 gt 309 310 19 Troubleshooting 19 1 Troubleshooting 19 1 4 4 Poor retention time reproducibility Possible Cause Solution The carrier gas cylinder is almost empty Replace the gas cylinder with one of at least 3 MPa pressure Carrier gas flow rate is fluctuating due to a gas leak Tighten leaking connections Replace tubing or septum Column is overloaded Dilute sample Increase split ratio Use a column wi
19. Input OPEN GCLC 8 1 1 on the C R8A keyboard and press the ENTER key to open the transmission port and start transmission of the detector signal Channel No of GC Ch1 in this example l OPEN GCLC 8 1 1 Channel No of C RSA CH1 in this example e Connection to the personal computer To use GC solution get GC 2010 transmission parameters to LEVEL3 115200bps 28 GC 2010 2 Installation 2 7 Connecting external device cables 3 gt E Connecting the Chromatopac signal cable Use the Chromatopac signal cable to send detector analog signals to the Chromatopac C R7A plus or earlier models Connect the 4PIN signal cable to the connector Ch1 or Ch2 on the rear panel The START signal between the GC and Chromatopac is communicated through this signal cable Therefore there is no need to connect the START OUT terminals on the GC or the Chromatopac k tri OOO e jee ed OOOwsssssss gt lt ch1 O D oo Fig 2 7 2 Connecting the Chromatopac signal cable GC 2010 29 30 2 Installation 2 7 Connecting external device cables E Calibration of analog wide range signal NOTE When the GC is connected to the Chromatopac C R7A C R7A plus with a chromatopac signal cable for analog signals and the signal type is set to Wide on the DET key Screen perform a calibration for proper signal transmission For details of the DET key refer to 13 Detector 1 Se
20. 4 Vibrations GC 2010 2 Installation 2 3 Installation site P B Installation clearances 2 3 6 2 3 7 N WARNING Hot air is exhausted from the back vent Do not place flammable matelials near the exhaust Minimum 300mm Minimum 100mm Depth OTN 530mm TRO TUERI MMe MOM SOSA Hight 440mm i Width 515mm j Fig 2 3 1 Rear clearance Hot air is vented at the back of the unit when the column oven cools Consider the following during installation Do not place any flammable materials behind the unit Allow a clearance of 30cm or more between the back cover and the wall Reserve extra space for maintenance and inspection behind the unit Left clearance Allow a clearance of 10cm or more on the left side The vent on the left side is important for properly cooling down the outer wall of the column oven and improving the cooling efficiency of the column oven GC 2010 15 4 Moving the GC The GC 2010 weighs approximately 30kg For a single FID model Two people must carry the GC one on the left and one on the right N CAUTION Move the GC carefully so it does not get bumped or jarred 16 GC 2010 41 29 2 Installation 5 Power supply and wiring N WARNING HIGH VOLTAGE 1 Before connecting the power cable
21. NOTE If the temperature or pressure flow program is displayed the time axis x axis cannot be changed Temperature axis Time axis Fig 9 1 2 Monitor screen chromatogram and temperature program Em To magnify the time axis ne Zooms the time axis scale DS Xt ON Unzooms the time axis scale Zooms the signal axis scale wr o To magnify the signal axis Ce OFF DOE GC 2010 To maximize the display Keys to move along the time axis Moves the chromatogram in the direction Moves the chromatogram in the direction Unzooms the signal axis scale Automatically adjusts the signal axis so that the maximum value of the chromatogram signal is displayed on the screen 9 Monitoring the GC 9 1 MONIT key Main Screen 9 1 2 Parameter list RETENTION TIME Rt Retention time is the length of time from compound injectio to detection The retention time is specific to each compound Compounds are identified based on match ing the retention time to a standard compound retention time REMAIN TIME The longest program time subtracted by the current retention time is displayed LONGEST PROGRAM TIME The longest program time indicates the total time of the longest program when comparing the temperature program the pressure program the flow rate program and the time program 9 1 3 PF menu PF menu Description Reference section Temp Mon Dis
22. STOP BIT and PARITY can be set when PROTOCOL is set to None or LEVEL or LEVEL2 Set to EVEN in case of connecting a Chromatopac NOTE Refer to 2 7 Connecting external device cables 16 6 5 3 PF menu PF menu Description Reference section Apply Down loads the parameters immediately GC 2010 241 16 Special Functions 16 6 GC Configuration 16 6 6 Setting the Ready Check Parameters The Ready Check verifies whether the preset analytical conditions have been met When the selected items reach the specified settings the STATUS light illuminates 16 6 6 1 Screen description Select 6 GC CONFIGURATION from the FUNC key screen and then select 4 READY CHECK to display the ready check screen shown in Fig 16 6 5 Set each parameter to yes or no All parameters with yes must reach their initial parameter starts in order for the GC to be ready and the STATUS light to turn green Ready Check NOT READY DIDI Temp Port DEDI Colum Temp We PRSPLI Temp Yes WEIZ Temp Yes EFD Temp Yes TEDE Temp Yes IIT Carrier Gas TMM L1 SINT Yes WBIZ Yes DI Septum AA EFLI Yes WEIZ Yes brad JReturn Drift ad Fig 16 6 5 Ready Check setup screen 16 6 6 2 Parameter list TEMP PORT TEMP Selection Yes No Default Yes Indicate which headed zones should be included in the ready check CARRIER GAS Selection Yes No De
23. This calibration contributes to good reproducibility of results 28 Next Flow Toggles among the AFC set up screens if two or more AFCs are installed in this system The FLOW key can also be used to switch screens GC 2010 3 gt 129 12 Injection Port 12 5 Split Splitless Injection System 12 5 3 Setting column parameters For capillary columns the column inner diameter length and film thickness are used to cal culate the column flow rate and linear velocity Enter the column inlet pressure and the col umn flow rate and linear velocity are calculated based on the column parameters Alternatively by entering the column flow rate and linear velocity valves the column param eters are used to calculate the corresponding column inlet pressure 12 5 3 1 Screen description Select Column PF menu from the FLOW key main screen to display the Column Diam screen shown in Fig 12 5 5 Column Diam CARI Column i d mm 0 38 Column lensth m 25 0 Film thicknege um a 58 Fig 12 5 5 Column setup screen 12 5 3 2 Parameter list NOTE COLUMN I D Range 0 01 6 00 mm Default 0 32 mm COLUMN LENGTH Range 0 1 250 0 m Default 25 0 m FILM THICKESS Range 0 00 300 00 um Default 0 50 um Set these parameter values carefully to avoid calculation errors 130 GC 2010 12 Injection Port 12 5 Split Splitless Injection System 3 gt 12 5 4 Gas saver T
24. This sets the initial temperature of a pressure program When the control mode is set to PRESS the system controls the column inlet pressure so that it remains constant during an oven temperature program COLUMN FLOW RATE Default 1 00 ml min Sets the carrier gas flow rate at the capillary column outlet atmospheric pressure at 25 C When you set the carrier gas flow rate the system calculates the column inlet pressure based on the inner diameter and the length of the column and the film thickness of the column The column flow rate is set separately so that the carrier gas flow rate desired occures at the initial temperature in the oven temperature program LINEAR VELOCITY Default 2 30 0 cm s Sets the average linear velocity of the carrier gas flowing in the capillary column When you set the linear velocity the system calculates the column inlet pressure based on the inner diameter and the length of the column and the film thickness of the column GC 2010 gt 127 128 12 Injection Port 12 5 Split Splitless Injection System The linear velocity is set separately so that the linear velocity desired occures at the ini tial temperature in the oven temperature program When the control mode is set to VELOCITY the column inlet pressure automatically changes so that the linear velocity remains constant even while the oven temperature program is running SPLIT RATIO Range 1 0 0 0 9999 9 Default 1 0 The
25. 207 15 Optional Devices 15 2 Setting the AUX APC Parameters 15 2 5 Using restrictor tubing Select the desired APC from the main APC screen Then press Resistor PF menu from the AUX APC main screen to display the restrictor tube setup screen shown in Fig 15 2 3 The difference between set and actual flow rates can be eliminated by installing a restrictor Enter the restricto s inner diameter length and resistance AUX APC Inner diameter mm 0 08 Lengbhim pg AR Resistance Z5 n Fig 15 2 3 Restrictor setup screen NOTE If the necessary pressure to flow rate conversion information is not saved in the GC the actual and measured flow rate may still not be equivalent 15 2 6 Parameter list INNER DIAMETER Range 0 01 6 00mm Default 0 00 LENGTH Range 0 1 250 0m Default 0 00 RESISTANCE Range 0 01 100000 0 Default 1000 0 When the inner diameter and the length have been entered the resistance is automatically calculated Alternatively enter only the resistance i d mm 4 length m x106 NOTE The resistance is calculated according to this formula Resistance valves greater than 105 can not be calculated 208 GC 2010 29 15 Optional Devices 1 5 3 Setting the CRG Parameters The CRG option allows temperatures below room temperature to be set The CRG can be connected to the column oven or the INJ2 15 3 1 Screen description Press the OPTI
26. CRG GC 2010 199 15 Optional Devices 15 1 Auto Injector Parameters 15 1 4 AOC priority analysis Select Priority PF menu from the AOC main screen to display the AOC priority sample screen shown in Fig 15 1 2 The batch can only be interrupted when the AOC is operating Enter the sample injection No and press Set PF menu AUC Priority Sample raparation Injection Sample on Fig 15 1 2 Priority analysis setup screen 15 1 5 Parameter list INJECTION SAMPLE INJECTION SAMPLE NUMBER NOTE Enter the sample vial No designated for priority analysis When an auto sampler carousel is not in use Short rack No 1 6 Long rack No 1 12 When an auto sampler corousel is installed No 1 150 maximum When an auto sampler carousel the allowable vial No range depends on the vial rack type and the number of racks A valve of 0 default indicates no priority sample 200 GC 2010 15 Optional Devices 15 1 Auto Injector Parameters 3 gt 15 1 6 PF menu Reference PF menu Description section Set Analyzes the vial No specified after the analysis of the current sample is finished 15 1 7 Other AOC parameters Select OtherPara PF menu from the AOC main screen to display the other parameters screen shown in Fig 15 1 3 Specify options and AOC custom parameters READY Inactive Oi QI Inj Speed Syringe 4b Fast Using 3 S
27. If a different column is installed on the same flow line that has been in use set a START TIME of approx 10 minutes If the system has been out of use for a time with no column connected set a START TIME of 1 to several hours GC 2010 81 29 7 Starting and Stopping the GC SYSTEM 4 Specifying the Stop Procedures 7 4 1 Screen Select Stop Seq PF menu from the SYSTEM key main screen to display the stop procedure setup screen shown in Fig 7 4 1 Stop Seq is displayed only when the system is in OFF status The stop procedure setup screen consists of parameters equivalent to those on the SYSTEM key main screen when the GC is in system ON status except that the current file cannot be changed Parameter changes on the stop procedure setup screen are reflected on the SYSTEM key main screen GC Stop Sequence Stop GC Stop Program Stop Time mini o stop Temp Det Cont Sleep Time min Restart GC Off Fig 7 4 1 Setting the stop procedures 7 4 0 Parameter list STOP TIME Range 0 0 6000 0 min Default 0 0 min Sets the period of time after Stop GC PF menu is pressed or after a program finishes if the program was running to stop temperature detector control The STOP TIME value on the SYSTEM key main screen is set here FLOW OFF TIME Range 0 0 6000 0 min Default because the gas control is set to Cont Sets the period of time between the end of tempera
28. Lift up the entire INJ DET cover and remove it Because the detector is hot use tweezers or pliers to handle the detector cover For Maint INJ refer to 7 Starting and Stopping the GC SYSTEM GC 2010 18 Maintenance and Inspection 18 4 Inspection and Maintenance O ring for glass insert 3 gt AN CAUTION Handle graphite O rings with care to prevent it from breaking E Replacing the O ring NOTE NOTE Take out the glass insert remove the O ring and install a new O ring Refer to 18 5 Inspection and Maintenance Glass Insert to remove and install the glass insert 1 Fluoride rubber O ring Place the fluoride rubber O ring approximately 4 mm from the top of the glass insert When inserting the glass insert in the injection port push the glass insert in until the glass insert touches the bottom of the injection port This correctly places the O ring 3mm from the top of the glass insert 2 Graphite O ring Insert the glass insert in the injection port place a graphite O ring on it and then tighten the glass insert nut Use the correct graphite O ring for the glass insert type E Leak check A leak will affect reproduceability and carrier gas will be wasted Confirm whether there is a leak or not according to the following procedure As for the following procedure there could be cases in which the error message purge leaks etc appears However it does not ma
29. The initial pressure must be set in order to create a pressure program When the control mode is set to pressure the system keeps the column inlet pressure at a constant value while the oven temperature program is running COLUMN FLOW RATE Default 1 1 00 ml min Sets the carrier gas flow rate at the capillary column exit atmospheric pressure at 25 C When you set the carrier gas flow rate the system calculates the column inlet pressure based on the inner diameter and the length of the column The column flow rate is set separately so that the carrier gas flow rate desired occures at the initial temperature in the oven temperature program LINEAR VELOCITY Default 2 30 0 cm s Sets the average linear velocity of the carrier gas flowing in the capillary column When you set the linear velocity the system calculates the column inlet pressure based on the inner diameter and the length of the column The linear velocity is set separately so that the linear velocity desired occures at the initial temperature in the oven temperature program When the control mode is set to linear velocity the column inlet pressure automatically changes so that the linear velocity remains constant even while the oven temperature program is running TOTAL FLOW RATE Range 0 0 1200 0 ml min Refer to Fig 3 5 1 Default 500 0 ml min The total flow rate varies depending on the injection mode as follows In split or splitless mode the total fl
30. in AOC 20 User s Manual GC 2010 203 15 Optional Devices 15 1 Auto Injector Parameters 15 1 10 Auto sampler carousel and other optional parameters Select Sampler PF menu from the AOC main screen to display the sampler screen shown in Fig 15 1 4 Specify the options installed on the AOC such as sampler carousel When AOC1 and AOC2 are selected for the analytical line in Line configuration of the SET key both USE OF THE SAMPLER and USE OF THE SUB AOC are automatically set to Use Sampler Use of the Sampler 4k Usel Use of the Sub AOC Use Bar Code Reader Not Use Return Inactive Fig 15 1 4 Sampler carousel and other options setup 15 1 11 Parameter list USE OF THE SAMPLER Selection Use Not Use Default Not Use This item automatically set to Use when USE OF THE SUB ACC is set to Use USE OF THE SUB AOC Selection Use Not Use Default Not Use BAR CODE READER Selection Use Not Use Default Not Use Select Use when the Bar Code reader is installed 15 1 12 PF menu System User s Manual PF menu Description Reference section When Use of the Sub AOC is set Use Alloc PF menu is displayed Alloc For details refer to 3 4 Division of Sample in AOC 20 Dual Injection m 204 GC 2010 3 gt 15 Optional Devices 1 5 2 Setting the AUX APC Parameters The pressure the flow rate and the gas type
31. 18 2 1 18 2 2 18 2 3 18 2 4 18 2 5 18 2 6 18 2 7 18 2 8 Glass insert Inspect the glass insert before starting a series of analysis Take care of dirt and silica wool position An inser counter feature is available in the GC Refer to the diagnosis item list in 14 1 Standard Diagnosis Septum Replace the septum periodically The guideline for replacement is 100 injection A septum counter feature is available in the GC Refer to diagnosis item list in 14 1 Standard Diagnosis O ring for glass insert Replace the O ring when replacing the glass insert or if there is a carries gas leak Graphite ferrule Replace the graphite ferrule if a carries gas leak is not stopped by tightening Replace the ferrule if it is completely compressed Capillary column Condition the column if it has not been used for a long time or if ghost peaks are present Flow controller Condition or replace the carrier gas molecular sieve filter if the baseline is unstable Every 6 months check the split flow line and the septum purge flow line traps and replace any saturated traps Hydrogen flame ionization detector FID Rinse or replace the igniter and the jet if ignition is not smooth or no peaks are obtained Cleaning the Unit If the exterior unit surfaces become dirty clean using a neutral detergent GC 2010 283 gt 18 Maintenance and Inspection 1 8 3 Inspection and Maintenance Septum 284
32. 2 6 Gas supply plumbing E Precautions on handling hydrogen gas AN WARNING HYDROGEN GAS PRECAUTIONS Hydrogen can explode if it is allowed to accumulate in a poorly venti lated area 1 Connect gas lines correctly Hydrogen is released into the room if the tubing is accidentally connected to the air inlet 2 When the unit is not in use close the main valve of the hydrogen gas cylinder Check for leaks at the main valve 3 Every time the unit is used check for leaks along the flow line from gas cylinder to the unit interior 4 To prevent an explosion due to a hydrogen gas leak the room in which the unit is used should be well ventilated Prohibit the use of open flame in this room 5 Close the main valve of the hydrogen cylinder immediately after completing the analyses Then turn OFF the unit and perform normal shut down procedures N WARNING HYDROGEN GAS HANDLING PRECAUTIONS The accumulation of hydrogen gas inside the column oven can cause an explosion Close all hydrogen pressure regulator valves when not in use and seal the column connection Detector Thermal insulation cup Graphite ferrule with a wire Column nut J Capping the Detector Fitting GC 2010 2 Installation 2 6 Gas supply plumbing N CAUTION GAS PLUMBING PRECAUTIONS The pressure regulator valve will be damaged if pressure above its specifications is applied Set the gas inlet pressu
33. 213 214 16 Special Functions 16 1 Time Scheduler 16 1 6 Creating a new time schedule Select New PF menu from the time schedule screen to display the Time Schedule screen shown in Fig 16 1 5 Set an item using the A and V keys and ENTER key When Finish PF menu appears after you have set items press Finish to validate the schedule In the upper half of the screen the contents of the set schedule are displayed In the lower half of the screen the schedule edit screen is displayed Up to 100 lines are available per schedule The schedule execution time range is from 00 00 to 23 59 The unit is 1 minute 16 1 7 PF menu Inactive schedule Ho Time Function Value 1 05 00 Start GC GC Start Stop Ld Stop GC Fig 16 1 5 Creating a new schedule PF menu Description Reference section Finish Validates the time schedule E Prev Page Returns to previous setup screen N s Bags Moves to next item 9 The cursor can also be moved to next item by pressing ENTER key Cancel Cancels the time schedule currently being created a GC 2010 16 Special Functions 16 1 Time Scheduler 16 1 8 Parameters available in the time scheduler Parameter Description Relay Zero Adj Turns zero adjustment for each detector on off Flame Turns ignition on off Detector ETD Turns voltage feedback on off to make
34. 324 Index F O FID 149 150 File 89 file copy 90 file initialization 91 FILE LOAD 81 Filter time constant 151 163 169 FLAME 151 FLOW CONTROL 74 Flow Controller 296 FLOW key 56 127 FLOW lamp 55 58 FLOW OFF TIME 74 Flow rate program 134 flow signal 246 Fluoride rubber O ring 118 287 For Split spiltless injection port 52 FPD 149 FTD 149 FUNC key 55 56 211 Fuse 19 G GAS CONTROL 178 Gas saver 131 Gas trap 25 GC configuration 238 GC operation log 184 Glass insert Graphite ferrule Graphite O ring 116 281 283 289 52 281 283 292 118 287 Heating generation 18 Height equivalent to theoretical plate HETP 146 Help 65 HELP key 55 56 High pressure injection 140 Hydrogen flame ionization detector 150 hydrogen gas 22 l Igniter 282 299 Ignition procedure 153 INITIALIZE 260 INJ key 56 125 Injection port 2 113 INJECTION PORT TEMP 87 Injection system 113 INLET PRESS 86 127 GC 2010 INSTALLATION PIPING 258 INSTALLATION POSITION 256 Isothermal analysis 109 J Jet 282 300 K Key function list 321 Key locking 264 L LANGUAGE 254 LCD use time 177 Leak check 27 120 Linear velocity 36 86 127 link device code 251 Load 89 LONGEST PROGRAM TIME 99 M Maint INJ 75 Maintenance of FID 299 Maintenance Parts 281 Make up 157 166 Manual extinguishment 155 Molecular sieve filter 282 283 Molecular sieve filter regeneration 298 MONIT key 55 56 97 Monitoring t
35. Buff 2 the same selectio from in BACKGRND SAVE Analysis Make an injection and press the START key to execute analysis Because background compensation is in efffect large baseline fluctuations are now eliminated GC 2010 gt 171 CHROMATOPAC C R7A CH REPORT No 21 707p 2 SUMPL1 C03 93 10 15 10 40 44 ColumnCBP1 S25 050Column flow rate4ml min Initial temperature60 C 2min Split ratio1 50 Program rate20 C minCurrent52mA Final temperature220 CATTEN2 Injection port temperature250 CSPEED10mm min TCD temperature250 C Fig 13 5 2 Example of programmed analysis without compensation CHROMATOPAC C R7A CH REPORT No 27 707h 2 SUMPL1 C03 93 10 15 10 40 44 Fig 13 5 3 Example of programmed analysis with compensation 172 E GC 2010 AAA 13 Detector 13 5 Setting the Output Signals gt 13 5 3 Detector signal subtraction When high sensitivity analysis or high temperature analysis is executed with a packed column stationary liquid vapor released from the column packing is often contained in the carrier gas making the background signal unstable If this is the case set up dual analytical flow lines with an injection port column and detec tor One flow line should have carrier gas flowing but no injections are made The other flow line recieves the sample injections The difference in detector signal between the reference and sample signal is acquired This eliminates
36. Default END Set the program rate for the flow rate program If you set the rate to 0 END appears and the program finishes at the previous ramp If you move the cursor to END and set any numeric value other than 0 the pressure and the time for that ramp can be entered 1 The purge flow rate range is from O to the total flow rate subtracted by the column flow rate and the split flow rate 12 5 8 3 PF menu PF menu Description cias Del Line Deletes a line at the current cursor position Lll Ins Line Inserts a line in line at the current cursor position On Off Set On for septum purge flow GC 2010 gt 139 140 12 Injection Port 12 5 Split Splitless Injection System 12 5 9 High pressure injection and splitter fix mode E High Pressure Injection High pressure injection is a split splitless injection method which keeps the column inlet pressure at a value higher than the analysis pressure for a specified period of time while the sample is injected Then the column inlet pressure returns to the normal analysis value High pressure injection is effective especially for the splitless injection system High pressure injections can reduce the total gas volume and improve percent recovery valves Bi Splitter Fix If the injected sample consists of a solvent with a high vaporization expansion coefficient the pressure inside the injection port drastically increases when the solven
37. Description item section Start GC Starts GC according to the parameters on the SYSTEM key main screen m Starts GC according to the parameters on the SYSTEM key main screen If no program is running the stop time countdown begins immediately when Stop GC Stop GC PF menu is selected If Stop GC is selected while a program is running the stop time countdown begins after the program finishes File Displays the file list to change to another method file 82 On this sub screen select files to load edit copy initialize and rename Sets clean up parameters Clean Up In system ON status select direct operation PF menu to run the clean up 2 Sets the parameters for the next GC start up Start Seq Start time detector and clean up parameters on this sub screen are 7 3 immediately reflected on the SYSTEM key main screen Sets the stop procedures Stop Seq This item is not displayed in system ON status fa Prepares the GC for maintenance of the injection port replacement of 18 3 Maint INJ septum glass insert etc 18 4 When GC is ready for maintenance the message GC is ready for maintenance 18 5 appears f Anal Restores the GC for analysis after performing injection port maintenance When pressed after maintenance of injection port is completed GC 2010 gt 75 29 7 Starting and Stopping the GC SYSTEM 2 Specifying Clean Up Parameters 7 2 1 Screen Description Select Clean Up
38. See 8 3 Specifying the Analytical Flow Line Components Line Config 3 Set the column oven temperature to 300 C and start the GC See 11 Creating an Oven Temperature Program and 7 Starting and Stopping the GC SYSTEM 4 Keep the column temperature at 300 C for 2 hours See 9 Monitoring the GC Thermal insulation cup Graphite ferrule with a wire Column nut or Column nut of injection port GC 2010 19 20 29 2 Installation i 6 Gas supply plumbing E Gas type and supply purity The following gases and associated purity valves are required to maintain optimal performance of the unit For detectors other than FID and TCD refer to the instruction manual corresponding to each detector Carrier gas Helium optimal purity 99 995 or more Nitrogen acceptable purity 99 995 or more Makeup gas FID Nitrogen optimal purity 99 995 or more Helium acceptable purity 99 995 or more TCD Nitrogen purity 99 995 or more Helium puritiy 99 995 or more Argon purity 99 995 or more Detector gas FID Hydrogen purity 99 995 or more Air Compressed air can be supplied by an oil free compressor must be dehumidified Dry air Oil and organic components eliminated For high sensitivity analyses use gases with a purity of 99 999 or more Gas supply pressures Carrier gas 300 980kPa Make up gas 300 980kPa Hydrogen 300 500kPa Air 300 500kPa The relationship of kPa and bar is
39. TIME FUNC VALUE LINE 0 0 EVNT 91 0 0 2 0 D1RG 1 0 1 3 0 D1RG 0 0 1 200 0 STOP 1990 0 0 END Fig 17 1 4 17 1 2 5 Batch schedule Press Print PF menu to print the bach schedule as shown below GC SAMPLE SCHEDULER START FINAL GC FILE DP FILE INJ MK COMNAD 1 5 0 Ch 1 2 1 STANDARD STEST 6 15 0 Ch 1 2 3 UNKNOWN END Fig 17 1 5 m 6C 2010 ri 271 17 Printing 17 1 Printing 17 1 2 6 Log From each screen of the GC operation log the analysis log the parameter log the error log and the diagnostic log press Print PF menu to print the parameters displayed on the screen For the analysis log only the list screen is printed The contents of the detailed analysis Screen are not printed For example press Print PF menu from the error log screen to obtain the following printed results NOTE The log items are printed in chronological order starting from the oldest GC ERROT LOG TIME OCCURED CODE ERROR MESSAGE VALUE 200 05 16 14 21 E1020 DET1 sensor down error 530 00 200 05 16 14 27 E0031 INJ DET2 A D error 200 05 16 14 27 E0032 AUX1 AUX3 A D error 200 05 16 14 27 E0011 CAR1 AFC PCB error 7 00 200 05 16 14 27 E0030 COL A D error 200 05 16 14 27 E0001 DC5V range error 8 43 200 05 16 14 27 E0002 DC24V range error 20 34 200 05 16 14 27 E0034 Battery voltage error 0 26 200 05 16 14 27 E0005 Room temp range error 84 27 200 05 16 14 27 E
40. Temp program total min 2 00 RatetEz Tempito Time min Init SS 6a 8 2 Be Equilibration Time min 3 8 Del Line Ins Line Fan Off Fig 11 1 1 COL key main screen Press the COL key to move the cursor directly to the temperature portion of the ramp This facilitates program edits when only the temperature needs to be changed GC 2010 107 11 Creating an Oven Temperature Program 11 1 COL Key Main Screen 11 1 2 Parameter list TEMP Range 0 0 450 0 C Default 25 0 C Set the initial and the final temperature for each ramp of in the oven temperature program The column oven temperature should never exceed the maximum operating temperature of the column Keep the column temperature as low as possible to prolong the column life and reduce detector noise To set the maximum over temperature refer to 16 6 4 Setting the maximum temperature limits N CAUTION Never increase the column oven temperature while air oxygen is mixed with the carrier gas This can damage the column especially for polar columns TIME Range 0 00 9999 99 min Default 0 00 min Set the hold time for the initial temperature and the final temperature for each stage of the oven temperature program RATE Range END 250 0 250 0 C min Default END Set the program rate for the oven temperature program Set the rate to 0 END appears and the program finishes at the previous ramp Move the cursor to
41. o oooccocccco hh 134 12 5 7 Splittratio program ce brassa eren edere een aa en ce tede ee dete later ero 136 12 5 8 Septum PUTO jy a E t REC ER LS ode a Ead det adeb eds 138 12 5 9 High pressure injection and splitter fx mode ilsslls sese 140 Direct Injection System 0 ccc eee n nnn 142 12 6 1 Setting the temperature 0 0 0 0 cc hh 143 12 6 2 Setting the flowrate ac 22e c heus dolce deeb hel ld dt a 144 Setting the Flow Rate Parameters 0 00 e eee eee eee eee nnn 146 Detector Introduction o 70 6 Soest RII A te ene ee 149 Hydrogen flame ionization detector FID ooooooomommm m oo 150 13 2 1 Principle of FID operatioli ui ego ptt ec DR Rae ti Rete e ce 150 13 2 2 Setting the detector 23 co ir ee E a nter amete Curt 151 13 2 3 Setting the detector gas flows o ooococcoccocooo e 156 Thermal conductivity detector TCD Lleleesssss 160 13 3 1 Principle of TCD operation o oooccocccc m hr 160 13 3 2 Setting thi detector Jeria ntesque RE Rn Ede PEE EI 161 13 3 3 Setting the detector gas flows ooooooccccocorco re 165 Filter Signal Time Constant ocoooococcoccn eee 169 GC 2010 13 5 14 14 1 14 2 14 3 14 4 14 5 14 6 15 15 1 3 gt Contents Setting the Output Signals seen 170 13 5 1 Detector signal output o oooccocccooo err 170 13 5 2 Background compensation ooccocococc
42. vi 15 2 15 3 16 16 1 16 2 16 3 16 4 29 Contents 15 1 9 PF Menus e e A tai 203 15 1 10 Auto sampler carousel and other optional parameters oooccoccoccccoo eee 204 15 1 11 Parameter list ci d p Roe d pee s te te Mesh a Ml ow etes Motel eate 204 154 12 PF menus zs A A ies EE i ei ee he soe IDOL ER 204 Setting the AUX APC Parameters seeeee enn nnn 205 15 2 1 Screen descniption sesser raaa E cia Aa eA paced AA a ees 205 15 2 2 Parameter Stagit n enana eR EIS RR TER EPR apt dite letale Pesce has e e ce Ras Ue e 206 15 2 3 PE menu list reel ten ade in ee RR OE 206 15 2 4 Setting a program A da ee s p E eS eR ud 207 15 2 5 Using restrictor t blng y ai bere aii ah REEDSSINPHE MEE mp ERE 208 15 2 6 Parameter liSt seco ox cov ret ee reos rt Ute e RE TR RUE et a he TR ake D o adore Ra e Doe 208 Setting the CRG Parameters lees nn nnn 209 15 3 1 Screeridesctiption wicca dover ee eid eia d eddies ete hey ad dede Md big 209 15 3 2 Parameter list ia E ee EX ot E ARM en Ehe o WR Rode Dep 210 15 3 3 A 4o nde Leer ctas e d Mod cabo ood ct eL s et ur c tat 210 Special Functions Time Scheduler ssaa a yen ere merde a e RA ERR m 211 16 1 1 description Soreen taa ee a twee EE eL dae Ee tants 211 16 1 2 Parameter listr mera nra m Rer ene eae eo Ad e e i E E e e a RETE enn 211 16 1 3 Setting the mode esu tpe bL aede riu adc a Aa a a Rr do 212 16 1 4 Editing a time schedule owi
43. 17 19 CARx AMC PCB error No x 1 3 20 22 CARx WBI PCB error No x 1 3 a b 1 3 4 6 7 9 10 12 23 28 APC a b PCB error No 13 15 16 18 A D converter failure Code Message CS Note 30 COL A D conv error No 31 INJ1 DET2 A D error No 32 AUXA AUX3 A D error No Feed back loop communication error Code Message cs Note 33 Loop back test error No If the above error messages appear the hardware has failed The GC system cannot be used in the event of these total errors Turn off the the system and contact your Shimadzu representative GC 2010 311 312 19 Troubleshooting 19 2 Error Messages Room temperature sensor atmospheric pressure sensor error Code Message cs Note 5 Room temperature is out of range Yes 6 Atm pressure is out of range Yes The room temperature or the atmospheric pressure is out of the AFC performance range If this error occurs although the actual room temperature atmospheric pressure is within the range the AFC sensors may have faild The system cannot be used Turn off the system and contact your Shimadzu representative Low voltage of CPU board battery Code Message CS Note 34 Battery voltage error Yes The battery on CPU board is dead it must be replaced Turn off the system and contact your Shimadzu representative Cooling fan error Code Message cs Note 35 Cooling fan error No The GC cooling fan
44. 3 Range of DET 4 Polarity of DET 1 Polarity of DET 2 Polarity of DET 3 Polarity of DET 4 Current value of DET 1 Current value of DET 2 Current value of DET 3 Current value of DET 4 DIRG D2RG D3RG DARG D1PL D2PL D3PL D4PL DICR D2CR D3CR D4CR GC 2010 275 276 17 Printing 17 3 Program Parameters E Time program STOP and repetitions When a time program STOP value is specified it is printed with the four digits described below 000800 Digit 1 value 0 Continuous When a program finishes the next program automatically starts without waiting for the start command 1 Pause at each run AOC When a program finishes the GC waits for the start command Digit 2 and 3 valves Number of times of run 00 99 00 indicates 1 repetition When both digits 2 and 3 are set to 0 nothing is printed but the number of repetition times is set to 1 Digit 4 value File No to switch to after repetitious run is finished 0 9 In order to stop the program input the current file No E Pre Run program STRT Pre Run program values are printed with numbers 0 4 described below 0 Auto 1 Manual Stop program 2 GC start 3 AOC HSS start 4 Clean up GC 2010 17 4 senno Many parameters are printed with event No The list below shows the correspondence of event No to functions 29 17 Printing E Event No list
45. 7 2 2 Parameter lisE ooo e tics eet wn yak nolan lc ten do a I e ed ita aldea 77 7 2 3 POs 2s O O Prob ene 79 Specifying Start Procedures cece eee eee eee ee 80 7 3 1 Scereen descriptiOm tai A ne rd PX as tae e edet ees 80 7 3 2 Parameter listeri 2t ote tarada os ar cia hee ad d b e Adest ayes 81 7 3 3 Example starting the system with carrier gas flow 00000 cece eee 81 Specifying the Stop Procedures eee eee eee eee 82 74 1 SCHOO iia E LAY ae RTA een pre Vaca ante Sie a Bar eg e tee rU Ren eae eee eas 82 7 4 2 Param teriliSt sss coctel UTE dus 82 7 4 3 System shut down examples o 83 Setting the Analytical Parameters and File Management SET Key Main Screen csc cee nie e Re ree ee ma Race Rond ee 85 8 1 1 Mali Screen Td cae 85 8 1 2 Parameter list 2 cierras ARA ta di da ad es 86 8 1 3 PREMENU aid A A es coer daa Ede a 88 File Management o oocccococ n n hh hh hh 89 8 2 1 Screerdescription sans sco coetu er eth Ra RR ture ba Ela be Dane ate tie a trato Bebra gc e aet 89 8 2 2 A tA eie eerte de BADEN AM dedos bb na vr e ete ett uede 89 8 2 3 opying ailes Ls e AL dado ue d seed oe M d t ettet ee te cre dade 90 8 2 4 Renaming a flle 1o la ieri ATUS Rr a PEU PERDERE 90 8 2 5 Initializing a file veo rtt eden Lt b prie erem NU Ro ig eed tre dd 91 Specifying the Analytical Flow Line Components Line Config 92 8 3 1 Screen description oco ice boh tace E rte eges Dae M a ti
46. APC in the Instruction Manual Carrier gas column length and inner diameter are incorrect Set carrier gas column length and inner diameter Refer to 12 5 2 and 12 6 2 Setting the flow rate and 12 5 3 Setting column parameters in the Instruction Manual Total flow rate is set too low and pressure cannot increase In this case measured flow rate of split vent is extremely low Increase the total flow rate Refer to 3 AFC APC in the Instruction Manual Split vent trap is clogged Even if total flow rate is set high the measured flow rate from the split vent is low Replace trap Refer to 18 8 Inspection and Maintenance Flow Controller 19 1 1 2 Continual gas leaks Possible Cause Solution Part is incorrectly installed Install part correctly Refer to 2 6 Gas supply plumbing in the Instruction Manual Graphite ferrule or other seal is damaged Replace damaged gasket part with a new one If tubing or connections are damaged replace them If the problem can not be solved contact your shimadzu representative GC 2010 19 1 2 Temperature control 19 Troubleshooting 19 1 Troubleshooting 19 1 2 1 When the temperature does not increase or reach the set value Possible Cause Solution GC has not started yet Press SYSTEM key to display GC startup procedure screen Press SYSTEM key and press Start
47. Check hydrogen air flow rate then ignite Zero level far below 0 Press MONIT key then press ZERO Adj PF menu to execute zero point adjustment If the jet or the cable is damaged contact your Simadzu repretetative for replacement TCD detector Possible Cause Solution Range is not x1 Set range to x1 Current set value is too low Increase current setting Decrease TCD thermostatic oven temperature and increase maximum working current Makeup gas flow rate is too high Set it to the proper value He Approx 7 5 mL min N2 Approx 8 0 mL min Split ratio is too high for split analysis Decrease split ratio Carrier gas leaks Check for injection port and column connection leaks Capillary column is installed incorrectly Install column correctly Column is contaminated Condition column Carrier gas or makeup gas is contaminated Sufficiently purge air inside flow line Replace tubing Use higher purity gas Sample concentration is low Or injection volulme is too low Increase sample concentration or injection volume Wrong column is used Replace existing column with one appropriate for the compounds analyzed more polar less polar etc Another analytical condition such as temperature or column flow rate is incorrect Change the analytical conditions GC 2010 19 1 4 2 Presence
48. PF menu from the SYSTEM key main screen to display the clean up parameter setup screen shown in Fig 7 2 1 The parameters set for the clean up program are set by including Clean Up Para as part of the GC start procedure Clean up should be performed to eliminate contamination before analysis Reform the clean up when the gas chromatograph has not been used for a while or if a new column has been installed Clean Up cre GE 0 FILEO A Column oven fU Temp t E 25 8 TU Flow TORIA M Inlet press kPa 100 0 Split ratio ET Purge flow MRE o DELLI THI INJi iii Temp E _ 25 8 DET DETi im Temp t 258 0 MakeUpFlow Fig 7 2 1 Setting the clean up parameters 76 GC 2010 7 Starting and Stopping the GC SYSTEM 7 2 Specifying Clean Up Parameters 3 gt 7 2 2 Parameter list E Main screen of clean up COLUMN OVEN TEMP Range 0 0 450 0 C Default 25 0 C Sets the default value of the column oven temperature for the clean up method The clean up oven temperature should be 20 to 30 C higher than the temperature program used for actual analysis Neither temperature should exceed the maximum temperature indicated on the column If the clean up oven temperature exceeds the maximum column temperature indicate that the regular analysis parameters should be used for clean up by setting Analysis Para for the start procedure INLET PRESS Range 0 0 970 0 kPa Refer to Fig 3 5 1 Default 100 0 kPa
49. SPEED PLUNGER Selecton Slow Middle Fast Default Fast Specifies the plunger speed during injection USE THE SAME PARAM Selection Yes No Default No This item is displayed on the main parameter setup screen when a dual injector is used Select Yes to operate the sub AOC with same parameters as those of the main AOC AOC POWER Selection On Off Default On Turns the AOC power on and off built in GC 2010 power supply 198 GC 2010 15 Optional Devices 15 1 Auto Injector Parameters 15 1 3 PF menu PF menu Description Releretice section Start Starts AOC and gas chromatograph HE Temporarily stops the AOC Stop If Start PF menu is pressed in stop status the AOC resumes the opera tion before Stop PF menu was pressed Priority Sets up a Priority analysis 15 1 4 Other Para Sets AOC options and customization 15 1 7 Sampler Sets the auto sampler sub injector and bar code reader 15 1 10 Reset Resets AOC to the status before control was started Loads parameters from the AOC to the AOC setup screen of the gas Upload chromatograph Toggles between the main AOC setup screen and the sub AOC setup Main Sub pil Available only when an AOC 1 and AOC 2 are configured in the analytical line and sub AOC is set to Use in Sampler PF menu Print Prints the parameters on the Chromatopac NN Next Toggles amoung these screens in order AOC parameters AUX APC gt
50. Sets the default value of the column inlet pressure for the clean up method PURGE FLOW RATE Range Refer to Fig 3 5 3 Default 3 0 ml min Sets the septum purge flow rate for the clean up method The septum purge removes con tamination in the injection port near the septum If the split ratio is set to 1 0 the total flow rate remains fixed regardless of to the oven temperature SPLIT RATIO Range 1 0 0 0 9999 9 Default 1 0 Sets the split ratio for the clean up method Set the split ratio to 1 0 for the total flow rate to remain fixed regardless of the oven temperature INJECTION PORT TEMP Range 0 0 450 0 C Default 250 0 C Sets the injection port temperature for the clean up method DETECTOR TEMP Range 0 0 450 0 C in FID Default 250 0 C Sets the detector temperature for the clean up method For any detector other than an FID its set temperature must be within the valid range of the detector MAKE UP FLOW RATE The range and default value depends upon the kind of detector Refer to the values given for each detector Make up gas is inert gas which maximizes detector sensitivity This sets its flow rate for the clean up method Each type of detector requires different flow rates of make up gas AUX APC PRESS Range 0 0 970 0 kPa Default 100 0 kPa Sets the AUX APC pressure for the clean up method This item is only valid when an AUX APC has been installed GC 2010 77 7 Starting and Stopping the GC SYSTE
51. Unlock AAN GC 2010 Fig 16 9 3 Key unlock screen 16 Special Functions 16 9 Key Lock and Parameter Lock 16 9 3 Parameter locking Select 9 LOCK from the FUNC key screen and then select 2 PARAMETER LOCKING to display the screen shown in Fig 16 9 4 The parameter lock function prevents unauthorized parameter changes for analytical conditions such as temperature pressure and flow rate Setup values can be monitored but cannot be changed When the password is to be required set USE PASSWORD to USE enter a password then press Lock PF menu The parameter lock function is also available without password arameter Locking Use Password Password Press PF2 key to entering PARAMETER LOCK mode Press Password PF menu to display the password setup screen Fig 16 9 4 Parameter locking main screen GC 2010 2 265 16 Special Functions 16 9 Key Lock and Parameter Lock E Setting a password Select Password PF menu from the screen shown in Fig 16 9 4 to display the password screen shown in Fig 16 9 5 The password is a number ranging from 1 to 9999 The factory set password is 2010 lt Setting a password gt Enter each requierd password and press Set PF menu Enter the new password twice to confirm it arameter Locking Qld Password Mew Password Confirm new password
52. amd then select 6 PORT NAME CUSTOMIZATION the Name customization screen shown in Fig 16 6 13 appears Specify the names of GC components 8 characters alphanumeric and symbols To customize the name refer to 5 3 5 Changing item names in 5 3 Basic Key Operations Name Customization THE Carrier Name Customiz AUX APC Name Customiz ber Name Customiz El Relay Mame Customiz select function JReturn a Fig 16 6 13 Name setup screen 16 6 8 2 Customization example If the Heater Name and Carrier Name are customized the Line Configuration screen changes as shown in Fig 16 6 14 Line Confisurati The port name was changed using Carrier Name Customiz 488 348 E Md lt There is no injection port in INJ2 and there is only a The pe le Fi n AFCHPU carrier flow controller were changed from Heater etector TTT Name Customiz Ui FIDBOOGP JReturn PA Fig 16 6 14 Name customization example GC 2010 16 Special Functions 16 6 GC Configuration 16 6 8 3 Heater Name Customization Select 6 GC CONFIGURATION from the FUNC key screen and then 6 PORT NAME CUSTOMIZATION and finally select 1 HEATER NAME CUSTOMIZ to open the screen shown in Fig 16 6 15 Only listed heated
53. and p gt key 3 Press the ENTER key to validate the selection NOTE The selection change becomes valid when the ENTER key is pressed If you move the cursor or display another screen before pressing the ENTER key the change is not made To clean the selection before pressing the ENTER key press the CE key Change the selection by Display Customization pressing the lt and gt key In this example the selection Inlet Pressure 15 changes in this order On gt Off gt On Column Flow Rate Ln Press the ENTER key to Linear Velocity Off validate the selection Fig 5 3 4 GC 2010 5 3 5 5 Basic Key Operation 5 3 Basic Key Operations Changing item names Customize file names and other names with alphanumeric characters and symbols Change the name using the following procedure 1 Move the cursor to an item to be changed using the A and V keys 2 Move the cursor to a character to be changed using the lt and P keys 3 Input a character as described in the following section on entering characters The character input procedure described below Press the ENTER key to validate the input Repeat steps 2 to 4 to enter a name Press the CE key to delete one character at the cursor s current position an o Oi Rename File dB 0 Gc 2010 WIL File List D o Ec 2010 FILE1 FILEZ FILES FILE4 FILES FILES FILE AEC DEF CHI IL 150 POR ST
54. description 5 FID accessories only for models with FID Description Part No Qty Chromatopac signal cable 221 47251 91 1 Ferrule adjuster for FID 221 41532 92 1 6 TCD accessories only for models with TCD Description Part No Qty Ferrule adjuster for TCD 221 48610 01 1 CAUTION label TCD 2010 221 42741 1 Card case A6 038 03055 1 Chromatopac signal cable 221 47251 91 1 GC 2010 Wrench 6X8 P N086 03003 Wrench 10x12 P N086 03011 Wrench for Glass insert nut P N221 46977 Graphite ferrule 0 5 for capillary 10pcs P N221 32126 05 Silica wool 29rams P N221 48600 Injection port cover P N221 43597 Glass insert for split P N221 41444 01 Glass insert for splitless P N221 48335 01 Silicon rubber septum 20pcs G type blank nut P N201 35584 P N221 35566 92 Fluoride rubber O r ing 5pcs Column nut P N036 11203 84 P N221 32705 Aluminum gaskets 1000cs Column nut of injection port P N201 35183 P N221 16325 01 Branch tube Ferule adjuster For SPL P N221 09688 91 P N221 41532 91 Ferule adjuster For Detector Fig 2 1 1 Standard Accessories p GC 2010 js E AOC 20i Parts list for GC 2010 AOC 20i for GC 2010 consists of the following parts Please check them when unpacking the unit 2 Installation 2 1 Shipment Verification
55. is displayed when SAMPLE TYPE is set to Unknown S is displayed when SAMPLE TYPE is set to Standard S is displayed when SLOPE TEST is set to On C is displayed when CLEAN UP is set to On 16 2 3 PF menu PF menu Description jokes Start Starts the batch schedule aes Stop Stops the batch schedule 16 2 4 New Creates a new batch schedule 1627 Del line Deletes the line at the current cursor position Print Prints the schedule to a Chromatopac prm GC 2010 gt 221 222 16 Special Functions 16 2 Batch Schedule 16 2 4 Creating a new batch schedule for single injector Select New PF menu from the batch schedule screen to display the new batch schedule screen shown in Fig 16 2 2 Set an item using the A and V keys and ENTER key When Finish PF menu becomes available and the items have been set press Finish to validate the schedule At the top of the screen the contents of the set schedule are displayed At the bottom of the screen the schedule can be edited Up to 100 lines are available per schedule Inactive Single 400 201 8 Vial GC DP HINJ Mk CHD i 3 Chi 8 ju c 4 61 Chi 1 U Vial start vial Ho Ek Final vial No NE sample Inject sample Fig 16 2 2 New batch schedule screen for single injector GC 2010 16 Special Functions 16 2 Batch Schedule gt 16 2 5 Parameter
56. mm Weight 30 kg Power supply 100 VAC standard model and FID detector 1800 VA 50 60 Hz 230 VAC standard model with FID detector 2600 VA 50 60 Hz 4 p GC2010 Les 29 2 Installation 1 Shipment Verification This unit consists of the following parts Verify that all items are present GC 2010 main body 2 Quick reference Part Number 221 40450 3 Instruction manual CD ROM Part Number 221 40442 4 Standard accessories Type Description Part No Qty Wrench 6 x 8 086 03003 2 Tools Wrench 10 x 12 086 03011 2 Wrench for Glass insert nut 221 46977 1 Branch tube 221 09688 91 1 Injection port Column nut 221 16325 01 1 Column nut 221 32705 1 Parts Ferrule adjuster for SPL SPL Column insertion jig 221 41532 91 1 Column hanger 221 47159 1 Injection port cover 221 43597 1 G type blank nut with 2pcs 221 35566 92 1 Silicon rubber septum with 20pcs 201 35584 1 Silica wool stuffing with 2g 221 48600 1 Graphite ferrule 0 5 for capillary with 10pcs 221 32126 05 1 Consumables Aluminum gaskets with 100pcs 201 35183 1 Glass insert for split 221 41444 01 1 Glass insert for splitless 221 48335 01 1 Fluoride rubber O ring for glass insert with 5pcs 036 11203 84 1 The column hanger is inserted into the support slots in the oven interior Attach the injection port cover to INJ DET cover in case of manual injection Refer to 2 2 Component
57. part replacement status and standard signal out put SYSTEM key Starts stops GC Manages the analytical condition file PF key Selects the PF menu displayed at bottom of the screen PF programmable function Toggle key Toggles through the PF menu displayed at bottom of the screen MONIT key Monitors the GC status and analysis status Displays the GC temperature pressure and flow rate status for each heated zone as well as chromatograms SET key Accesses commonly used items such as temperature pressure and flow rate for each component on one screen Manages the analytical condition file like the SYSTEM key FUNC key Accesses less frequently used items COL key Sets the oven temperature program FLOW key Sets the carrier gas flow rate parameters such as pressure flow rate and split ratio INJ key Sets the temperature of injection port or temperature program for an OCI PTV DET key Sets the detector temperature range and current or other detector related param eters OPTION key Sets the parameters for optional units such as an auto injector or CRG HELP key Describes the procedure and sugggests valid parameter ranges Jumps to a desired item using an index function Cursor key Moves cursor up down left and right A V lt and gt A blinking cursor indicates the location of parameter value entry lt and gt keys may be used to change the selection Numeric keys 0 9 Enter numeric values
58. 14 2 Log Reading Menu 14 2 5 Parameter log When 3 PARAMETER LOG is selected parameter names and new values are displayed when parameters are changed In addition the direct operation of valves etc are also displayed Screen description Select 2 LOG READING MENU from the DIAG key main screen then select 3 PARAMETER LOG The screen shown in Fig 14 2 5 appears Up to 50 logs are saved If the number of logs exceeds 50 existing logs are deleted starting from the oldest Parameter Log Time changed Mame Value 43 12 62 08 P1DD 5999 8 12 03 00 CHAF a 93 12 86 00 APRY 20 56 8 12 0 00 CFPS ize8 8 43 12 08 06 DLWI 739 08 12 8 0a APGI 35 8 12 8 8 FTVS 128 43 12 02 00 SSYZ 166 43 12 08 08 SCCI 300 43 12 82 00 HAPR 300 0 48 12 87 55 GEPR 1 8 8 1 02 57 CITP 04 4 istuni lear Log Print Fig 14 2 5 Parameter log screen and right arrow keys NOTE If there are more items than can be displayed on one screen scroll through the screen using the left 2 PF menu PF menu Description SEHEN section Deletes all displayed logs Clear Log When Clear Log PF menu is pressed the screen changes and the message Clear log with PF2 appears Press Clear Log PF menu to clear the log Print Prints the parameter log to a Chromatopac GC 2010 gt 187 188 14 Diagnosis 14 2 Log Reading Menu 14 2 6 Error log When 4 ERROR
59. 2 2 Component description ZN CAUTION Do not touch the connections or terminals when the power is on This could damage the circuits No Name Description 1 Power cable Supplies power to the unit 2 Exhaust vent This vents the column oven during cooling 3 Carrier gas inlet Supplies carrier gas 4 Detector gas inlet Supplies detector gas 5 START signal input terminal Connect an external device if any to this terminal to receive a start signal 6 READY signal terminal Outputs the READY signal to any external device Such as the auto injector 7 START signal output terminal Connect an external device if any to this terminal to output the start signal 8 RS 232C connector Connect the RS 232C cable 9 pin to this connector For I O of digital signal 9 Relay terminal Relay terminal to switch at EVENT91 and 92 NR Connect this connector to the RS 232C terminal in the power 10 AOC communication connector unit of AOC 20 i s Detector signal output terminal Outputs the detector signal to analog input of a Chromatopac or 11 analog other type of data processing unit ch1 ch2 12 AOC power supply Connects AOC 20i and AOC 20s option 12 1 INJECTOR1 connector Connect the auto injector in single mode Connect the main auto injector in dual mode 12 2 INJECTOR2 connector Connect the subordinate auto injector in dual mode 12 3 SAMPLER connector Connect the autosampler
60. 288 18 Maintenance and Inspection 18 4 Inspection and Maintenance O ring for glass insert 13 In case of fluoride rubber O ring confirm that the pressure does not drop more than 15 kPa per hour or 2 5 kPa in 10 minutes In case of graphite O ring confirm that the pressure does not drop more than 21 kPa per hour or 3 5 kPa in 10 minutes If the pressure has dropped more than the above specified values there is a leak somewhere 14 When the leak check has passed set the system back into operating status E Possible leak positions NOTE In case the leak check conditions has failed check the following items on the GC for possible leaks septum injection inlet around the injection port the connection of piping split vent around the blind plug purge vent around the blind plug and the connection of column with a leak detector or snoop In case you have localized a leak in one of the above positions do the following according to the leak localization Septum injection inlet replace septum Around the injection port replace O ring of glass insert e Split vent replace blind plug seal e Purge bent replace blind plug seal e Connection of column replace graphite ferrules and column nut AN CAUTION Do not use the leak detecting fluid nor soapy water for gas leak check on the connections above the carrier and detector gas controllers AFC APC The drips may damage the controller
61. 4 8 SC 2010 i 43 44 3 AFC APC 5 AFC and APC Control Ranges For the AFC the column inlet pressure can be set from 0 to 970 kPa and the total flow rate can be set to 0 to 1 200 ml Refer to Figs 3 5 1 and 3 5 2 However these values are instrument specifications valid when the primary pressure supplied to the GC 2010 is 980 kPa The allowable pressure and flow rate settings are limited by the primary pressure as shown in Fig 3 5 1 Fig 3 5 2 In addition the pressure settings are limited by the column type and the purge flow rate 150kPa 1200 ml min Total flow rate 720 ml min Primary 360 pressure ml min Primary pressure 290kPa 590kPa Column inlet pressure Fig 3 5 1 Available setting ranges He H2 0 1ml min 0 1kPa is not a valid setting GC 2010 Total flow rate 600 ml min Primary pressure 980kPa 300 Primary ml min K pressure 600kPa 150 ml min 7 290kPa 590kPa Column inlet pressure Fig 3 5 2 Available setting ranges N2 0 1ml min 0 1kPa is not a valid setting NOTE When options are added to the flow line the range above becomes narrow 970kPa 3 AFC APC 3 5 AFC and APC Control Ranges The allowable pure flow rate setting depends on the column inlet pressure Figure 3 5 3 shows the range of purge flow rates permitted 300 250 200 150
62. 44585 1 2 Spacer front left 221 44892 1 3 Spacer for height adjustment 221 45215 1 4 Spacer back right 221 48270 1 5 Spacer front right 221 48271 1 6 Spacer SBB 320 037 38856 29 1 7 Spring washer for M4 023 77040 4 8 Washer for M4 023 66140 01 2 9 Nut for M4 023 04140 1 10 Wrench 7 x 8 086 03004 1 11 Wrench 5 5 x 7 086 03001 1 12 Screw M4 x 30 020 46554 4 GC 2010 gt 29 2 Installation 2 Component description B Front Danger of burns Keep the column oven door closed when the oven is at high temperature Keep the injection port cover on when making manual injections AN WARNING HIGH TEMPERATURE GC 2010 Door latch Fig 2 2 1 No Name Description 1 Column oven door Pull the latch on the lower right to open the door Press the center of the door to close it 2 Key Display Used for various input and displaying component status 3 Battery case for FPD fan Houses the battery for FPD cooling fan option Power switch Turns the power of the unit on and off GC 2010 Bl Oven interior 2 Installation 2 2 Component description N WARNING HIGH TEMPERATURE Danger of burns When the injection port or detector temperature is high never touch the connections or the internal surfaces of the oven Uss
63. C Set the detector temperature The TCD sensitivity is proportional to the difference in temperature between the detector and the filament Accordingly the sensitivity increases as the detector temperature decreases However the detector is normally set approximately 10 C higher than the final column oven temperature this prevents con tamination in the TCD cell To set the maximum temperature limit refer to 16 6 4 Setting the maximum temperature limits GC 2010 161 13 Detector 13 3 Thermal conductivity detector TCD SIGNAL POLARITY Selection Default When analyzing compounds with a thermal conductivity higher than the carrier gas baseline peaks are inverted negative When this occurs switch to a polarity of to produce positeve peaks CURRENT Range 0 100 mA Default 0 mA The TCD sensitivity is approximately proportional to the cube of the current If the sensitivity is insufficient increase the current within the range shown in the figure below The maximum operating current is determined by the detector temperature and the carrier gas type Keeping the current highre than necessary shortens the filaments life and can cause baseline drift AN CAUTION If the current is turned on before the carriergas make up gas has completely replaced the air the filament can be blown Ensure that the current is set to 0 at first Press the SYSTEM key main screen allow carrier gas to flow for approximately 10 minute
64. E HP OUT O Hi a SEDIT SPLIT 9 Injection port Capillary column Column oven Fig 18 8 1 Filter locations split splitless Carrier gas CARRIER PURGE PURGE IN cH HH tHe 1i kH out Capillary column Column oven Fig 18 8 2 Filter locations WBI 296 GC 2010 18 Maintenance and Inspection 18 8 Inspection and Maintenance Flow Controller 18 8 1 Inspection maintenance cycle Replace the purge and split vent traps periodically The guideline for replacement is usually 6 months However when analyzing many samples whith high boiling point compounds or compounds which are solid at room temperature you should replace the traps more fre quently And in the following cases you should inspect and maintain the filter and the traps When the baseline is unstable or there is significant noise These problems occur when the molecular sieve filter is saturated Replace or regenerate it The replacement cycle of each trap is 6 months However if the traps is clogged replace it The following section describes how to decide that a trap is clogged 18 8 2 Inspection maintenance E Trap inspection The procedure below describes how to inspect the trap when capillary column is used The procedure for wide bore columns is described in parentheses 1 Set the purge flow rate to 0 For the procedure refer to 12 5 8 Septum purge 2 Leave the column installed For wide bore columns
65. GC PF menu Heater control is set to Off Set control to On on COL INJ DET setup screen Because start time is set to a high value or 9999 heating has not started yet Set start time to a lower value Note Immediately after this setup value is changed the new value is in effect Heat loss is being coused by an open oven door or insulation out of place Close the oven door Replace the insulation Because maximum temperature is set to a very low value an overheat error has occured Increase the maximum temperature setting Because DET actual temperature is lower than the set value of COL temperature According to keep the detector clean column oven temperature can not exceed DET actual temperarture Set DET temperature larger than COL temperature Only an oven with the CRG option can attain a temperature below room temperature The lower temperature setting may cause an error if the CRG option is removed or turned off Change the temperature setting 19 1 3 Detector 19 1 3 1 FID 1 The FID flame does not ignite properly Possible Cause Solution Column is not connected Connect the column Hydrogen gas is not supplied or its flow rate is incor rect Supply hydrogen gas or set its flow rate to a proper value Air is not supplied or its flow rate is incorrect Supply air or set its flow rate to a proper value Refer to 18 9 I
66. GC is pressed the AFC in the current analytical line which is set to On starts If AFC is set to Off during carrier gas control the control stops When it is set to On again the carrier gas control restarts Press Prog Sets the column inlet pressure program 12 5 5 FLOW Prog Sets the total flow rate program 12 5 6 Purge Sets the septum purge flow rate and the flow rate program 12 5 8 Offset Performs offset calibration of the AFC sensor This calibration contributes to good reproducibility of results a8 Next Flow Toggles among the AFC setup screens if two or more AFCs are installed in this system The FLOW key can also be used to Switch screens GC 2010 gt 145 29 12 Injection Port 1 2 4 Setting the Flow Rate Parameters 146 E Linear velocity and carrier gas selection In capillary analysis the type and the flow rate of the carrier gas have a considerable effect on the column efficiency The figure below shows changes in the HETP Height Equivalent to Theoretical Plate at different linear velocity valves for nitrogen helium and hydrogen car rier gas HETP H2 10 20 30 40 m s Carrier gas linear velocity Fig 12 7 1 Effect on linear velocity and HETP for various carrier gases H V curve The graph above shows that the lowest HETP values are obtained when nitrogen is used as the carrier gas and the linear velocity is set to a value a little
67. Increase supply pressure from the gas cylinder For example adjust the regulator DETECTOR IGNITION Refer to 19 Troubleshooting ANY OTHER ITEM Contact your Shimadzu representative GC 2010 3 14 Diagnosis 14 2 Log Reading Menu 14 2 1 Screen description Select 2 LOG READING MENU from the DIAG key main screen to display the Log Read ing Menu screen shown in Fig 14 2 1 og Reading Menu aC nalysis Log Operation Log Parameter Log El Error Log EJ Diagnostic Log Fig 14 2 1 Log reading menu main screen 14 2 2 Parameter list GC OPERATION LOG Displays the power On Off log and the system On Off log ANALYSIS LOG Displays the analysis log This log records whether analyses were finished and whether con trols deviated from their target valves PARAMETER LOG Displays the key operation log and the parameter change log ERRORLOG Displays the log of displayed error messages DIAGNOSTIC LOG Displays the diagnosis log GC 2010 183 14 Diagnosis 14 2 Log Reading Menu 14 2 3 GC Operation log Select 1 GC OPERATION LOG to display the system On Off log and the heater On Off log 1 Screen description Select 2 LOG READING MENU from the DIAG key main screen then select 1 GC OPERATION LOG The screen shown in Fig 14 2 2 appears Up to 50 logs are stored If the number of logs exceeds 50 existing logs are deleted starting with the o
68. LOG is selected the log of all errors which have been displayed is shown 1 Screen description Select 2 LOG READING MENU from of the DIAG key main screen then select 4 ERROR to display the screen shown in Fig 14 2 6 Up to 100 logs are saved If the number of logs exceeds 100 existing logs are deleted starting from the oldest Error Log Tome ocetred Code Walie Modification during analysis 46 13 18 15 Edel 69 Modification during analysis 46 13 18 13 Ed301 26669 Modification during analysis 95 13 18 13 E4301 26668 Modification during analysis 95 13 18 13 Edc0l 26667 Modification during analysis 95 13 18 13 Ed381 26627 Modification during analysis 06 13 18 18 Edsel 29 istuni lear Log Print 2 PF menut Fig 14 2 6 Error log screen NOTE If there are more items than can be displayed on one screen scroll through the screen using the left and right arrow keys PF menu Description Helerones section Deletes all displayed logs Clear Lo When Clear Log PF menu is pressed the screen changes and the 9 message Clear log with PF2 appears Press Clear Log PF menu to clear the log Print Prints the error log to a Chromatopac GC 2010 14 2 7 Diagnostic log 14 Diagnosis 14 2 Log Reading Menu When 5 DIAGNOSTIC LOG is selected the resulst of the standard diagnosis are displayed The results of the
69. No n 1 4 This message appears when the FID does not ignite within a certain time When the message appears hydorogen gas flow does not stop automatically for manual flow control Shut off the hydrogen gas first for safety then check the following items 1 The column is connected 2 Hydrogen is supplied at proper flow rate 3 Airis supplied at proper flow rate 4 Filament in igniter is intact 5 The jet in the FID is not clogged 6 Unused FID is not set to On Code Message CS Note 4207 H2 AIR APC are not ready No This message appears when the APC for hydrogen or air is not Ready at the time of ignition Check whether the gas supply pressure is stable and whether gas does not leak If there is not problem with the gas supply the hardwere has failed Turn off the system and contact your Shimadzu representative 19 2 6 Other errors Code Message cs Note 4301 Settings were changed No This message appears when a set value was changed while the program is running If the paramenter or event has not yet been executed the new value is used for the analysis GC 2010 19 Troubleshooting 19 2 Error Messages 3 gt Code Message CS Note 4302 Program time is over No 4303 Clean up time is over No 4304 Pre run prog time is over No This message appears when the program execution time exceeds the maximum allowable value 9999 99 min Change the
70. On Off Select On to restart the gas flow p Default value is On Offset Performs offset calibration of APC sensor 3 6 This calibration improves the reproducibility of results i GC 2010 gt 157 13 Detector 13 2 Hydrogen flame onization detector FID 13 2 3 4 Flow rate program for detector gas Press Program PF menu from Det Gas PF menu to display the Detector gas screen shown in Fig 13 2 4 Here set a flow rate program for detector gas The flow rate program procedure is the same for the makeup gas hydrogen gas and air For the flow rate program setting procedure refer to 12 5 6 Creating a Flow rate program A 7 ramp program can be set Flow monitor Program total min A AA Rate Me Flow Time min Set the program for hydro Init 47 9 A m gen and air the same way Press the appropriate PF 1st END menu to set the programs Fig 13 2 4 Detector gas program 158 GC 2010 13 Detector 13 2 Hydrogen flame ionization detector FID 13 2 3 5 Detector gas program parameters FLOW RATE The range and the default valve differs for each gas See 13 2 3 2 Parameter list Set the default flow rate and the final flow rate for each stage of the detector gas flow rate program TIME Range 0 00 9999 99 min Default 0 00 min Set the retention time for the initial flow rate and the final flow rate for each ramp of the dete
71. Printing Eo 269 17 1 1 Connection to Chromatopac sesse saas rr 269 17 1 2 Parameters to be printed 000 hn 269 AOC commands once A mda eee Roe ex d pea ain e ra a dua inn 273 Program Parameters oooocoocccc e n n n nnn 275 Event No ijn Sev pita Sie eee see a us utpat e fele en a pina ter 277 Maintenance and Inspection Maintenance Parts cR a Rm uera ee di 281 18 1 1 Septum osx hut alin Sek EE A gerent enia Sacs haa 281 18 1 2 O ring for glass insert ooo 281 18 1 3 Gla ss Insert 4 bd tee te beber oe ta bends br td 281 18 1 4 Graphite ferrule ics 2o ere a shea glanced 281 GC 2010 vii viii 18 2 18 3 18 4 18 5 18 6 18 7 18 8 18 9 19 19 1 19 2 3 gt Contents 18 1 5 Capillary COMM 2 AE A Det ufu Rost rictu eh OR Ely me 281 18 1 6 Flow controlor eb et eR RUE Ee ed Aa had Gad e e ba eee ested bsp 282 18 1 7 Hydrogen flame ionization detector FID 0 00 00 ce ss 282 18 1 8 Miscellaneous 15 59 Sehr ree RO EBERT e eX UE E ND AM arie e EH E 282 Inspection and Maintenance Intervals 0000 eee eee eee 283 18 2 1 Gl ssinse iss Said sia Rae ene Peele be a pte ta eot Se eld otal eae 283 18 2 2 SOP ote o cet eas eee cent ge Aone RN 283 18 2 3 O ring Tor glass insert 2 coss Ses Ged ed a See ee ca 283 18 2 4 Graphite ferrule 3d tese zoe ue ate tt ent eee eut dts odes 283 18 2 5 Capillary column 5222 4 228 Satan DISSE a Qe Re ee ee ee 283 18 2 6 Flow control
72. Selecting the flow signal Select the signal type from the main screen and then press FLOW to display the screen shown in Fig 16 6 9 Select the flow signal to be output 246 Select the carrier gas detector gas and APC gas items The APC gas can be set when the APC is installed as an option in any location other than the flow controller or the detector gas E Carrier gas If you select the carrier gas for the flow signal selection the screen shown in Fig 16 6 9 appears Select an item to be output E Detector gas Signal Setting Det Sig oh Detector Gas APC Gas Primary Pre Total Flow from each area Liner Veloc Split Ratio Purge Press Purge Flow Channel 1 Temp ch Flow Milli Pressure JReturn Next Chl O 1g The currently set channel No is displayed Fig 16 6 9 Carrier gas signal setup screen If you select the detector gas for the flow signal selection the screen shown in Fig 16 6 10 appears GC 2010 Signal Setting Channel 1 Temp 5 H2 Flow Select an item to be output MakeUp Pres MakeUp Flow from each area Air Press Air Flow DEF IDI cre TCDS CDETHS DETH4 JReturn Next Ch y The currently set channel No is displayed Fig 16 6 10 Detector gas signal setup screen E APC gas If you select the APC gas for the flow signal selection to display the
73. When the message GC is ready for maintenance appears on the screen injection port inspection maintenance can begin Lift up the entire INJ DET cover and remove it Because the detector is hot use tweezers or pliers to handle the detector cover For Maint INJ refer to 7 Starting and Stopping the GC SYSTEM GC 2010 18 Maintenance and Inspection 18 3 Inspection and Maintenance Septum 3 gt E Conditioning the septum For high sensitivity analysis impurities from the septum may be detected as ghost peaks Condition the septum as described below 1 Soak the septum in hexane for 10 to 15 hours The septum will absorb hexane and swell into approximately twice its size Therefore use a container with a wide opening and a lid 2 Take out the septum and put it into a rinse container Pay strict attention when handling a septum swollen with hexane because it can easily crumble 3 Let the septum air dry in a clean area 4 After drying bake the septum at 130 to 150 C for approximately 2 hours NOTE Store the septum in a clean sealed containes to prevent contamination Bi Inspection When inspecting only the septum remove the septum nut above the septum take out the septum then condition it or replace it with a new one Septum nut Glass insert nut Fig 18 3 1 E Septum installation Install the conditioned septum or a new septum using the following procedure When using an autosampler
74. after the sampling time elapses DIRECT Closes the split flow line and the set column inlet pressure in pressure mode or the set total flow rate in flow mode occurs When making direct injection analy ses select WBI in the setup screen so that SPLIT mode is not available CONTROL MODE Selection PRESS VELOCITY FLOW for direct injection mode Default PRESS When the injection mode is set to SPLIT or SPLITLESS PRESS Controls the system so that the column inlet pressure remains constant VELOCITY Controls the system so that the linear velocity remains constant When the injection mode is set to DIRECT PRESS Controls the system so that the column inlet pressure remains constant VELOCITY Controls the system so that the linear velocity remains constant FLOW Controls the system so that the flow rate remains constant INJECTION PORT TEMP Range 0 0 450 0 C Default 25 0 C Set the injection port temperature the default temperature for a programmable injection port DETECTOR TEMP Range 0 0 450 0 C in FID Default 25 0 C Set the detector temperature Allowable temperature ranges vary for each detector Refer to range specified for the detec tor s in use The column flow rate ranges from 0 to the value at which the calculated column inlet pressure is 970 kPa or less and the calculated total flow rate is 1 200 ml min 2 The linear velocity ranges from 0 to the value at which the calculated column
75. an analysis file can be set to begin the next time the power is turned on or the GC is restarted Any settings changed on this screen are reflected in the SYSTEM key main screen art Sequence Next Time File Load 4 0 FILEOS Manual Start Shen next power on Start Flow Start Time min e Start Temp Det Yeg Detector On Auto ignite On Clean Up Stand Ey Fig 7 3 1 Setting the start procedures for the next GC restart GC 2010 7 3 2 7 Starting and Stopping the GC SYSTEM 7 3 Specifying Start Procedures 3 gt Parameter list FILE LOAD Selection File No 0 9 Default Current file Selects a file to be loaded the next time the power is turned on or the GC restarted START GC Selection Auto Start Manual Start Semi Auto Default Manual Start Sets the start method for the next time the power is turned on Select Auto Start to automatically start the GC Select Manual Start to start the GC by presssing Start GC PF menu from the SYSTEM key main screen Select Semi Auto to start carrier gas flow only The GC must still be started by pressing Start GC PF menu from the the SYSTEM key main screen START TIME Range 0 0 6000 0 min Default 0 0 min Sets the period of time after gas control starts until temperature detector control starts The Start Time value on the SYSTEM key main screen is set here NOTE The start time set here can be overridd
76. as follows 100kPa 1bar Convert units between kPa and kgf cm as follows 1kPa 1 0 x 10 2kgf cm2 1kgf cm 98 1kPa Convert the units between kPa and psi as follows 1kPa 1 45 x 10 psi 1psi 6 89kPa GC 2010 2 Installation 2 6 Gas supply plumbing gt E High pressure gas cylinder precautions N WARNING HIGH PRESSURE Gas oylinders are under high pressure When handling gas cylinders instruction and safety measures provided by the gas supplier must be strictly observed to prevent accidents General precautions are provided below Consult state and local regulations for specific precautions Keep gas cylinders away from the lab preferably outdoors but not exposed to direct sun light The area must be well ventilated Use tubing to bring the gases to the lab The temperature of gas cylinders must not exceed 40 C Flammable items must be kept at least 2m from a gas oylinder When using high pressure gases pay strict attention to ventilation and perform daily leak checks In particular when using flammable gases such as hydrogen never smoke or allow open flame within 5m of the equipment Fire extinguishers must be present Secure gas cylinders firmly with cylinder clamps so they cannot fall over Use oil free pres sure valves only Never use tubing which has contacted oil When finished with the gas tighten the main valve of the cylinder immediately GC 2010 21 22 2 Installation
77. carousel 12 4 RS 232C connector Connector for external control 12 5 Fiber optic cable connector Do not connect RS 232C and fiber optic cables simultaneously 12 6 Start out Ready in connector Inputs the Ready signal to the gas chromatograph and outputs the start signal from the gas chromatograph Only for units with AOC 20i NOTE The symbol indicates the functional ground terminal GC 2010 2 Installation 2 2 Component description Bi Entire unit N WARNING HIGH VOLTAGE Danger of electrical shock Only qualified service personnel may remove the side covers HIGH TEMPERATURE Danger of burns Never touch the top cover the injection ports and detectors while they are hot N CAUTION All the GC unit covers including the INJ DET covers carrier and detec tor gas controller covers are essential to the optimal performance of the GC 2010 Ensure that these covers are in place when the GC is in use gt Fig 2 2 4 No Name Description eer Samples are injected into this port which can become 1 Injection port extremely hot 2 o port caver This cover becomes extremely hot J P It protects you from the heat of the injection port The detector is located under the INJ DET cover The detector 3 Detector can become extremely hot 4 INJ DET cover Lift up this cover to remove it Keep the cover close
78. concentrations in case the hydrogen gas leaks the room in which the device is used should be well ventilated 5 When analysis is complete close the main valve of the hydrogen gas container immediately before performing other procedures Warning label IH Emergency Procedures Follow these procedures in the event of an emergency If an abnormality is detected in the GC 2010 gas chromatograph for example Before using the system again after an emergency inspect the system Contact your Shimadzu repre sentative if necessary 1 Turn off the power switch of the GC 2010 gas chromatograph 2 Turn off all power switches of peripheral units 3 Close the main valve of the carrier gas hydrogen air and makeup gas supply 4 Shut down the power supply If the power cable is tightened with screws to a power distribution board turn off the switch provided on the power distribution board If the power cable is connected through a plug unplug it Power cable GC 2010 Power switch Fig Power switch and power cable IV 39 Contents Safety Precautions WARNING LABELS System WARNING labels Emergency Procedures 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 Overview System Features Li A dia 1 1 1 1 Basic performan Ea ore SPetr A e are d o eA ee edie 1 1 1 2 Operation 204 02 seb ib ad
79. consumption screen shown in Fig 16 7 8 Power Consumption Approx power consumpbion W Fig 16 7 8 Power consumption monitoring screen 16 7 6 2 Parameter list APPROX POWER CONSUMPTION The calculated total power consumption of all heated zones is displayed GC 2010 261 29 16 Special Functions 1 6 8 Stopwatch 16 8 1 Screen description Select 8 STOP WATCH from the FUNC key screen to display the stopwatch screen shown in Fig 16 8 1 The stopwatch can display elapsed time up to 99 99 99 9 in units of 0 1 second When the counted time exceeds 99 99 99 9 the stopwatch is reset and the time restants at 0 0 seconds The stopwatch can function even when other keys are pressed However once the stop key is pressed the stopwatch is reset to 0 0 seconds if another key is pressed Stop Watch 2000 06 14 Wed 13 37 47 Lapse Time hh mm as 8 ga ea ae Reciprocal in 22 7 cB Fig 16 8 1 Stop watch screen 16 8 2 PF menu Reference PF menu Description section Start Starts timing ill If Start is pressed again when the timing has stopped the stopwatch is reset to 0 0 seconds Stop Stops counting 16 8 3 Timing with inverse measurement When using a bubble film flow meter of V ml obtain the flow rate using the inverse number V x Inverse number of measurement time ml min 262 GC 2010 3 16 Sp
80. corresponding pressure program is actu ally calculated based on of the pressure flow rate calibration curve saved by the GC 12 5 6 1 Screen description Select Flow Prog PF menu from the FLOW key main screen while the control mode is set to FLOW to display the Carrier Flow screen shown in Fig 12 5 9 Carrier Flow CARI LIHE 1 Flow monitor us Program total min 6 00 Rate Me Flow Time min Up to 7 ramps of flow rate Init 50 8 000 Z 0 00 increase decrease can be set lat END ine Ins Line Fig 12 5 9 Flow rate program setup screen 12 5 6 2 Parameter list NOTE FLOW RATE Range 0 00 970 0 ml min Refer to Fig 3 5 1 Default 50 ml min Set the initial flow rate and the final flow rate for each stage of the total flow rate program TIME Range 0 0 9999 99 min Default 1 00 min Set the hold time for the initial flow rate and the final flow rate for each stage of the flow rate program RATE Range END 400 00 400 00 ml min Default END Set the flow rate program rate If you set the rate to 0 END appears and the program finishes at the previous ramp If you move the cursor to END and set any numeric value other than 0 the pressure and the time for that ramp can be entered The control range of the flow rate program may be limited depending on the column in use purge flow rate and gas restrictor 134 GC 2010 12 Injecti
81. disconnect the column at the injection port only and attach a sealing plug to the injection port 3 Set the Split mode to SPL 4 Set the column inlet pressure and the total flow rate to the following values Column inlet pressure PRSS 0 kPa Total flow rate FLOW 400 mL min For details refer to 8 Setting the Analytical Parameters and File Management 5 Monitor the column inlet pressure If the measured value is 50 kPa or more replace the trap SPLIT 6 When replacing the split vent trap replace the purge vent trap also E Trap replacement Perform the following procedure to replace the trap 1 Stop the carrier gas flow 2 Remove the panel from the INJ DET unit 3 To prevent confusion replace one trap at a time 4 Disconnect the blank nut from a new trap This blank nut is no longer required It sealed the trap 5 Install the new trap The tubing codes indicate they should be used to filter the following flow lines S Split flow line P Septum purge flow line C Carrier gas inlet flow line GC 2010 297 E Molecular sieve filter regeneration Regenerate the molecular sieve filter using the following procedure 1 Stop the carrier gas flow 2 Remove the panel from the INJ DET unit 3 Remove the molecular sieve filter 4 Regenerate the molecular sieve filter under the following conditions Nitrogen or Helium gas flow direction Reverse of operation direction Gas flow
82. graphite ferrule is causing problems condition the graphite ferrule using the procedure described below 292 GC 2010 18 Maintenance and Inspection 18 6 Inspection and Maintenance Graphite Ferrule 3 gt E Preparing the gas chromatograph If the system is operating press the SYSTEM key and select Stop GC PF menu The temperature of the injection port the column oven and detector automatically decrease Press the MONIT key and ensure that the temperature of the injection port the detector and the column oven are 50 C or less Press the FLOW key and select Off PF menu The injection port detector inspection maintenance can begin E Conditioning the graphite ferrule If a contaminated graphite ferrule is causing problems condition the graphite ferrule using this procedure Condition the graphite ferrule just before using the system if possible Otherwise the ferrule may become re contaminated Hold the graphite ferrule in the blue flame of a gas burner for 1 to 2 seconds until that it becomes red hot AN CAUTION Do not get burned when holding the graphite ferrule Graphite ferrule MNR e Fig 18 6 2 Conditioning the graphite ferrule GC 2010 293 gt 18 Maintenance and Inspection 1 8 Inspection and Maintenance Capillary Column NOTE 18 7 1 AN WARNING Risk of burns Do not perform maintenance until the temperature of the injection port detecor and ov
83. immediately GC Start Stop Sets start stop of gas chromatograph Other Set the parameter to input event No Refer to 17 4 Event No GC 2010 215 216 16 Special Functions 16 1 Time Scheduler 1 Relay Description Event 91 92 V91 92 Point A or B Switch point Relay PRG V93 94 Point A or B On Off point Event1 16 On or Off Relay Blower On or Off Cooling Fan On or Off AC On Off CRG INJ On or Off CRG Colum On or Off AC On Off The power supplied to the AC connector on the power controller PCB is turned on off Event of On Off point The relay contact on the PRG PCB option is turned on off Event91 and Event92 Switches A contact and B contact for each relay on the CPU PCB offered as standard PRG Event Switches A contact and B contact for each relay on the PRG PCB option Blower Cooling Fan CRG INJ and CRG Column Turns the power of each option on off 16 1 9 Changing schedule parameters To change the contents of an existing time schedule move the cursor using the A and V keys to select the schedule to be changed and press the ENTER key To change the time When the Time Schedule select screen appears enter new numeric values and press Finish PF menu if you would like to change only the time To change the parameters Move the cursor change the parameter and then press Finish PF menu to complete t
84. in Fig 18 9 1 and pull out the igniter in the direction indicated by arrow When replacing the igniter detach the cables at the connection Install a new igniter by connecting the cable inserting the igniter and tightening the screw GC 2010 299 18 Maintenance and Inspection 18 9 Inspection and Maintenance FID Igniter Igniter screw 7 ue Fig 18 9 1 b Replacement and inspection of the FID jet are described below E Troubleshooting 1 Checking whether the jet is clogged If the jet is clogged ignition may be difficult or peaks may not appear If the tip of the jet is clogged clean the jet by inserting a slender long rod into the tip 2 Checking whether the jet is dirty If the jet is dirty noise may be significant If the jet is dirty wipe off dirt with a cotton swab soaked in organic solvent such as acetone etc 3 Checking whether the jet is damaged If the jet is damaged the peak shape may be abnormal Replace the jet NM CAUTION The quartz FID jet can be broken easily Treat it gently E AE Fig 18 9 2 Jet part No 221 48258 91 E Preparing the gas chromatograph If the system is operating press the SYSTEM key and select Stop GC PF menu The temperature of the injection port the column oven and detector automatically decreases Press the MONIT key and ensure that the temperature of the injection port the detector and the column oven has dropped below 50 C Press the FL
85. is out of order Turn off the system and contact your Shimadzu representative Damaged in electronics Code Message CS Note 36 ROM error No 37 RAM error No 38 CPU register error No Clock reset Code Message CS Note 29 Clock is initialized No The built in clock has reset As a result other saved parameters may have changed Check the installation temperature and flow rate settings Initialize the parameters or reset them if necessary if the same message is displayed repeatedly the hardware has failed The system cannot be used Turn off the system and contact your Shimadzu representative 19 2 2 Operations errors Value outside of range was entered Code Message CS Note 5001 Input parameter out of range No The numeric value entered is out of the valid range Enter a valid number GC 2010 19 Troubleshooting 19 2 Error Messages 3 gt File operation errors Code Message CS Note 5002 Invalid file no No 5003 This file is now used No 5004 File initialize failure No 5005 File can t be copied No These messages appear when an incorrect file operation was attempted Press another key and continue operation Overflow of calculated pressure value Code Message CS Note 5006 5008 5070 5072 CARx calc prss out of range No x 1 3 The carrier gas pressure calculated from the linear velocity t
86. items which are not frequenty used UNIT keys Displays the setup screen for the zone indicated on the key HELP key Explains currently displayed items STATUS Indicates the status of TEMP the entire GC the FLOW lamp heater and the flow controller respectively SYSTEM Starts stops the GC key DIAG key Executes and allows diagnosis settings PF key Selects PF programmable functions displayed at the bottom of the screen Toggle key Toggles among PF items displayed Toggle key Sets On Off of backlight and adjustment of Cursor contrast keys Cursor Moves the cursor up keys down left and right respectively Numeric Inputs numeric values keys ENTER Validates input or key selection CE key Clears a numeric input or error GC 2010 55 5 Basic Key Operation 5 1 Keypad Description and Operation 5 1 1 Keypad operation The keypad is used to operate the system and make parameter settings The table below shows the function of each key Name Function START key Starts the temperature program pressure flow rate program and time program If a Pre Run program is set the Pre Run program starts STOP key Stops the program DIAG key Performs unit self diagnosis Also used for maintenance functions such as confirmation of various logs
87. keys to the schedule to be edited and press the ENTER key The schedule to be edited appears on the edit screen To change the vial number enter the new number from the edit screen and press Finish PFmenu To change the other parameters move the cursor and make the change from the edit screen and then press Finish PFmenu To cancel the edits and restore the original batch schedule press Cancel PFmenu before pressing Finish PFmenu p 8c 2010 A 225 16 Special Functions 16 2 Batch Schedule 16 2 9 Batch processing Setup example Example 1 For single AOC Sample vials No 1 to 3 are analyzed The GC method file No 2 is used The Chromatopac data processing file No 0 is set to Ch 1 A standard of known concentration is injected once Clean up is performed but the slope test is not performed Start vial No 1 Final vial No 3 v 2 GC file No FILE2 v 3 Data processing file No Ch 1 FILEO 4 Number of injections 1 Sample type Standard 5 Slope test Off Clean up On 6 The batch is set up 226 GC 2010 Screen display Vial Start vial Ho Final vial No sample 4b Inject sample kol GC file Ho FILE 1 FILE1 n 3 FILES Dataprocessor Channel No Chil File No 8 sample Number of Injection rd sample type 4 Standardl Command Slope test Off Clean up 4 Ong Single AQC 2 it s WW Vial GC DP
88. line White Connected to NEUTRAL of AC line Green Grounding GROUND Black Power cable MU ous White Green Fig 2 5 2 Power cable E Symbol conventions AC Power switch mz ug gt E On Close OFF status ON status E Heating energy generation The following graph shows the heating values generated by the unit 3 5 N a al N al T T T T Heat generation x10 U hour e e T 0 100 200 300 400 Temperature C Fig 2 5 3 18 GC 2010 2 Installation 2 5 Power supply and wiring 3 gt B Fuse The following fuses are used in the GC 2010 Fuse No Rated current voltage Type Classification depending 115V model 230V model on IEC127 F1 F2 15A 250V 10A 250V T F3 F4 5A 250V 3 15A 250V T F5 F6 5A 250V 5A 250V T E Allowing the GC to dry after transport GC 2010 may get wet from humidity in some transport conditions In such case drying out is necessary to avoid a short circuit at the heater in the injection port or the detector N CAUTION Under some transport conditions condensation may form inside the GC components To avoid injection port or detector heater unit short circuits allow the unit sufficient time to dry after transport and follow the procedure below after installation 1 Seal the injection port and column connections 2 Remove the injection ports and detectors from all configured analytical lines
89. list START VIAL NO Range Default O FINAL VIAL NO Range Default O 1 With no auto sampler Short rack 1 6 Long rack 1 12 With auto sampler 1 150 maximum When the auto sampler is used the possible depends on the vial rack type and the number of racks The default 0 indicates that the setting is not given SAMPLE Inject sample The specified sample vial No is analysed Without sample Vials are not used for samples Instead samples are introduced from a gas sampler with a valve GC FILE NO Range FILE 0 9 Default FILEO Set the file No of the GC method to be used CHANNEL NO Range Ch1 Ch2 Default Ch 1 Set the channel No connecting the GC to the Chromatopac This setting is ignored when using GC solution software DATA PROCESSOR FILE NO Range FILE 0 9 Default FILEO Specify a date processor Chromatopac date integration file This setting is ignored when using GC solution software NUMBER OF INJECTION Range 0 99 Default 0 Set the number of times to inject each sample SAMPLE TYPE Unknown Select this item to analyze a sample of unknown concentration Analyze a standard and create a calibration curve before analyzing an unknown sample Standard Select this item to analyze a standard of known concentration SLOPE TEST Range On Off Default Off When Or is selected the slope test is performed before running the batch schedule CLEAN UP Range On Off Default Off When On is selec
90. of each relay on the PRG PCB option Blower Cooling Fan CRG INJ and CRG Column Turns the power of each option on off 2 Current range Detector type Current FTD 0 00 10 00 pA ECD 0 00 2 00 nA TCD 0 100 mA 16 3 6 Editing a time program To change the contents of an existing time program move the cursor using the A and V keys to the program line to be edited changed and press the ENTER key To change only the time enter the new time from the edit screen and press Finish PF menu To change the other parameters move the cursor and make the changes from the edit screen and then press Finish PF menu To cancel the edits and restore the original time program press Cancel PF menu before pressing Finish PF menu GC 2010 gt 231 16 Special Functions 16 3 Time Program 16 3 7 Time program setup example Example 1 When both positive and negative peaks appear on the chromatogram Four minutes after the program execution starts the polarity of the detector DET 1 TCD is switched from plus to minus Two minutes later six minutes after the program execution starts the polarity is switched back to plus First program Screen display 1 Time 4 0 min Edit program o Time min O ao 2 Detector Edit program Relay sbecbonr Flow controller Y 3 Polarity Detector Range T polarity 4 DET
91. of ghost peaks 19 Troubleshooting 19 1 Troubleshooting Possible Cause Solution Septum purge is not flowing Flow septum purge Peaks of previous analysis is detected Increase column oven temperature to maximum temperature in analysis to eliminate sample remaining inside column Sample is contaminated Prepare sample newly Micro syringe is dirty Clean micro syringe Or replace it with a new one Carrier gas purity is low Replace carrier gas with one of higher purity Provide molecular sieve filter in carrier gas flow line Substances of high boiling point accumulated at column inlet end are flowing out Condition column Injection port is dirty Clean or replace glass insert Refer to 18 5 Inspection and Maintenance Glass Insert in Instruction Manual Tubing pressure regulator etc are contaminated with oil etc Replace tubing pressure regulator etc with clean ones Septum chips are present inside glass insert or column Clean or replace glass insert Fold tip of capillary column and take off folded portion 19 1 4 3 Abnormal peak shape Fronting leading The peak increases slowly The first half peak area is higher Tailing Once the peak has eluted the baseline does not immediately return to its zero level The secoud half paek area is higher Time Fronting gt Time Tailing Possible Cause Solution
92. of sample can be injected at onetime The split injection mode only allows part of the injected sample to enter the column This method is useful for samples of high consentration or about which nothing is known Try to perform a split injection method first Set the split ratio to approximately 1 50 If the target peak is too large increase the split ratio If the target peak is too small or cannot be detected decrease the split ratio Select a proper split ratio in this way If the peak is still small with a split ratio set to 1 10 or less try the splitless injection method Splitless injection In the splitless injection method almost all of the sample amount injected is introduced in the column by temporarily suspending the split flow This method is effective for analyzing a low concentration sample which cannot be easily analyzed by the split injection method To reduce band broadening and sharpen peaks create a temperature ramp program The column initial temperature is set to a temperature lower than the boiling point of the sample solvent Direct injection In the direct injection method almost the entire amount of injected sample is introduced into a wide bore column Because the inner diameter of the wide bore column is 0 53 mm or more separation is not as good as that of a column with smaller inner diameter Because the peak shape is broad sensitivity may not be good enough For the direct injection method the WBI Wid
93. over or the INJ2 cannot be cooled down because the column oven door remains open or insufficient coolant also for INJ2 is preventing the oven CRG from cooling If the column oven door is open close it and select Reset Error Turn off the system replace the coolant and then restart the system GC 2010 317 318 19 Troubleshooting 19 2 Error Messages Overheat Code Message CS Note 1036 Overheat is sensed Yes Overneat detected by thermocouple xxx COL INJ1 DET1 1037 1044 xxx temp controller broken Yes INJ2 DET2 AUX3 AUXA AUX5 An error may have occurred in the temperature control circuit Turn off the system and contact your Shimadzu representative Relay heater control errors Code Message CS Note 1045 COL relay error No 1046 INJ1 DET2 relay error No 1047 AUX3 AUX5 relay error No 1048 Heater controller error No An error may have occurred in the control circuit Turn off the system and contact your Shimadzu representative Code Message CS Note 1049 1052 DET n set temp is low No n 1 4 This message appears when the Detector temperature setting value is smaller than that of the Oven If this message appears change the setting value of the Detector temperature If set the setting of Protection against contamination to No need not to change the setting value of the Detector temperature Refer to 16 6 4 3 Pressure flo
94. ready Green n Pressure flow rate program is running it is sampling time or Blinking META high pressure injection is occurring On One of the gas control lines is not ready Yellow un Pressure flow rate program is finished and default values are Blinking being set Red On An error related to gas control has occurred GC 2010 3 5 Basic Key Operation 2 Adjusting The Display NOTE n the following procedure Toggle V key indicates that V key is pressed while pressing and holding the Toggle key Turn the backlit LCD display on and off by pressing Toggle V to turn it off and Toggle A toturn it on When the keypad is not in use turning the backlit LCD display off is recommended to pro long the life of the display The display turns off automatically with the backlit display saver See 16 6 11 Other Settings When the display turns itself off turn it back on by pressing any key To adjust the contrast the contrast stand in front of the screen and press the Toggle lt or gt keys Toggle key Fig 5 2 1 GC 2010 59 60 29 5 Basic Key Operation 3 Basic Key Operations 5 3 1 Screen display Use the following 10 keys to display the parameter and status screens DIAG SYSTEM MONIT SET FUNC COL FLOW INJ DET and OPTION Access the main function screens by pressing one of these keys then the secondary screens by s
95. representative 19 1 1 Gas and pressure settings 19 1 1 1 When the pressure flow rate cannot be set or does not reach the set value 19 1 1 2 Continual gas leaks 19 1 2 Temperature control 19 1 2 1 When the temperature does not increase or reach the set value 19 1 3 Detector 19 1 3 1 FID 1 The FID flame does not ignite properly 2 The FID baseline is fluctuating 3 Baseline noise is high 19 1 3 2 TCD 1 The detector can not be zeroed 2 Fluctuating baseline 3 Baseline noise is high 19 1 4 Chromatogram and data 19 1 4 1 No peaks or extremely small peaks 19 1 4 2 Presence of ghost peaks 19 1 4 3 Abonormal peak shape 19 1 4 4 Poor retention time reproducibility 19 1 4 5 Poor peak area reproducibility GC 2010 303 304 19 Troubleshooting 19 1 Troubleshooting 19 1 1 Gas and pressure settings 19 1 1 1 When the pressure flow rate cannot be set or does not attain the set value Possible Cause Solution No gas is supplied Open gas cylinder main valve to supply gas Supply pressure is low Set carrier gas supply pressure to 300 to 980 kPa Hydrogen 300 to 500 kPa Air 300 to 500 kPa Makeup gas 300 to 980 kPa Gas leaks Check for gas leaks and tighten leaking connections Replace gasket or septum Refer to 2 6 Gas supply plumbing in the Instruction Manual AFC APC Incorrect valve set Set value is outside controllable range Set pressure to proper value Refer to 3 AFC
96. roo D 1 I Y e V 1 u A 1 1 Y x 1 PO AA ome Na oe EN eene ues Column inlet i Column inlet i pressure topi pressure t during analysis io during analysis REN A A A A START Column inlet pressure SERN Column inlet pressure Analysis starts is automatically turned is turned to high to high HIGH PRESS INJECTION MODE On HIGH PRESS INJECTION MODE Auto HIGH PRESS INJECTION PRESS Range 0 0 970 0 kPa Refer to Fig 3 5 1 Default 100 0 kPa Set the column inlet pressure for high pressure injection HIGH PRESS INJECTION TIME Range 0 00 9999 99 min Default 1 00 min Set the period of time after analysis starts until the column inlet pressure returns to the original value Usually set this equal to the sampling time E Splitter Fix SPLITTER FIX MODE Selection Off On Auto Default Off Select one of the following three modes Off Disables splitter fix mode On Fixes the split flow line immediately Auto Automatically enters splitter fix mode after analysis finishes and the system returns to ready status FIX TIME Range 0 0 9999 99 min Default 0 10 min Set the period of time to be in splitter fix mode When SPLITTER FIX MODE is set to Or indicate the period of time after SPLITTER FIX MODE is set to On to exit splitter fix mode When SPLITTER FIX MODE is set to Auto set the period of time after the analysis starts to exit splitter fix mode NOT
97. shown in Fig 16 7 6 When you move the arrow cursor and press the ENTER key the initialization confirmation screen Fig 16 7 7 appears On this screen press the INIT PF menu key to initialize the selected item Initialize Configuration Initialization Initialize Configuration Configuration parameters FJ Initialize Installation are initialized with PF2 Initialize RAM El Initialize all select function Fig 16 7 6 Initialization menu screen Fig 16 7 7 Initialization confirmation screen 16 7 5 2 Parameter list INITIALIZE CONFIGURATION This item initializes configuration settings such as heated zone temperature limits and ready check parameters However the column temperature limit is saved in the analysis file and is not reset Analysis files 0 9 cannot be initializend INITIALIZE INSTALLATION This item initializes the installation settings of injection ports flow controllers etc INITIALIZE RAM This item initializes the RAM erasing all data including analysis files 0 9 configuration and installation settings Initialize the RAM when there is a RAM problem INITIALIZE ALL This item initializes all settings including Analysis files 0 9 260 GC 2010 16 Special Functions 16 7 Service and Maintenance 2 16 7 6 Power consumption 16 7 6 1 Screen description Select 7 SERVICE MAINTENANCE from the FUNC key screen and then select 4 POWER CONSUMPTION to open the Power
98. signal type is Wide For correct quantitation perform this calibration when changing GC s or changing Chromatopac chan nels When the GC and the chromatopac C R6A or previous models are connected with chro matopac signal cable for analog signal the signal type is set to Linear on the screen of the DET key The calibration is not necessary GC 2010 2 Installation 2 7 Connecting external device cables 3 gt E Connecting the GC and Auto injector NOTE This section describes the connection between the AOC 20i unit and GC 2010 the AOC power cable connection and the method of turning the AOC on and off For details of AOC 20 operation refer to the AOC 20 User s manual E Cable connections Connect the cables as follows The AOC 20 power source is housed within the unit READY START cable O Label 1 JO Label 2 o Label 3 JO Label 4 O O Press these buttons when inserting or removing cables START OUT READY IN terminal RS 232C cable for AOC Attach the D sub connector to the RS 232C terminal of the AOC power source and 6 PIN connector to the AOC terminal of the GC AOC cable Connect the auto injector to INJECTOR 1 for single AOC 230V model Wrap the cable around Ferrite core near the connector power source side as shown below Cable Ferrite core Fig 2 7 3 NOTE Ifthe AOC cable is connected to INJECTOR 2 follow the INJECTOR1 procedure If the AOC
99. temperature inlet pressure and purge flow rate are displayed The column oven temperature is displayed Monitor Main LIME 2000 6 13 Tue 17 43 51 154 00 El EHE 150 08 1011 GPs x10 23 Sn an Rt Sal RemainTime 1 42min 32000 Signali El Amin The chromatogram is dis played E Detector status The detector range setup value temperature and the voltage are displayed This value multiplied by the range attenuation coefficient is output as the analog signal Fig 9 1 1 MONIT key main screen The ignition status of an FID or FPD detector can be confirmed on the Monitor Screen For a FID Flame On Flame Off GC 2010 97 98 9 Monitoring the GC 9 1 MONIT key Main Screen E Changing the monitor magnification zoom The chromatogram and the temperature or pressure flow rate program is displayed on the lower portion of the Monitor Screen The signal axis and the time axis are displayed If there is a temperature or pressure flow program the temperature axis or pressure axis flow axis is also displayed Use the Chng Graph PF menu key to switch the graph displayed Use the numeric keys and cursor keys to change the magnification and the position of each axis on the screen Signal axis s26000 Siznali Col Temp 250 o A IS c daan V
100. the service life of the temperature sensor In order to instantly vaporize samples inside the injection port set the injection port temperature approximately 30 C above the column oven temperature final temp Due to the minute quantity of sample injected the sample vaporizes at temperatures lower than the boiling point of sample elements To set the injection port maximum temperature limit refer to 16 6 4 Setting the maximum temperature limits in 16 6 GC Configuration 12 5 1 3 PF menu PF menu Description Reference section Print Prints the injection port temperature on Chromatopac Toggles among the setup screeens if two or more injection ports are Next Inj installed in this system The INJ key can also be used to switch screens GC 2010 12 5 2 Setting the flow rate with FLOW key 12 5 2 1 Screen description 12 Injection Port 12 5 Split Splitless Injection System Press the FLOW key to display the screen shown in Fig 12 5 4 and to set the AFC advanced flow controller parameters The AFC controls the pressure and the flow rate of the carrier gas Column Inlet press kPa Column flow Liner vel ej split ratio Total flow MEKENE 53 9 split mode Control mode Carrier gas bype Fig 12 5 4 12 5 2 2 Parameter list INLET PRESS FLOW key main screen Range 0 0 970 0 kPa Refer to Fig 3 5 1 Default 100 kPa Set the column inlet pressure
101. to the distribution board turn OFF the power to the distribution board 2 The power supply must have a circuit breaker 3 Do not place heavy items on the power cable Before connecting the power supply verify the following items E Power supply voltage Use a power source with the following specifications to maintain optimal unit performance Commended power voltage 115VAC 5 230VAC 5 Frequency 50 60Hz Operating power voltage 115VAC 10 230VAC 10 Frequency 50 60Hz E Power supply capacity Calculate the power supply capacity by considering the total power consumption of the individual components as shown below Connect the power source to a terminal with sufficient capacity Standard model with FID 1 800VA 115V model 2 600VA 230V model Optional temperature control block INJ etc 150VA pc Maximum power is 2600VA 115V model 3400VA 230V model NOTE Performance of the unit may be affected if the power supply voltage fluctuates or the capacity is insufficient E Connecting the power cable NOTE The power cable of the 230V model uses a plug Fig 2 5 1 Plug AN CAUTION Be careful to wire the plug correctly as outlined on the next page to avoid damage to the unit or supply fuse GC 2010 17 2 Installation 2 5 Power supply and wiring The power cable for 115V model is color coded as follows Black Connected to HOT of AC
102. turn on the system If the system does not recover after several resets or the reason for the error cannot be located contact your Shimadzu representative Detecher flame error Code Message CS Note 4109 4112 DET n flame is out No nz1 4 The detector flame FID has been extinguished Check the gas supply and ingnite the detector again If the flame error occurs repeatedly the hardware has failed The system cannot be used Turn off the system and contact your Shimadzu representative GC 2010 gt 315 316 19 Troubleshooting 19 2 Error Messages FPD errors Code Message cs Note 4113 4116 DET n FPD Battery error Yes 4117 4120 DET n FPD temperature error Yes aia 4121 4124 DET n FPD cooling fan error Yes 4125 4128 DET n FPD current error Yes FPD operation is abnormal Refer to FPD User s Manual If ERROR 4125 4128 occures turn off the system Otherwise the system status can not be restored TCD errors Code Message CS Note 4201 TCD signal is out of range No 4202 TCD signal zero error No The difference in filament resistance is high between the TCD cells and the detector cannot be zeroed The detector control unit may have failed The system cannot be used Turn off the system and contact your Shimadzu representative Detector ignition errors Code Message CS Note 4203 4206 DET n ignition failed
103. up in order After you finish editing time programs they are automatically sorted More than one step can be set for the same time The specified actions are executed at the same time ime Program ERE FILE A FILEA GC analysis Time min 5 00 Time min Function Value 1 1 88 FIDI Range x1072 i 5 06 FIDi Zero Adj Fig 16 3 1 Time program main screen 16 3 2 PF menu PF menu Description pudiese New Creates a new time program 16 3 3 Del Line Deletes the time program line at the current cursor position Chng Line Moves the cursor to the next line A Print Prints the program to the Chromatopac GC 2010 16 3 3 Creating a new time program Select New PF menu from the time program screen to display the time program edit screen shown in Fig 16 3 2 Set an item using the A and V keys and the ENTER key When Finish PF menu 16 Special Functions 16 3 Time Program becomes available and the items have been set press Finish to validate the program At the top of the screen the contents of the set program are displayed At the bottom of the screen the program edit screen is displayed Up to 100 lines are available for one program The possible program execution time ranges from 0 00 to 9999 00 minutes 16 3 4 PF menu ime Program UE FILE A FILE GC nalyeis Timemin 5 00 Time min Function Value 1 1 046 FIDi Range 107 2 5 64 FID
104. 0 13 Detector 13 2 Hydrogen flame ionization detector FID 13 2 2 Setting the detector 13 2 2 1 Screen description Press the DET key to display the detector main screen shown in Fig 13 2 2 Here set the detector temperature the detector gas flow rate etc When the detector is configured in the analytical line the output signal settings appear in the lower portion of the screen DET 1 letect RU 4 ol Tempt MT 200 0 Flame Filter Time Constant 2 me h signal Output Fort Chi For the detector signal output f refer to 13 5 Setting the Background HABERE ort Output Signals Background sig comp Off Det sig subtraction Off signal Range 107 Analog signal Type Linear Det Gas Fig 13 2 2 DET key main screen 13 2 2 2 Parameter list DETECTOR CONTROLLER Selection On Off Default On When a detector is set to On its current and voltage are controlled When a detector is configured in an analytical line and set to On here the detector is controlled and its signal monitored However even if a detector is set to Off the gas flow is controlled and the temperature increases to the set value if the detector is configured in an analytical line TEMP Range 0 0 450 0 C Default 25 0 C Set the detector temperature Normally set the detector temperature approximately 30 C higher than the final column oven temperature to prevent contamination by high boiling poin
105. 00 2103 2106 2109 DetAPCn makeup gas is out of control Yes 2101 2104 E 2107 2110 DetAPCn hydrogen is out of control Yes n 1 4 2102 2105 2108 2111 DetAPCn air is out of control Yes 2112 2129 APCy is out of control Yes y 1 18 2130 2131 CARm AFC leaks Yes T m 2134 2137 CARm AFC is out of control Yes 2138 2140 CARx prim is out of range No x 1 3 Verify whether a continuous supply of gas is available at the required pressure If there is no problem in the gas supply the control system such as the APC may have failed Turn off the system and contact your Shimadzu representative Code Message cs Note 2141 2142 CARm is not controlled No m 1 2 This message appears when the temperature control starts without carrier gas control Ifthis message appears set the setting of the flow controller to On or remove the flow con troller from the line configuration GC 2010 gt 319 320 19 Troubleshooting 19 2 Error Messages 19 2 7 Warning messages Code Message cs Note 9000 COL CRG use time is over No 9001 INJ2 CRG use time is over No 9002 Fan use time is over No 9003 LCD backlight use time is over No 9004 9006 CARx septum counter is over No Vadis 9007 9009 CARx insert counter is over No XXx COL INJ1 DET1 9012 9019 XXX sensor use time warning Yes INJ2 DET2 AUX3 AUXA AUX5 These messa
106. 1 qmm Polarity i TCDZ 5 minus TCD Polarity gt Second program 6 Time 6 0 min Steps 2 4 are repeated Eie program v Time min 6 08 7 plus TED Polarity v q 8 The time program is set up Time min Function Value 1 4 00 TCDZ Polarity _ 2 6 00 TCDZ Polarity_ _ 232 GC 2010 16 Special Functions 16 3 Time Program P Example 2 Two AOC analyses use File No 0 then file No 1 is used The execution time is set to 30 min Screen display 1 Time 30 min Edit program Time min 30 0 2 Stop Edit program T m opm u bop 3 Run 2 times End of program Run 2 times v 4 File 1 is loaded End of program End of program A FILES Load n HIN v 5 Pause at each run AOC End of program Continuous PePause at each run Agc v 6 The time program is set up Time mi Function Value 1 3m am End End of program 38 08 mir Rm _Ztimes Next file FILE1 Pause at each run GC 2010 233 3 16 Special Functions 1 6 4 Pre Run Program 234 The Pre Run program controls flow controllers and relays before the analysis starts 16 4 1 Screen description Select 4 PRE RUN from the FUNC key screen to display the Pre Run screen shown in Fig 16 4 1 A Pre Run program is executed after the START key is pressed but before an analysis While the Pre Run program is running the elapsed tim
107. 1019 INJ1 sensor down error 530 00 200 05 16 14 27 E1018 COL sensor down error 530 00 200 05 16 14 27 E1020 DET1 sensor down error 530 00 200 05 16 14 28 E0031 INJ1 DET2 A D error 200 05 16 14 28 E0032 AUX1 AUX3 A D error 200 05 16 14 28 E0011 CAR1 AFC PCB error 7 00 Fig 17 1 6 17 1 2 7 Diagnosis results Press Print PF menu from the detailed results screen of the standard diagnosis to print a report similar to the ones shown below The date the version No and the installation status which are not displayed on the screen are also printed GC DIAGNOSIS REPORT DATE 2000 06 15 14 35 GC SERIAL NUMBER C11123380069SM ROM VERSION 0 0202 DET H1 FID WIDE DET 2 NON DET 3 NON DET 4 NON CAR1 AFC PU CAR2 NON CAR3 NON DET APC 1 APC 3Ch DET APC 2 NON DET APC 3 NON DET APC 4 NON TEST RESULT Not Good INJ1 Septum Counter Threshold 100 Count value 0 Judgement Good Fig 17 1 7 272 GC 2010 29 17 Printing 1 7 3 2 AOC commands When you press Print from the AOC all items are printed as command names The list below shows correspondence of command names to item names The setup values such as Fast and Yes No are printed as numbers Correspondence of setup values to numbers is shown in the range and default columns in the list below E Command list Command Item Range De
108. 152 163 Batch Schedule 220 BAUD RATE 241 BUZZER 254 Capillary adapter 120 Capillary column 294 carrier gas flow control unit 3 CARRIER GAS TYPE 129 CE key 55 56 Changing a name 63 Chng Graph 99 chromatogram 97 chromatopac signal cable 29 Clean up 74 76 Clear key 56 COL key 56 107 Column film thickness 130 Column flow rate 36 86 127 column hanger 51 Column inlet pressure 36 Column inner diameter 1 D 36 130 Column length 36 130 Column outlet pressure 36 Column oven 2 86 Consumables 5 Control mode 40 87 128 Control of AFC 38 Index Coolant Consumption Counter 192 COUNTER FOR INSERT 177 COUNTER FOR SEPTUM 177 CPU 178 CPU REGISTOR 177 CRG 209 CRG USE TIME 177 CURRENT 162 CURRENT FILE 74 cursor 61 Cursor key 55 56 D DATE 239 day 212 DC voltage 177 DET key 56 151 161 DET SIG SUBTRACTION 152 163 Detector 2 149 Detector ADC registor 177 DETECTOR CONTROLLER 151 161 detector gas 156 165 Detector gas flow controller 3 Detector HV source 177 DETECTOR IGNITE 178 DETECTOR IGNITION 178 Detector ROM 177 detector signals 245 DETECTOR TEMP 87 DIAG key 55 56 175 Diagnostic log 189 Dimension 4 Direct injection system 113 Direct Operation 237 Display 3 Drift 243 E ECD 149 ECD frequency 178 ENTER key 55 56 Environment condition for installation site 14 EQUILIBRATION TIME 108 Error log 188 Error Message 311 ESC 37 38 Event No 277 F Fan Off 108 Fan On 108 FAN USE TIME 177 GC 2010 323
109. 18 3 1 18 3 2 AN WARNING Danger of burns Do not perform injection port maintenance until the tempelature of the injection on port has dropped below 50 C AN CAUTION Wait until the injection port has cooled to loosen screws and nuts to prevent them from binding Repeated injections can deteriorate the septum inerfering with its sealing ability and causing carrier gas leaks This can cause retention time shifts and poor producibility In addition septum fragments can fall into the glass insert causing ghost peakes Periodically inspect and replace the septum as described in this section Inspection maintenance cycle The guideline for inspection maintenance is 100 injections Septun replacement is recomended evely 100 injections In addition perform inspection and maintenance in the following cases When the retention time shifts reproducibility is poor When ghost peaks are detected If ghost peaks are obtained although no septum fragments are found in the glass insert ensure that new septa are conditioned properly Inspection maintenance E Preparing the gas chromatograph NOTE Select Maint INJ PF menu from the SYSTEM key main screen If the system is operating press the SYSTEM key and select Maint INJ PF menu The temperature of the injection port and the column oven automatically drops and the carrier gas stops when the temperature drops below 51 C
110. 20s sam ple carousel cable is connected to SAMPLER attach the ferrite cores on both side of the cable as for INJECTOR1 E Turning the AOC power on and off When usin the AOC 20i with the GC 2010 the AOC power is turned on and off along with the GC power However for units with the AOC 20 power supply installed in the GC 2010 turn the AOC 20 on and off from the AOC parameter screen accessed from the OPTION key Refer to 15 1 Auto Injector Parameters GC 2010 31 32 2 Installation 2 7 Connecting external device cables Bi Installing the AOC 20s 1 Installation the autosampler carousel bracket Use four M4 screws to attach the carousel bracket to the top left of the GC 2010 NOTE Eight holes are available Use four holes which are marked as in Fig 2 7 4 NOTE Fasten the screws tightly to ensure electrical contact Poor contact may lead to auto sampler carousel operational problems Fig 2 7 4 2 Installing the AOC 20s autosampler carousel Place the autosampler carousel on the bracket and fasten it with one M4 screw Fig 2 7 5 GC 2010 E Connecting the relay terminals 2 7 Connecting external device cables Connect the 8P IN relay cable P N 221 48568 91 The relay terminal can be opened and closed by EVENT91 and 92 Refer to 16 3 Time Program J EVENT91 Pin No 1 red COM Pin No 2 white NC Co
111. 229 16 3 4 PREMURA tna 229 16 3 5 Time Program parameters o 230 16 3 6 Editing time programi xv ves RARE HRGAC UE Wa dash to wie Ne GU EH 231 16 3 7 Time program setup example 0 6 00 re 232 Pre Run Program 5 lc ly y x ERREUR thes ale 234 16 4 1 Screen description oce a eiae As ae ge eur ETE eb ren stem 234 16 4 2 PFEimi nucci nee od A idee ks oi th t acea 234 16 4 3 Creating a new Pre Run prograM ooooccccco rh rre 235 16 4 4 Editing a Pre Rurprogratm sone Roma Ree Ss Ge aha tas whee dale 235 16 4 5 After Pre Run program is finished 0 0000 cece teen eee 235 GC 2010 16 5 16 6 16 7 16 8 16 9 16 10 17 17 1 17 2 17 3 17 4 18 18 1 3 gt Contents 16 4 6 Pre Run Program set up example 000 ccc en 236 Direct Operation oer a by we Secale Ramana eee eae 237 16 5 1 Screen desctiption 42225 esent ha Sade td ec bh oes pele PORE bra 237 16 5 2 Parameter list re cord a A a co o acere 237 16 5 3 PF menus isa qe I Eie beau nea Pbi eb sa bee ea 237 GC Configuration cras cere Rer ME Ree Er ee 238 16 6 1 Screen description oe e census pea xol RI Ye E DE ppp ee pud cue s 238 16 6 2 Parameter list o t serre ne ed e sonet cnt Y RO Wee d eb TEN US Gn 238 16 6 3 Setting the date and time oococcccccco he 239 16 6 4 Setting the maximum temperature limits llle 240 16 6 5 Setting transmission parameters ooooccccooc e 241 16 6 6 Setting the Ready Che
112. 27 o ee tard ere ate oath redo re area Ne dee aha Qe 191 14 3 3 PFE menu ue ri AA A Eb EPOR iia 191 Coolant Consumption Counter oocococoo eee 192 14 4 1 Screernedescriptiom ers ER aree IA oq eai ate PR cus M sie 192 14 4 2 Parameter list ecu AA A e Aaa i aeo Ronda an ROCHE ees RE n 193 14 4 3 A ae arts t Meri iom poe M ut o ito Mer 193 Standard Installation Test 0c ee ee 194 14 5 1 screen description 4 acs eg vee aie Sed bed Sheed dee eae ea tia 194 14 5 2 PE ImODU caso Ae cian tence en pede AAA e e de a C Ue ee 194 14 5 3 est procedure ia cete dake ene vb tee Mag e REM da 195 Peak Generator oen Rex RR eR RA RII a nece ee ee n 196 14 6 1 Screen desctiption udari arrastra Sud ra ap lo da 196 14 6 2 Parameter listir orig mue be T a A ada en eren 196 14 6 3 PRE menus oh bee deve Ee Ies iE MARS 196 Optional Devices Auto Injector Parameters sees nnn 197 15 1 1 Screen description 2 sra css as veh ti a al duode xu iia 197 15 1 2 Parameterlist sus ans te anota nally eem cete gn nad sect ete ex De ns Mes 198 15 1 3 PE ment 5e pote idet ab a tad ded de ada dua 199 15 1 4 AOC ptiority analysis ici yen a eden da Ier ME eater eum 200 15 1 5 Paramieter list i e lode la eek dn tat cee ae CE AL AA d 200 15 1 6 DEMO ai PCR Ret guttae tete tar epe nte e Eta 201 15 1 7 Other AOC parameters cuneus Rete E MARRE Maes RR 201 15 1 8 Other ADC Parameter edet meh ROS Ee ark Ook bed E e e HERR da 202 GC 2010
113. 3 2 Parameter list Make Up Range 0 0 20 0 ml min Default 8 0 ml min Because the thermal conductivity of the sample is lower than that of the carrier gas the sensitivity increases as the thermal conductivity of the carrier gas increases For high sensitivity analysis use helium with purity of 99 9995 or more GAS TYPE Selection N2 He Ar Default He OPTIMAL FLOW Refer to Fig 3 4 8 Normally set the flow rate of the makeup gas to approx 8ml min Helimu to maximize the TCD sensitivity NOTE If the makeup gas flow is set below the optimal rate 8ml min for Helimu sensitivity increases How ever the reference filament can break and peak tailing may occur The baseline may be come ele vated after the solvent peak has eluted depending on solvent type 13 3 3 3 PF menu PF menu Description Reference section Program The flow rate of makeup gas supplied to detector can be controlled by a 13 3 34 program Select Off to stop the gas flow On Off Select On to restart the gas flow Default value is On For a TCD the filament life can be shotened if the makeup gas flows stops as soon as the stop time has elapsed Therfore the stop sequence con Stop Seq tains a step where the makeup gas continues to flow after the stop time until the detector temperature drops to a specified valve The default valve is 50 C Offset Performs offset calibration of APC sensor 3 6 This calibration
114. 8 9 2 Inspection maintenance oooooco hr rn 299 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting oe etssk 9G A ee ee ORS ES 303 19 1 1 Gas and pressure settings 0 0c cette eee eee 304 19 1 2 Temperature Control nerti aeaoe A tt DR eae 305 19 1 3 Detector rt A ES A AA 305 19 1 4 Chromatogram and data ooccocccoo rr 308 Error Messages 000 AR et ea eq eI REPRE ETE 311 19 2 1 SyStemiertofs ceu cs s e mk et sels de tau pte bci lae eph iss 311 19 2 2 Operations errors od ach een te eevee A tna eed ea ae Be aed PORE Sr 312 19 2 3 Optional device error AOC 20i s 0 0 0 0c e 314 19 2 4 Communication errors Jour rv er ce on o RR eed tr e aaa ae UR eh CEPR Leek EO S 314 19 2 5 Detector errors cui eene eet e pec po m dde etic ED EC E Ro Een rne ape te n ea eur e ge Na te eens 315 19 2 6 Other eftorS ero hehe Maleate BA ere refe Pee ARI aah aD ee Ye dr US e DE gs 316 19 2 7 Warming messages Kouna Sp et eR E Eta M ERR RR NR NR NE RR 320 GC 2010 20 Appendix 20 1 Key Function List 32 2265 dt Se ed ed E 321 21 Index ps GC 2010 ix 29 1 Overview s 1 System Features The GC 2010 is a state of the art advanced gas chromatograph which embraces the concepts of flexibility user friendliness and security It meets and exceeds user demands for high performance advanced functionality high reliability and high productivity These concepts are illustrated by the following features which include high processing speed and digitize
115. E Using splitter fix mode for long periods of time may interfere with constant pressure negatively affect ing reproducibility of results GC 2010 141 29 12 Injection Port 1 2 i 6 Direct Injection System Bi Direct injection system In a direct injection system a wide bore 0 53 mm or greater column is used Nearly the entire amount of sample injected is inrtoduced on the column This usually results in better sensitivity than narrow bore columns with split injections However peak shapes are broad which decreases resolution and can lead to a higher S N ratio The direct injection system uses a WBI wide bore injection injection port When WBI is specified DIRECT injection mode is automatically used and split mode is not available on the INJ key main screen ca PURGE PURGE VENT CARRIER Capillary column Fig 12 6 1 142 GC 2010 12 Injection Port 12 6 Direct Injection System gt 12 6 1 Setting the temperature 12 6 1 1 Screen description Press the INJ key to display the injection port main screen shown in Fig 12 6 2 and to set the injection port temperature ARS 0 FILEO jection Port C ACTUAL SETTING i88 Temp 0 Fig 12 6 2 INJ key main screen 12 6 1 2 Parameter list TEMP Range 0 0 450 0 C Default 25 0 C Set the injection port temperature Keep the injection port at the lowest practical temperature for the analysis this prolo
116. END and set any numeric value other than O to complete the temperature and the time for that ramp EQUILIBRATION TIME Range 0 00 9999 99 min Default 3 00 min After the programs finish and the oven temperature returns to the initial value the equilibration time must elapse befor the system is considered Ready This allows for even temperature distribution 11 1 3 PF menu PF menu Description puis Del Line Deletes the current line T Ins Line Inserts a line in line at the current cursor position gt Fan Off Stops the fan operation Fan On Restarts the fan operation Print Prints the column oven program from a Chromatopac pol NOTE Fan Off can not be operated in the following case Oven temperature setting value 2 50 deg Program running 108 GC 2010 1 1 gt 11 Creating an Oven Temperature Program Temperature Programs 11 2 1 Isothermal analysis The isothermal analysis technique keeps the column oven temperature at a constant value This method is useful for separating compounds within a narrow boiling point range 11 2 2 Programmed analysis When the sample contains compounds over a wide boiling point range isothermal analysis is irsufficient for separating all the compounds At lower temperatures the high boiling point compounds will co elute with wide peaks Low concentrations of high boiling point com pounds may never be detected On the other hand at a hi
117. GC 2010 Gas Chromatograph INSTRUCTION MANUAL Read this instruction manual thoroughly before using this instrument Save the manual for future reference SHIMADZU CORPORATION ANALYTICAL amp MEASURING INSTRUMENTS DIVISION KYOTO JAPAN 221 40407F Copyright O Shimadzu Corporation 2000 All rights are reserved including those to reproduce this publication or parts there of in any form without permission in writing from Shimadzu Corporation Information in this publication is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of the vendor Any errors or omissions which may have occurred in this publication despite the utmost care taken in its production will be corrected as soon as possible but not necessarily immediately upon detection Note that Shimadzu does not have any obligation concerning the effects resulting from the appli cation of the contents of this manual WARNING LABELS Label conventions for this manual are provided below Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could result in NM WARNING death or serious injury Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could result in N CAUTION minor or moderate injury and property damage NOTE Emphasizes essential information Safety Precautions The GC 2010 Gas Chromatograph is a qualitative and quantitative analysis system Review the following precautions for s
118. HIMJ Mk CHD i 2 2 nda de tye UE 16 Special Functions 16 2 Batch Schedule Example 2 For dual AOC The main tower set up is identical to Example 1 Sub injector settings are given below Vials No 76 to 78 are analyzed Chromatopac data processing file No 0 is set for the Ch 2 A standard of known concentration is injected once Clean up is performed but the slope test is not performed Sub injector settings Screen display 1 Start vial No 76 LIHE 1 End vial No 78 Vial Start vial No 4B Final vial Mo T Sample 4b Inject samplel v 2 GC file No FILE2 Ed GC file No m y 2 FILEZ v 3 Data processing file No Ch 2 FILEO Dataprocessor Channel No Che File No E 4 Number of injections 1 Sample type Standard Ed Sample Number of Injection us sample type 4 Standardl 5 Slope test Off Dn up On Ej Command slope test Off Clean up 4 Onl 6 The batch is set up Dual 400 201 8 E Vial GC DP HIMJ Mk CHD i 22 Chi de He E T 78 2 Chz 8 MS ee GC 2010 2 227 29 16 Special Functions 1 6 3 Time Program 228 Use a time program to execute zero point adjustment and relay control during analysis 16 3 1 Screen description Select 3 TIME PROGRAM from the FUNC key screen to display the time program screen shown in Fig 16 3 1 A time program starts as soon as analysis starts Time programs do not need to be set
119. IME RATE Q ween 1 0 END Fig 17 1 1 GC 2010 269 270 17 Printing 17 1 Printing 17 1 2 2 17 1 2 3 GC 2010 AOC parameters The current file s AOC parameters and the parameters of AOC settings can be printed The AOC2 parameters can be printed when an AOC2 is configured in the analytical line All printed items are listed by command name To match command names to screen items refer to 17 2 AOC commands AOC PARAMETER AOC1 AOC2 WRPT 2 2 WMOD 1 1 REPT 1 1 IVOL 1 0 1 0 WPRS 0 0 PUMP 5 5 WTPP 0 2 0 2 WAIT 0 0 0 0 ISPD 2 2 SSPD SAND 0 0 SOLV 0 0 SINT 0 0 SSNO 0 0 SNO2 0 0 AAIR 0 0 USPD 2 2 DSPD 2 2 HIGH 0 0 LOWS 0 0 Fig 17 1 2 Main parameters Press Print PF menu from the SET key to print the temperature valves for all heated zones the CAR1 2 pressure value and the total flow rate value from the current file GC PARAMETER O FILEO COLUMN OVEN TEMP 25 0 INJ1 TEMP 25 0 DET1 TEMP 25 0 INJ1 PRESS 100 0 INJ1 FLOW 50 0 END Fig 17 1 3 17 1 2 4 Time program and Pre Run program The time programs and Pre Run programs can be printed as Event No or parameter names To match Event No and parameter names to screen items refer to 17 3 Program Parameters and 17 4 Event No NOTE For all functions treated as events in the printout the line No is displayed as 0 regardless of the line number GC TIME PROGRAM
120. INSTALLATION from the DIAG key screen to display the Standard installation screen shown in Fig 14 5 1 The installation test can be performed at any time to check for proper functioning From this screen load the analytical conditions of the standard installation test Standard Installation Test 0 FILEO After loading a file used in the standard installation test push PF2 to set test parameters to the file seb column dimensions before to set test parameters JReturn Unload Fig 14 5 1 Standard installation test main screen 14 5 2 PF menu PF menu Description Reference section Automatically sets the analytical conditions of the standard installation test Load When Load PF menu is pressed TEST is displayed for the used file name Unload Returns analytical conditions to their former status NE 194 GC 2010 14 Diagnosis 14 5 Standard Installation Test 14 5 3 Test procedure 1 2 Specify the analytical conditions file of the standard installation test Example Load File 1 using File PF menu of the SET key Configure the injection port and the detector used to execute the standard installation test in an analytical here However if two or more analytical lines have been configured the lowest No analytical line is set with the test conditions In the standard installation test only one detector can be set per analytical line If two or
121. L split ratio monitor Program total min A program can contain up to 7 ramps 12 5 7 2 US B FILEG Time min Split Ratio Init 50 1 END Fig 12 5 11 Split ratio program setup screen Parameter list TIME SPL 12 5 7 3 Range 0 00 9999 99 min Default 0 00 min Select Split Prog PF menu from the FLOW key main screen when not in DIRECT mode to display the Split Ratio screen shown in Fig 12 5 11 Set this parameter to display the split ratio used previously in the Split Ratio column IT RATIO Range 1 0 0 0 9999 9 Default 1 0 Set the split ratio If the split ratio is set to 1 0 the total flow rate remains constant regardless of the oven temperature PF menu PF menu Description Reference section Del Line Deletes a line at the current cursor position Ins Line Inserts a line in line at the current cursor position Print Prints the split ratio through to a Chromatopac GC 2010 12 5 7 4 Setting a split ratio program E Screen terminology 1 ramp program Split ratio Program Program Time starts finishes E Program creation 1 ramp program Split ratio 60 5 00min Split ratio 50 12 Injection Port 12 5 Split Splitless Injection System Initial ratio SPLIT 1 Initial program run time TIME a Final ratio SPLT ess S2 Pplit Ratio CARI split ratio
122. M 7 2 Specifying Clean Up Parameters E Clean up column oven temperature program The clean up temperature program consists of a single program ramp CLEAN UP RATE Range END 250 00 250 00 C min Default END Sets the rate of column temperature increase for the clean up program CLEAN UP TEMP Range 0 0 450 0 C Default 25 0 C Sets the final temperature for the column oven temperature clean up program Do not exceed the maximum column temperature CLEAN UP TIME Range 0 00 9999 99 min Default 0 00 min Sets the final temperature hold time for the clean up program E Clean up column Inlet pressure program The clean up pressure program consits of a single program ramp CLEAN UP RATE Range END 400 00 400 00 kPa Default END Sets the rate of column inlet pressure for the clean up program CLEAN UP PRESS Range 0 0 970 0 kPa Refer to Fig 3 5 1 Default 0 0 kPa Sets the final pressure for the column inlet pressure clean up program CLEAN UP TIME Range 0 00 9999 99 min Default 0 00 min Sets the final pressure hold time for the clean up program E Clean up total flow rate program The clean up total flow rate program consists of a single program ramp CLEAN UP RATE Range END 400 00 400 00 ml min Default END Sets the rate of total flow increase for the clean up program CLEAN UP FLOW RATE Range 0 0 1200 0 ml min Refer to Fig 3 5 1 Default 50 0 ml min Set the final flow rate for the total flow rate clean
123. NS Specify the configuration of miscellaneous setup items 16 6 3 Setting the date and time 16 6 3 1 Screen description Select 6 GC CONFIGURATION from the FUNC key screen and then select 1 DATE TIME SETTING to display the Date Time setting screen shown in Fig 16 6 2 The date and the time can be set This setting is automatically saved even when the GC power is off Date Time Set i GIB TET 13 15 50 The current date and time are displayed t i Date yyyy mm dd 2000 6 14 Time hh mm Fig 16 6 2 Date time setup screen 16 6 3 2 Parameter list DATE Range 2000 01 01 2099 12 31 TIME Range 00 00 00 23 59 59 GC 2010 239 16 Special Functions 16 6 GC Configuration 16 6 4 Setting the maximum temperature limits 16 6 4 1 Screen description Select 6 GC CONFIGURATION from the FUNC key screen and then select 2 MAX TEMPERATURE to display the Max Temperature screen shown in Fig 16 6 3 Set the maximum temperature limits of 8 heated zones Colum Hax Temp E0 406 0 SPL1 Max Temptt ATE WEI1 Max Temp t 470 0 FIDi Hax Temp 0 an n ECD Max Temp t AUES Max Temp t AUKA Max Temp t AUS Hax Temp t Return Fig 16 6 3 Maximum temperature setup screen 16 6 4 2 Parameter list COLUMN Range 0 0 470 0 C Default 400 0 C In order to protect t
124. ON key from the OPTION key main screen or press NEXT PF menu until the CRG screen shown in Fig 15 3 1 appears The NEXT PF menu key toggles among the AOC parameters AUX APC CRG screens in that order ii Hot Uge Fig 15 3 1 CRG main screen NOTE If the CRG is turned off after a negative temperature valve has been set the temperature cannot be achieved and the GC cannnot become ready When turning off the CRG ensure that the temperature valve is set properly GC 2010 209 210 15 Optional Devices 15 3 Setting the CRG Parameters 15 3 2 Parameter list COLUMN OVEN VALVE CRG INJ 2 VALVE CRG Selection On Off Default Off Selection Use Not Use Default Not Use When the CRG is connected to the column oven the column oven temperature control range is extended to 99 0 450 0 C When using the CRG set VALVE to On and CRG to Use When using valve control only set VALVE to On and set CRG to Not Use Selection On Off Default Off Selection Use Not Use Default Not Use When the PTV is installed on INJ2 and the CRG is connected the injection port temperature control range is extended to 99 0 450 0 C When using the CRG set VALVE to On and CRG to Use When using valve control only set VALVE to On and set CRG to Not Use 15 3 3 PF menu PF menu Reference Description section
125. OPA STU ENE OY geo Symbol Return Alphabet Low Fig 8 2 3 Renaming a file GC 2010 8 2 5 8 Setting the Analytical Parameters and File Management 8 2 File Management Initializing a file Select File Init PF menu on the file list screen to display the file initialization screen shown in Fig 8 2 4 Enter the file number or move the cursor to select the file Then press File Init PF menu During File initialization the file name and contents are deleted The parameters return to their default settings Once a file is initializen the action cannot be undone The current file cannot be initialized File Management 0 FILEO DI A D s FILEO u A FILE FILES E rus 3 FILES 3 FILES FILE E FILES E FILES Fig 8 2 4 Initializing a file GC 2010 3 gt 91 92 8 3 1 29 9 Setting the Analytical Parameters and File Management r 3 Specifying the Analytical Flow Line Components Line Config Screen description Select Line Confg PF menu from the SET key main screen to display the Line Configu ration screen shown in Fig 8 3 1 The SET key main screen displays the parameters for one analytical flow line The line configuration screen determines the components injection port detector s and options of the analytical flow line When the system is turned on the temperatures are controlled for the components in the flow line If the AFC is present carr
126. OTE When the time scheduler is operating the mode cannot be changed The table below shows the relationship between the schedule number and the day of the week Mode 1 Mode 2 schedule number day No 0 Sun No 1 Mon No 2 Tue No 3 Wed No 4 Thu No 5 Fri No 6 Sat No 7 GC 2010 16 1 4 Editing a time schedule Select 2 EDIT from the time scheduler menu to display the schedule number or the day of the week setup screen shown in Fig 16 1 3 Before editing a schedule select the schedule number or the day of the week and press Edit PF menu Then the schedule edit screen shown in Fig 16 1 4 appears You do not have to set schedules in the order of execution time After editing time schedules they are automatically sorted More than one schedule can be set to the same time These schedules will be executed at the same time 16 Special Functions 16 1 Time Scheduler schedule Ho Inactive schedule Number 1 Return pee NOT READY Ho Value Inactive schedule Time Function Mi ieee Start GC 2 l1 38 Program Wait ready to start Fig 16 1 3 Schedule number selection screen 16 1 5 PF menu Fig 16 1 4 Schedule edit screen gt PF menu Description Re torence section New Creates a new time schedule 16 1 6 Del Line Deletes a schedule line at the current cursor position GC 2010
127. OW key and select Off PF menu The inspection maintenance can begin 300 GC 2010 18 Maintenance and Inspection 18 9 Inspection and Maintenance FID gt E Removing the FID Remove the FID parts using the following procedure 1 Removing the igniter and the FID collector The igniter is integrated into the FID collector Remove them together Loosen and remove the two collector screws Lift the collector and its screws up at the same time Screws Fig 18 9 3 Removing igniter and FID collector 2 Removing the FID high voltage unit D Liftthe high voltage plate up 2 Then pull the high voltage cable and its spring out horizontally as shown in Fig 18 9 4 High voltage plate ol High voltage cable Fig 18 9 4 Removing the FID high voltage unit E Removing the FID jet Remove the FID jet using a hexnut screwdriver Fig 18 9 5 Hexnut screwdriver option part No 670 18800 GC 2010 301 Fig 18 9 6 Removing the FID jet B Installing the FID jet Tighten the FID jet securely using a hexnut screwdriver Hexnut screwdriver Fix here Jet Fig 18 9 7 Installing FID jet Reinstall other parts in reverse order 302 GC 2010 je 29 19 Troubleshooting 1 9 1 Troubleshooting This section describes possible problems causes and solutions They are divided by analytical procedure If the problem is not solved by following the recommended solutions or if other problems occur contact your shimadzu
128. R7A CR 7A plus The signal multiplied by 1 2 is output from the GC then the signal received by the Chromatopac is multiplied by 2 When connecting the GC to a C R7A CR 7A plus for the first time or replacing the Chromatopac set the detector signal output to Off and perform calibration For the calibration procedure refer to 2 7 Connecting external device cables Linear Select linear when connecting the GC to any Chromatopac other than the C R8A C R7A CR 7A plus When connecting the GC to a C R7A CR 7A plus and setting the ANALOG SIGNAL TYPE to Linear the optional signal cable linear P N 221 47251 92 is required GC 2010 13 2 2 3 PF menu 13 Detector 13 2 Hydrogen flame ionization detector FID PF menu Description Reference section Reduces the air flow rate heats filament and ignites detector when lonite pressed when FLAME was set to Off 13224 9 If AUTO IGNIT is set to On on the SYSTEM key screen the detector is urn automatically ignited after each setting reached the setting value Sets the flow rate of makeup gas hydrogen and air if the advanced Det Gas Pressure Control APC is installed 1324 If the Advanced Pressure Control APC is installed you can set automatic Ign Set ure oe aks i gta E ignition and automatic re ignition Default value is On Next Det Toggles to the setup screen of another installed detector The DET key can
129. RPO FILEO E Current File 4RPO FILEO E GC Stop Sequence Manual Start 4 Stop GC Stop Program Start Time min A Cont Sleep Time min Restart GC Fig 7 1 1 Main screen accessed in system Fig 7 1 2 Main screen accessed in system Off status On status GC 2010 73 74 7 Starting and Stopping the GC SYSTEM 7 1 SYSTEM Key Main Screen 7 1 2 Parameter CURRENT FILE Selection File No 0 9 Default File No 0 Changes the currently loaded file The GC will be controlled based on the parameters in the specified file START TIME Range 0 0 6000 0 min Default 0 0 min Sets the period of time after flow control starts until temperature detector control starts START TEMP DET Selection Yes No Default Yes Select Yes to start temperature detector control after the start time is finished Select No to continuously flow the carrier gas and not to start temperature detector control DETECTOR Selection On Off Default On Prepaies the configured detector for analysis but does not ignite the FID or FPD AUTO IGNIT Selection On Off Default On Ignites the FID FPD detector automatically Select On for the FID FPD detector to stand by in the ignited status Select Off for it to standby without igniting CLEAN UP Selection Off Analysis Para Clean Up Para Default Off Clean up indicates running a GC program without injecting sample Select whether to run the clean up prog
130. STEM key main screen If the system is operating press the SYSTEM key and select Maint INJ PF menu The temperature of the injection port and the column oven automatically drops and the carrier gas stops when the temperature drops below 51 C When the message GC is ready for maintenance appears on the screen injection port inspection maintenance can begin Lift up the entire INJ DET cover and remove it Because the detector is hot use tweezers or pliers to handle the detector cover For Maint INJ refer to 7 Starting and Stopping the GC SYSTEM E Removing the glass insert Remove the glass insert using the following procedure Loosen and remove the glass insert nut while holding the septum nut Remove the septum nut assenbly by lifting it straight up and moving it to the side The glass insert could break if the septum nut assenbly is not lifted straight up GC 2010 289 18 Maintenance and Inspection 18 5 Inspection and Maintenance Glass Insert Fig 18 5 1 Tool Glass insert wrench standard accessory Part No 221 46977 Septum nut Glass insert nut ges Top of injection port Fig 18 5 2 2 Use tweezers to lift the glass insert out of the injection port Tweezers Glass insert Fig 18 5 3 E Cleaning the glass insert NOTE Remove the O ring before rising the glass insert with solvent After cleaning use a new O ring 1 Removing the silica wool Septum fragments and other
131. T2 AUX3 AUX4 Use a time program to change temperature of heated zones Temperature AUX5 which cannot be programmed Specify the number of times to execute the GC program Then End of either the program stops or the next file is executed If greater program than 2 the choices are continuous or pause at each run For NUMBER an AOC select continuous When pause at each run is Stop OF TIMES selected the program executes continuously at set intervals OF RUN f If another program such as a temperature program is running 0 FILE when time program execution time expires priority is given to 0 9 Load running the program When the current program finishes the time program stops or file is changed to another file Other Set the parameter to input event No Refer to 17 4 Event No 1 Relay description Event 91 92 V91 92 Point A or B Switch point Relay PRG V93 94 Point A or B On Off point Event 1 16 On or Off Relay Oven Exhaust Fan On or Off Cooling Fan On or Off AC On Off CRG INJ On or Off CRG Colum On or Off 230 GC 2010 AC On Off Turns the power supplied to the AC connector on the power controller PCB on off 16 Special Functions 16 3 Time Program Event of On Off point Turns the relay contact on the PRG PCB option on off Event91 and Event92 Switches a contact and b contact of each relay on the CPU PCB standard Event of PRG Switches a contact and b contact
132. U EU Ov 0 9 EOS mol 1 Co ono kw DO Lr 4Eeturn Alphabet Low Fig 5 3 5 GC 2010 3 gt 63 64 5 Basic Key Operation 5 3 Basic Key Operations E Entering characters Initially the character input screen is in upper case mode Press LowerChr PF menu to select lower case mode Press NumerChr PF menu to select numeric mode Alphabetic mode upper case lower case Key Toggled characters 1 Ala gt Bb gt Cl Aa 2 Dd gt Ele gt Ff gt Ff gt 3 Gg Hh gt Wi Gg gt 4 Jj gt Kk gt M gt Jj 5 M m Nn gt Obo gt Mim gt 6 Pp gt Qq gt Rr gt Pp gt T Ss gt Tt Uu gt Ss gt 8 VN gt Ww Xx gt VN gt 9 Yy gt Zz gt YN 0 0 gt 1 gt 2 gt 3 gt 4 gt 5 gt 6 gt 7 gt 8 gt 9 gt 0 gt blank gt gt gt gt gt x x gt gt H gt gt gt ee gt blank gt amp gt gt gt H gt gt x x gt gt gt gt gt blank gt 8 ots Numeric mode Press the 0 to 9 keys to input numbers 0 to 9 Press the and keys to toggle the symbols GC 2010 29 5 Basic Key Operation 4 Getting Help The Help function describes items on the setup screens Understanding the items helps to quickly and efficienty set up analytical parameters and proceed to the analyses 5 4 1 Screen Help If you do not know the meaning of an item on the screen pres
133. a split splitless injection system Analytical conditions as well as the analytes determine the column selection Column vary in length polarity film thickness and inner diameter GC 2010 49 29 4 Installing the column 2 Location of Heated Zones The capillary column can be installed in the following heated zones If 8 is selected an auto injector cannot be installed Injection port 6 8 Normally installed in 7 Detector 1 4 Normally installed in 4 Top view Fig 4 2 1 Location of heated zones 50 GC 2010 4 29 4 Installing the column Installing the column hanger Insert the column hanger into hanger slots inside the column oven as shown The hanger is a standard accessory Squeeze the top of the hanger in order to insert in the slots When one hanger is installed insert it in the back slots Install two hangers in both the front and back slots LLL Column hanger Fig 4 3 1 GC 2010 51 29 4 Installing the column 4 Proper Placement of graphite Ferrules AN WARNING Wear safety glasses when handling the capillary column to prevent eye injuries 4 4 1 Placing graphite ferrules on the column Graphite ferrules are required for proper sealing Follow these procedures to place one fer rule at each end of the capillary column The graphite adjuster marked with an S or F to indicate whether it is for the injection port or detecto
134. a tes AA te E A 15 Moving the GC oli A A A ey 16 Power supply and wiring oo ooooocooronrrn III 17 Gas supply plumbing oocoococ eee 20 Connecting external device cables 00 00 cece eee eee 28 AFC APC AFC and APC Overview 0 0 cee eee 35 Definition of Terms 22 0360 fee ce eee a y Rr ERR ele ee 36 Flow Line Diagrami s s ezersi ee a b ee Re ERE ERRARE eee ee 37 AFC and APG control enar Mae Ww deen ie ate ae wee ee 38 3 4 1 AFG Control 55s saca oe a ea hd E ac Axed dy alt E Reb bee Mae X rre eels 38 3 4 2 Splitimode SPLIT AEQ La eene ettet Eu RR e E E E T 38 GC 2010 3 gt Contents 3 4 3 Split mode SPLITLESS AFC 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee 3 4 4 Split m de DIRECT oca eek RI a a eu 3 4 5 Control by APG 222 sass sn e eL de i CH eed e Vente 3 5 AFC and APC Control Ranges 0 000 leeren 3 6 AFC and APC Offset Calibration ooooooomo 4 Installing the column 4 1 Capillary Column Overview eee 4 2 Location of Heated Zones 00 cece eee eee eee eee 4 3 Installing the column hanger 000 e eee eee 4 4 Proper Placement of graphite Ferrules 4 4 1 Placing graphite ferrules on the column 0200000ee eee 4 4 2 Positioning the graphite ferrule ooooococcooconocooo o 4 5 Installing and removing the capillary column 4 5 1 Installing the capillary column llli 4 5 2 Removing t
135. afe operation I Use the System only for its intended purpose 2 Follow the procedures described in this Instruction Manual 3 Observe all warnings and precautions 4 Never disassemble or modify the system without our permission 5 Contact your Shimadzu representative for system repairs System WARNING labels AN WARNING DO NOT TOUCH High temperature injection ports detectors and top cover WARNING WHEN USING HYDROGEN Shut off hydrogen and cap unused column fittings to prevent accumulation of hydrogen in oven and possible explosion HOT AIR EXHAUST Keep temperature sensitive materials away from opening label NM WARNING HIGH VOLTAGE Disconnect power cable before removing cover Refer servicing to qualified service personnel Warning label AN WARNING WARNINGS WHEN USING HYDROGEN When hydrogen gas is in use care should be exercised in order to prevent an accident 1 Connect gas lines correctly Do not connect the hydrogen line to the air inlet or hydrogen will leak excessively 2 When the device is not in use the main valve of the hydrogen gas cylinder or generator must be closed Also make sure that there is no gas leakage from the main valve of the supply 3 The flow line for hydrogen gas should be checked for leakage whenever it is used 4 To prevent buildup of explosive
136. al face the seal may be damaged and leaks can occur E Checking for injection port leaks Leaks can negatively impact reproducibility of results and can waste carreier gas NOTE Septum purge leaks do not affect performance These error messages canbe cleaned As for the following procedure there could be cases in which the error message purge leaks etc appears However it does not matter to the test Then select Reset Error Check for leaks according to the following procedure 1 2 3 4 GC 2010 o Turn off the system and then turn on the system pressing Press Start GC PF menu from the SYSTEM key screen Set the Flow Control to Cont from the SYSTEM key screen Press Stop GC PF menu to stop the system temperature control User the MONIT key to veryfy that the oven injection portk and detector temperatures have dropped below 40 C Press Off on the FLOW screen to stop AFC control Carrier gas flow stops Set the purge flow tate to 0 ml min Remove the capillary column and seal the connections with a new graphite ferrule with wire and column nut Install a blank nut G type on both the split vent and purge vent Verify that the gas cylinder pressure is above 300 kPa Set the Split mode to Direct and Control mode to Press from the FLOW key main Screen Set the inlet pressure to 150 kPa and set the purge flow to 500 ml min Press On Off PF menu to s
137. al flow rate is 1 200 ml min 2 The linear velocity ranges from 0 to the value at which the calculated column inlet pressure is 970 kPa or less 12 5 2 3 PF menu PF menu Reference Description section Column Sets inner diameter length and film thickness of capillary column Values set here are used in column inlet pressure caluculations from column flow rate or linear velocity or vice versa 12 5 3 If these parameters are not set correctly calculations are not performed correctly Gas Saver The gas saver saves carrier gas by reducing the split flow rate 12 5 4 On Off Sets flow controller to be used to On Default value is Off When Start GC is pressed the AFC in the current analytical line which is set to On starts If AFC is set to Off during carrier gas control the control stops When it is set to On again the carrier gas control restarts Press Prog Sets the column inlet pressure program 12 5 5 Flow Prog Sets the total flow rate program 12 5 6 Split Prog Sets the split ratio program 12 5 7 Purge Sets the septum purge flow rate and program for flow rate 12 5 8 Advanced High Pressure Injection Sets high pressure injection where the column inlet pressure is kept at a high value for a certain period of time during injection 12 5 9 Splitter Fix Keeps the split flow rate constant Offset Performs offset calibration of the AFC sensor
138. also be used to switch screens 13 2 2 4 Igniting the FID Bi ignition procedure 1 When DETECTOR is set to On and AUTO IGNITE is set to On on the SYSTEM key main screen On the DET key main screen set the detector to On Press Start GC PF menu SYSTEM key main screen GC control starts The FID ignites once it has reached the set temperature The baseline should indicate whether ignition was successful The message Ignition finished appears and the ignition is completed GC 2010 gt 153 13 Detector 13 2 Hydrogen flame onization detector FID 2 When DETECTOR is set to On and IGNITE is set to Off on the SYSTEM key main screen On the DET key main screen set the detector to On Press Start GC PF menu SYSTEM key main screen Wait until the detector temperature increases to the temperature set Press lgnit PF menu to ignite the o The baseline should indicate whether ignition was successful The message Ignition finished appears and the ignition is completed 3 When DETECTOR is set to Off on the SYSTEM key main screen Press Start GC PF menu on the SYSTEM key main screen Set DETECTOR of the FID to On Wait until the detector temp
139. alysis oooocooocccrcannr n n nnn 105 10 2 1 Terminating the analysis llli he 105 10 2 2 External devices esee esr vere dre E Ra Re ER Rat wa eed PR RO E RR RON eren 105 Creating an Oven Temperature Program COL Key Main Screen oooccocooooc eee 107 11 1 1 Screen description it a en y ROB Rd P EE Ra bergen EPUM EN RUND TR 107 11 1 2 Parameter list illu de Dax e ERU ac C RU AAA aa A E 108 11 1 3 PREMENU S to rote eoa tuae Erbe elitam AED qo steer 108 Temperature Programs 0 00 cece eee nn n hh nnn 109 11 2 1 Isothermalanalysis uc e a to t oe at n n RR aere dn 109 11 2 2 Programmed analysis ooocooco ooo eee eee 109 11 2 3 Creating a temperature program lssssllseeses nr 109 Injection Port Introduction miii a a A RE denm WR Ge mm ee a Re T ai el 113 Glass Insert and Packing Requirements 0000 0 eee eee eee 114 Removing and inserting the glass insert eee eee eee 116 Removing and installing the septum llelelseseselllnes 122 Split Splitless Injection System s esee n 8 124 12 5 1 Setting the temperature with INJ Key sslssessele RII 125 12 5 2 Setting the flow rate with FLOW key 0 0 00 cece RR IRR IA 127 12 5 3 Setting column parameters s sussana anana ehe 130 12 5 4 CAN D REPE 131 12 5 5 Pressure prograrm riy cis erc a rem pde RE one none re s Sas 132 12 5 6 Creating a Flow rate prograM
140. am is finished the system becomes ready After the Pre Run program is finished the GC starts End of For example select this item to activate a gas sampler switch the GC starts i program valve and introduce the gas sample in to the GC as soon as the program stops AOC HSS starts After the Pre Run program is finished the AOC HSS starts After sample is injected GC starts Clean up After the Pre Run program stops clean up starts After clean up finishes the system becomes ready 16 4 4 16 4 5 In the following case AUTO of the STOP parameter is carried out when the pre run program is fin ished There is no STOP parameter in the pre run program Running the Batch Schedule Editing a Pre Run program To change the contents of the existing Pre Run program move the cursor using the A and V keys to the program line to be edited and press the ENTER key To change only the time enter the new time from the edit screen and press Finish PF menu To change the other parameters move the cursor and make the changes from the edit screen and then press Finish PF menu To cancel the edits and restore the original time program press Cancel PF menu before pressing Finish PF menu After Pre Run program is finished When the Pre Run program is finished certain events automatically return to their pre programs status These events are listed below E
141. ames POE in 5 3 Basic Key Operations A T APOT om APCS oo APCS 0 oo EC ADE GHI OL O OPS STU CRUZ O Do goucl 7 E Lor Fig 16 6 17 AUX APC name setup screen 16 6 8 6 Relay Name Customization Select 6 GC CONFIGURATION from the FUNC key screen and then 6 PORT NAME CUSTOMIZATION and finally RELAY NAME CUSTOMIZ to open the screen shown in Fig 16 6 18 Only listed relays can be named Relay Name Customization Relay TRES EVENT el Cee EVENT 82 Vaz To change the names refer to 5 3 5 Changing item names in 5 3 Basic Key Operations EEC DE CHI GEL ON OPS SU BVA OY e eoubl a NumerChr LowerChr Fig 16 6 18 Relay name setup screen 250 GC 2010 16 Special Functions 16 6 GC Configuration 16 6 9 Setting the link device code When the gas chromatograph is linked to a Chromatopac the link device code must be set The link device code specifies which GC channel should start when the GC START key is pressed 16 6 9 1 Screen description Select 6 GC CONFIGURATION from the FUNC key screen and then select 7 LINK DEVICE CODE to open the screen shown in Fig 16 6 19 Link Device Code Channel to start Chi 4 ong Che On Ch3 On Cha _On Fig 16 6 19 Link device code setup screen 16 6 9 2 Parameter list CHANNEL TO START Ch1 Ch4 Selection On Off Defau
142. and reset the counter limit Set the limit to perform maintenance on a regular basis The septum glass insert replacement cycle varies depending on the analytical conditions and samples If the glass insert is easily contaminated when analyzing non volatile com punds for example set a low counter limit On the other hand when analyzing cleaner sam ples the limit can be increased E Starting up the GC Turn on the power and or press the SYSTEM key to display the GC starup screen On this screen specify the files used for instrument startup and instrument cleaning column bake out Press Start GC PF menu to start temperature control of each heated zone accoding to the parameters set in the file A start up method should be used to initialize the system once it has been turned on Set the start up method to auto to start the file as soon as the power is on this helps with instru ment recovery after a power failure The initial step in the startup method should be turning on the carrier gas flow After a set time increase the injection port and detector temperatures The column oven temperature can then be set to increase The oven temperature increases last to protect the column from damate and the detctor from contamination The GC 2010 controls the temperatrues so that the column tempertrure never increases above the detector temperature even if all temper atures are set to increase at the same time A clean up method uses
143. ane nne a e A hh 213 16 1 5 PEdqmehucs icc Miu erdt eM E Me orbus oro td e be terim e Me 213 16 1 6 Creating a new time schedule o oococcocccco re 214 16 1 7 RE menle eiectus sers bec suttu dte te au arde rod 214 16 1 8 Parameters available in the time scheduler 0 00 00 0 eee 215 16 1 9 Changing schedule parameters 000 re 216 16 1 40 Time schedule example o ooococccoco e he 217 16 1 11 Starting stopping a time schedule ooocoocococcooc e 218 16 142 PFPimenu sess ci A DAI abd tdm Een bee es 218 16 1 13 Copying and deleting a time schedule 0 0 00 cece 219 Batch Schedule cocoa ri me ae ewe eee eee ee 220 16 2 1 Screen description 0 0 ccc hh 220 16 2 2 Parameter list merindad dle atada ala d 221 16 2 3 PE 6nu sia dl a a oY eee eee I 221 16 2 4 Creating a new batch schedule for single injector liliis 222 16 2 5 Parameter list se ad mee nn e ea Aon pt n aed wi P DER TU En 223 16 2 6 PF menu list 225 iso edt E gi a gA Aaa aa 224 16 2 7 Creating a new batch schedule for dual injectors liliis 224 16 2 8 Editing a batch schedule oooooccocccco etn ene 225 16 2 9 Batch processing Setup example oooccocccooc ne 226 Time Program Z 2 9 o 3k I x x tis RR y x acr REGE RIA 228 16 3 1 Screen description aeree A eles ipea pP EE 228 16 3 2 A debt biu thd te taba deb one sx s 228 16 3 3 Creating a new time program ooooccoc rr
144. ant during a temperature program Normally when using a wide bore column set the column inlet pressure to a low pressure 20 40 kPa COLUMN FLOW RATE Default 1 00 ml min Set the carrier gas flow rate at the capillary column exit atmospheric pressure at 25 C When you set the carrier gas flow rate the system calculates the column inlet pressure based on the inner diameter the length and the film thickness of the column The col umn flow rate is set separately so that the carrier gas flow rate desired occurs at the ini tial temperature in the oven temperature program LINEAR VELOCITY Default 2 30 0 cm s Set the average linear velocity of the carrier gas flowing in the capillary column GC 2010 12 Injection Port 12 6 Direct Injection System When you set the linear velocity the system calculates the column inlet pressure based on the inner diameter the length and the film thickness of the column The linear velos ity is set separately so that the linear velocity desired occurs at the initial temperature in the oven temperature program If you set the control mode to VELOCITY the column inlet pressure automatically changes so that the linear velocity remains constant during the oven temperature program TOTAL FLOW RATE Range 0 0 1200 0 ml min Refer to Fig 3 5 1 Default 50 0 ml min Set the total flow rate which is the sum of column flow rate split flow rate septum purge flow rate CONTROL MODE Sele
145. arameter list INSTALLATION POSITION Specify the heated zone locations for installed components INSTALLATION PIPING Set the installation status of the carrier gas and the detector gas flow controllers INITIALIZE Initialize the RAM configuration and installation settings POWER CONSUMPTION Displays the power consumption of all heated zones SERVICE Reserved for the use of shimadzu service personnel during maintenance or inspections GC 2010 255 256 16 Special Functions 16 7 Service and Maintenance 16 7 3 INSTALLATION POSITION 16 7 3 1 Screen Description Select 7 SERVICE MAINTENANCE from the FUNC key screen and then select 1 INSTALLATION POSITION to open the GC installation screen shown in Fig 16 7 2 appears After installing injection ports and detectors specify the location of installed components by entering the headed zone number while referring to Fig 16 7 3 The component type of installed injectors and detectors is automatically determined Gl Installation Port IN J1 INJZ DET1 DETZ AUKS AUXA AUX5 Type SPL WEI FID TCD Position Enter the heated zone number to specify the unit installation position in a number Refer to Fig 16 7 3 GC 2010 Fig 16 7 2 GC installation setup screen 16 7 3 2 Parameter list INSTALLATION POSITION Range 0 9 Default 0 Specify the component installation location by entering a numeric value f
146. ary column E Quantity of silica wool Quantity of silica wool standard Approx 10 mg for split Approx 2 mg for splitless WBl Silica wool is not necessarily required when making direct injections However if the sample contains non volatile compounds less than 5 mg of silica wool can improve the chromatography NOTE For special samples better results may be obtained by varying the amount of silica wool in the insert 1 Reduce the amount of silica wool for highly absorptive samples such as agricultural samples 2 Increase the amount of silica wool when injecting solvents with a high latent heat of vaporization such as water ll Position of silica wool Split and splitless glass insets are shaped differently as shown below Place the silica wool 1 2 mm below the lowest point of the needle at injection If the wool is too close or too far away from the needle good reproducibility of results may not be obtained The recommended position of silica wool for each insert is shown below 25mm 25mm 5 5mm SS Silica wool A For split analysis For splitless WBI analysis Fig 12 2 1 Silica wool position for split and splitless inserts AOC 20i 114 GC 2010 12 Injection Port 12 2 Glass Insert and Packing Requirements NOTE The position of silica wool for being displayed fig 12 2 1 is for injecting by Auto Injector for AOC 20i During manual injections the needle often goes fur
147. ayed in the value of kPa regardless of the pressure unit sets e The display printing of each log file is displayed in the value of kPa regardless of the pressure unit sets BUZZER VOLUME Selection Off Low Mid Hig Default Low BUZZER TONE Selection Lo Hi Default Hi Use a different tone for different GCs to be able to discern which GC has a problem ATMOSPHERIC COMPENSATION Selection On Off Default Off Select On to compensate for higher altitudes when in linear velocity mode ZERO TO READY Selection On Off Default On Set On for the gas chromatograph to automatically perform zero adjustment when the GC is ready POLARITY IN READY Selection Open Close Default Open Set the polarity of GC ready signal INJ1 INJ2 PRIMARY PRESS Selection 300 500 kPa 500 900 kPa 900 980 kPa Default 500 900 kPa Select the pressure range of the carrier gas cylinder If the wrong range is selected error messages are not displayed correctly Example If the gas cylinder pressure supplied to the GC 2010 is 700 kPa select 500 900 kPa GC 2010 3 16 Special Functions 1 6 Service and Maintenance 16 7 1 Screen description Select 7 SERVICE MAINTENANCE from the FUNC key screen to display the Service Maintenance screen shown in Fig 16 7 1 etallation Position Ingztallation Piping Initialize El Power Consumption E Service select function Fig 16 7 1 Service maintenance menu screen 16 7 2 P
148. b dnayew 10 ane ses 99 gt gt Ki dn DIVIN l I l HH gt gt JOSU9S 9NSSSIH I JOJ91IS8J ZH ZH JO SMEA eel 99 aD A i4 n r Josuas eJnsseJd i e y DO Odv i U9 0 uulnjoo pod uonoefuj S Joejeg e ou02 HAS 91u0429 3 osa 1a o1uoy eBung unidag 9dS e WE i LA iosuos oJnsseJd Josues eunsseJd jejur uuinjo5 JOSUSS 9jeJ MO 4 10sues 3421 MOJ4 931 A A ee et e ERES 1N3A 1MdS 1N3A 39YNd 1681 95 NI 3l VO 37 GC 2010 38 3 AFC APC 4 AFC and APC control 3 4 1 AFC Control AFC Control is illustrated in the following sections Split mode Split Splitless DIRECT 1 Control mode Pressure Section 3 4 2 Section 3 4 3 Section 3 4 4 Flow rate p Section 3 4 4 Linear velocity Section 3 4 2 Section 3 4 3 Section 3 4 4 3 42 Split mode SPLIT AFC The AFC controls the total flow rate to keep it at a constant value The TFC Total Flow Controller inside the AFC feeds back output from the column inlet pressure sensor which controls the ESC Electronic Split Controller which in turn controls the column inlet pressure Fig 3 4 1 shows the control status with a split ratio of 1 40 a velocity of 30 cm sec a purge flow rate of 3 ml min and a column oven temperature of 50 C The column inlet pressure is calculated based on the linear velocity the oven temperature the column inner diameter and the column len
149. background noise and provides a stable sig nal GC 2010 173 140909 66200 eee 3 gt 14 Diagnosis 14 1 Standard Diagnosis Each part of the gas chromatograph is checked for problems with the self diagnosis function Perform the standard diagnosis periodicaslly to maintain optimal performance and prevent failures 14 1 1 Screen description Select STANDARD DIAGNOSIS from the DIAG key main screen to display the Standard Diagnosis screen shown in Fig 14 1 1 Standard Diagnosis The standard diagnosis starts with PFZ Before the standard diagnosis the system turns off Fig 14 1 1 Diagnosis main screen 14 1 2 PF menu PF menu Description References section Start Diag Starts standard diagnosis program 14 1 5 Displays result of the most recent diagnosis However if standard diagnosis has not been executed since the power has Details 14 1 9 been turned on default values are displayed Print PF menu prints out the displayed diagnosis results Diag Param Determines setup values used for diagnostic reference and selects 14 13 diagnosis items GC 2010 175 14 Diagnosis 14 1 Standard Diagnosis 14 1 3 Diagnosis Parameters Press Diag Param PF menu from the Standard Diagnosis main screen to display the Diagnosis Parameters screen shown in Fig 14 1 2 Select the items to be checked during the self test Diagnosis Parameters NOT READY Counter
150. bend too far If the column does not reach the injection port or the detector unwind a loop of the column b Ensure that the capillary column does not touch the oven wall NOTE Tighten the column nuts first by hand then an additional half turn by wrench 4 5 2 Removing the capillary column Remove the capillary column according to the following procedure If the system is operating press the SYSTEM key and select Stop GC PF menu The heated zones wil begin to cool down Press the MONIT key and ensure that the temperatures of the injection port the detector and the column oven are 50 C or less Press the FLOW key and select Off PF menu to turn off carrier gas flow It is now safe to remove the column Remove the capillary column by reversing the procedures described in 1 Installing the capillary column 54 GC 2010 29 5 Basic Key Operation 7 1 Keypad Description and Operation The keypad functions control the unit and displays the operational status as EEE po py L OSTATUS O TEMP O FLOW START Starts stops analysis STOP key Screen Displays 16 lines of information at a time on the large display area SET key Displays the list of frequently accessed items MONIT key Monitors the GC status and the chromatogram FUNC key Displays
151. can be set for the AUX APC 15 2 1 Screen description If an AUX APC is installed press the OPTION key from the OPTION key main screen or press NEXT PF menu until the AUX APC screen show in fig 15 2 1 appears The NEXT PF menu key toggles among the AOC parameters AUX APC CRG screens in that order Press kPa ES 100 0 Fig 15 2 1 AUX APC main screen GC 2010 205 206 15 Optional Devices 15 2 Setting the AUX APC Parameters 15 2 2 Parameter list PRESS Range 0 0 400 0 kPa Default 100 kPa Set the pressure when the control mode is set to PRESS FLOW RATE Range 0 0 1200 0 ml min Default 50 ml min Set the flow rate when the control mode is set to FLOW CONTROL MODE Selection PRESS FLOW Default PRESS PRESS Controls the system to obtain the preset pressure FLOW Controls the system to obtaint the preset flow rate GAS TYPE Selection He N2 H2 Ar Default He Set the type of gas supplied to the APC If the gas type is set incorrectly the flow rate can not be set as specified in FLOW mode This is because a restrictor is used to calculate the flow rate 15 2 3 PF menu list NOTE When using the AUX APC in flow mode a restrictor is used to ensure that the actual flow rate is equal to the set flow rate Confirm the actual flow rate with a flow meter PF menu Description Reference section Program Displays the pressure
152. ck Parameters oococccccocoo ne 242 16 6 7 Parameter Configuration sosar aaiae eiea A a a e lh 244 16 6 8 Customizing Component Names oooccccoco hr 248 16 6 9 Setting the link device code oooococcoccoc he 251 16 6 00 Temperature offset 20 0 0 hrs 252 16 6711 Other Settings sr suce yd rhe ete bed er deter efr aa 253 Service and Maintenance ooococcccocnn ee 255 16 7 1 Screen description ssanie otra a a E ERR hr a 255 16 7 2 Parameter listis ici a ri ereptum ra ber pa ter ues e e RO T eren 255 16 7 3 INSTALLATION POSITION ssssssesee e m m 256 16 7 4 INSTALLATION PIPING urget p y AT DEEP e 258 16 7 5 INITIALIZATION ae rte A Rus d tee e aethera ps 260 16 7 6 Power consumption ci EROR ID ERU EUR Dee uie xo de ie ee 261 StopwWatch a res ce cA E cedo du e oats 262 16 8 1 Screen description see v 66 Meee a ARRSERRU EIER PIA REGE E Gre eei 262 16 8 2 PF MENU wien vote oe A A Eu bod Pb niv ELS 262 16 8 3 Timing with inverse measurement 0000 re 262 Key Lock and Parameter Lock 2 00 e cece e eee teen nnn 263 16 9 1 Screen description oder stack A Sa hae ee a le ee aaa ee 263 16 9 2 Key locking 24 0 4 to att pee ered ab daba Sheet eed 264 16 9 3 Parameter locking aene ed o Vaan ea ake Ren at eon Ee ee oe 265 ROM Version NO ooo wee RU ex ne ee ee eer AG ea ae ea ele aye 268 161021 lt Screen description A aree epa ee ad Bs Te hes ent ffe ed 268 16 10 2 Parametros AD Sh ae 268 Printing
153. column oven to a temperature approximately 30 C higher than the column operating temperature during analyses Do not exceed the maximum column temperature limit 3 Setting the injection port temperature and the detector temperature Use the same temperatures normally set for analyses Set the detector to a temperature approximately 30 C higher than the column operating temperature 294 GC 2010 NOTE 4 Conditioning time Generally condition the column for 2 to 3 hours usually If the column is considerably contaminated increase the conditioning time Centain column liquid phases can be easily damaged Verify the maximum column temperatures limit before use and conditioning High temperatures can damage the column particularly if oxygen is present in the colums Use of an oxygen trap is recommended Avoid rapid temperature increases especially for polar columns AAA SC 2010 E 295 gt 18 Maintenance and Inspection 1 8 8 Inspection and Maintenance Flow Controller Three areas in the flow controller should be inspected the molecurar sieve filter and two traps PURGE and SPLIT in case of split speitless And two areas should be inspected in case of WBI Part name Part No Reference No Molecular sieve filter 221 34121 93 Trap PURGE 221 42559 92 Trap SPLIT 221 42559 92 Cami D CARRIER PURGE 2 PURGE MN HA PHE
154. contaminants on the silica wool affect reproducibility Ghost peaks may also be present Push silica wool out using a thin long wire 290 GC 2010 18 Maintenance and Inspection 18 5 Inspection and Maintenance Glass Insert 3 gt AN WARNING Use a hood when cleaning the insert with reagents like organic solvent and acid Wear protective clothing such as goggles gloves and a lab coat If reagents get on to the skin or in the eyes flush with copious amounts of water and consult a medical professional 2 Removing particles from the glass insert After removing the silica wool rinse the interior of the insert by wiping with gauze soaked in solvent such as acetone etc or soak the insert in organic solvent and clean with an ultrasonic cleaning unit 3 If the the glass insert is extremely dirty If particles and stains cannot be removed soak the glass insert in an aqueous solution of alkaline detergent for glass for approximately 1 day rinse the insert with large amounts of water then rinse it with organic solvent such as acetone and let it air dry If the glass insert still cannot be cleaned you can soak it in an aqueous solution of 1N nitric acid for 7 to 8 hours then wash rinse and air dry as described above Bi Silica wool packing To repack the silica wool in the glass insert see 12 2 Glass Insert and Packing Requirements GC 2010 291 gt 18 Maintenance and Inspection 1 8 6 Inspect
155. ction Air Sample Plunger Fig 10 1 2 2 When air bubbles are eliminated aspirate exactly 1 ul of sample 3 Gently wipe the syringe needle with a lint free wipe 4 Aspirate an additional 0 5 pl of air REPRE ur CATA AS POP Aspirate sample Insert syringe until it touches needle guide Push plunger to inject sample At same time press START key of gas chromatograph Promptly pull out syringe AN WARNING Wear protective goggles when handling samples 10 1 3 Starting the analysis A green STATUS light indicates that the GC is ready for analysis Press the START key to start the temperature program the time program the pressure program and the flow rate program Any pre set programs execute prior to the start of the analysis programs GC 2010 1 0 29 10 Starting and Stopping Analysis Terminating the Analysis 10 2 1 Terminating the analysis When the various programs temperature time pressure and flow rate are finished the gas chromatograph automatically returns to the initial status and becomes ready To stop the programs before their completion press the STOP key The chromatograph automatically returns to the ready status 10 2 2 External devices E When the gas chromatograph is connected to a Chromatopac Key operation of the gas chromatograph Press the START key of the gas chromatograph to start the Chromatopac automatically Pre
156. ction 18 1 Maintenance Parts 18 1 6 Flow controller Part name P N Purpose Molecular sieve filter 221 34121 93 For removing contamination in carrier gas Trap SPLIT 221 42559 92 Split flow line trap Trap PURGE 221 42559 92 Septum purge flow line trap Aluminum gaskets 201 35183 For tubing connections 18 1 7 Hydrogen flame ionization detector FID Part name P N Purpose Jet 221 48258 91 Jet for FID Igniter 221 41847 93 Igniter for FID 18 1 8 Miscellaneous Part Name P N Key operation section PCB 221 46260 91 Key operation section LCD 221 48721 91 ASSY Key operation section key rubber 1 upper 221 46470 Key operation section key rubber 2 lower 221 46471 Temperature sensor for column 221 43695 91 Thermocouple for column 221 43696 91 Filter S 221 46310 01 Filter P 221 46310 02 FPD detector Filter Sn 221 46310 03 Quartz cylinder 221 46552 FTD detector FTD collector ASSY 221 45586 91 GC 2010 gt 18 Maintenance and Inspection 1 8 2 Inspection and Maintenance Intervals Periodical inspection and maintenance are required to maintain the gas chromatograph in the good condition Perform the periodical inspection and maintenance described in this section to obtain optimal analysis results reproducibility The recommended inspection interval for each part is described below
157. ction PRESS VELOCITY FLOW Default PRESS PRESS Controls the system so that the column inlet pressure remains constant VELOCITY Controls the system so that the linear velocity remains constant FLOW Controls the system so that the set flow rate remains constant CARRIER GAS TYPE Selection He N2 H2 Ar Default He Specify the carrier gas type supplied to the AFC This parameter is used for the measurement control of the flow rate If this parameter is set incorrectly flow rate calckulations may not be performed incorrectly Example If this parameter is set to N2 when He is actually used the displayed total flow rate column flow rate and linear velocity are lower than the actual values 1 The column flow rate ranges is from 0 to the value at which the calculated column inlet pressure is 970 kPa or less and the calculated total flow rate is 1 200 ml min or less 2 The linear velocity ranges is from O to the value at which the calculated column inlet pressure is 970 kPa or less 12 6 2 3 PF menu PF menu Reference Description section Column Sets inner diameter length and film thickness of capillary column Values set here are used in column inlet pressure caluculations from column flow rate or linear velocity or vice versa 12 5 3 If these parameters are not set correctly calculations are not performed correctly On Off Sets flow controller to be used to On Default value is Off When Start
158. ctor gas flow rate program RATE Range END 400 0 400 0 ml min Default END Set the program rate of the detector gas flow rate program If you set the rate to 0 END appears and the program ends at the previous ramp Move the cursor to END and set any numeric value other than O to enter the pressure and the time for that ramp 13 2 3 6 PF menu PF menu Description Reference section Make Up Prog Displays the setup screen of the flow rate program for makeup gas H2 Prog Displays the setup screen of the flow rate program for hydrogen gas E Air Prog Displays the setup screen of the flow rate program for air Del Line Deletes a line at the current cursor position Ins Line Inserts a line in line at the current cursor position GC 2010 gt 159 29 13 Detector 1 3 3 Thermal conductivity detector TCD 13 3 1 Principle of TCD operation The thermal conductivity detector TCD can detect all compounds except the carrier gas itself The metallic TCD filament is heated by the application of current The carrier gas used has a high thermal conductivity such as helium As sample compounds pass the filament the fila ment temperature increases because the thermal conductivity of the sample compounds is less than that of the carrier gas The filament temperature changes affect its resistance the resistance is measured and produces a chromatogram A reference filament also exists whe
159. current constant for each detector Detector controller Turns control of each detector on off during analysis program Splitter Ctrl Opens closes splitter Air value Opens closes air solenoid valve Flow Flow controller On Off Turns control of flow controller on off controller High press inj mode Turns high pressure injection mode on off Gas saver Turns gas saver split rate function on off for each injection port Temperature Turns all heated zones on off Specifies the number of times the program can execute before Time the schedule stops or switches to another file If greater than 2 scheduler The choices are Continuous or Pause at each run For an NUMBER stop AOC select Continuous When Pause at each run is Sto OF chosen the program executes at set intervals continuously at P TIMES set intervals OF RUN If another program such as a temperature program is running Schedule i A i pog 3 when time schedule execution time expires priority is given to 0 9 Load the running program When the current program finishes the time schedule stops or file is changed to another file File load Selects the next file when switching to another file Starts gas chromatograph after reaching ready status or starts Program no it immediately Program Starts clean up program after reaching ready status or starts it Clean Up start immediately Starts Pre Run program after reaching ready status or starts it Pre Run program
160. d Diagnosis 175 Standard Installation Test 194 START key 55 56 104 105 Start Procedure 80 START TIME 74 Starting analysis 103 STATUS lamp 55 58 STOP BIT 241 STOP key 55 56 105 Stop Procedure 82 STOP TIME 74 Stop Watch 262 Stopping analysis 105 SYSTEM key 55 56 T TCD 149 TEMP 108 151 161 TEMP lamp 55 58 TEMP SENSOR DIAG 177 TEMP SENSOR USE TIME 177 temperature control signal 245 Temperature offset 252 Temperature Program 109 Ten keys 55 56 TFC 36 37 38 Thermal conductivity detector 160 TIME 239 Time Program 228 Time Scheduler 211 Toggle key 56 60 TOTAL FLOW RATE 86 128 Total flow rate 36 Trap Purge 282 296 Trap s 297 Trap Split 282 296 Troubleshooting 303 U UNIT key 55 GC 2010 3 gt 325 V VALVE 210 Viscosity coefficient 36 W Warning messages 319 WATCH DOG TIMER 178 weight 4 Z Zero Adj 99 102 Zero Free 99 102 326 EE GC 2010 A
161. d during operation 5 Carrier and detector gas controller Houses AFC APC and manual flow controller cover Open and lift up this cover to remove it GC 2010 13 14 29 2 Installation 2 3 Installation site Bi Installation location requirements 2 3 1 2 32 2 3 3 2 3 4 2 3 5 Consider the following points to ensure safe and appropriate unit operation when selecting the installation site Ambient temperature and humidity For optimal performance operate this unit within the following temperature and humidity specifications Temperature range 18 C to 28 C Relative humidity range 50 to 60 Avoid use under conditions where con densation forms Operating temperature range 5 C to 40 C Operating humidity range 5 to 90 Avoid use under conditions where con densation forms Installation location Install the unit on a firm stable and flat base Corrosive gas and dust Avoid exposure to corrosive gas and excessive dust to prolong the service life and maintain optimal unit performance Electro magnetic fields and power supply noise This unit should not be used near strong electro magnetic fields The power supply must have little or no noise These items can cause instrument problems Other precautions For optimal performance avoid the following conditions during installation 1 Fluctuating ambient temperature 2 Temperature changes from heating or air conditioning 3 Direct sunlight
162. d signals 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 3 Basic performance 1 Improved reproducibility Good reproducibility is obtained even for solvents like acetone which have large expan sion volumes 2 Reduced differences among units Sensitivity differences between detectors have been reduced 3 Improved detector sensitivity The sensitivity of the FPD flame photometric detector is now five times better than pre vious models 4 Increased oven cooling speed The oven cooling speed is now 1 6 times faster than previous models Operation 1 Intelligent diagnosis The diagnosis function has improved considerably with an advanced alarm system 2 Large LCD liquid crystal display An improved much larger 16 line LCD 240 x 320 dots means that analysis parame ters and programs can now be listed improving operation The display can switch between Japanese and English High speed analysis enabled 1 Digitized detector signals Detector signals are digitized to enable high speed analysis 2 High pressure injection mode The high pressure injection mode standard enables high speed analysis GC 2010 1 2 Dimensions mm Volume L Range of temperature Accuracy of temperature Deviation of temperature Stability of temperature Temperature coefficient Range of linear temperature Cooling speed Overheat protection Program ramps Setting Program setting Total time of total program Range of temperature Temperat
163. dized and cannot separate compounds properly This is especially important for polar columns Press the SYSTEM key and set a start time This ensures that carrier gas flows for the set time prior to temperature control of the heated zones Selection of the analysis column is very important in GC analysis In general select a liquid phase whose polarity and chemical characteristics are similar to those of the analysis target compound to obtain good peak shape However highly polar columns require low temperatures and do not last long Therfore when analyzing an unknown sample begin by analyzing it on a neutral column at higher temperatures Switch to a more polar column if necessary Bi Installing the analysis column Install the column as described in sections 4 3 4 4 and 4 5 Use a box nut on the injection port side Use a column nut on the detector side GC 2010 69 70 6 Analysis Flow Chart 6 1 Analysis Flow Chart Ferrule adjuster Injection port column installation Detector column installation Injection port Detector Thermal insulation cup 34mm FID 69mm Ferrule adjuster TCD 50mm 15mm n In the case of Ferrule splitless analysis with wide bore Ferrule column Column nut Column nut for injection port E Sample injection modes Split injection In capillary columns the inner diameter is small and the sample load capacity is low Unlike packed columns only a small 1 2 uL amount
164. e Bore Injection injection port is required GC 2010 6 Analysis Flow Chart 6 1 Analysis Flow Chart 3 gt E Setting the heated zone temperatures The temperature of the injection port the column oven and the detector are set individually Usually the injection port and the detector are set to a temperature 20 C higher than the column Never set the column temperature higher than the detector because the detector could become contaminated When creating a temperature program be careful not to set the final oven temperature higher than that of the detector E Column temperature program Use a temperature program mainly to analyze samples with a wide boiling point range When developing analytical conditions for an unknown sample or a sample which will gener ate an unpredictable elution attend use an initial program with a temperature increase rate of approximately 10 C min Based on the results check the temperature range in which the peaks appear then examine the analytical conditions This procedure facilitates time pro gram development Bi Injection counter The injection port septum and the glass insert are required to be inspected and replaced periodically The GC 2010 probides a function which counts the number of injections When the number of injections exceeds the limit you are prompted to perform maintenance What is actually counted is the number of START times Select the analysis counter on the DIAG key screen to set
165. e FID will be controlled Carrier gas and detector gas will be supplied Line Configuration A Injector DIDIT A SPL1 WEIZ Tn Detector M FIDi INJ TCDE t DET A 1 Option TTT ati ANCE H55 Fig 8 3 2 Line configuration Example 1 GC 2010 3 gt 93 8 Setting the Analytical Parameters and File Management 8 3 Specifying the Analytical Flow Line Components Line Config 2 When using a SPL and FID for one line and a WBI and TCD on an other line select the SPL and the FID for line 1 and the WBl and TCD for line 2 Line Configuration DA Injector TTT A SPL1 WEIS H II Detector TDI E FIDi TCD2 tion DLL OCI ance HSS A Op Fig 8 3 3 Line configuration Example 2 3 When using a single column connected to two detectors Line Configuration WA Injector TTT ER SPL L Z WEIZ DIT Detector M ER FID option DLL 001 gt oCe H55 Fig 8 3 4 Line configuration Example 3 94 GC 2010 29 8 Setting the Analytical Parameters and File Management x 4 Changing Items Displayed with Customiz 8 4 1 Screen description Select Customiz PF menu from the SET key main screen to display the Display Custom ization screen shown in Fig 8 4 1 On this screen set the items which will be d
166. e column the detector configured and the chromatogram etc in each line can be monitored The oven temperature or the oven temperature program can be set INJ FLOW The injection port temperature can be set DET The parameters of the AFC which controls the pressure and the flow rate of the carrier gas can be set OPTION AOC parameters The detector temperature the deterctor gas flow rate the detector Signal output etc can be set AUX APC The Auto Injector AOC 20i and the Auto Sampler AOC 20s used to automatically inject liquid sample to the gas chromatograph can be set CRG The AUX APC option can be set DIAG 1 Standard Diagnosis The CRG option can be set Diagnose each part of the gas chromatograph to check for abnormality By executing standard diagnosis periodically the system can be managed and the failures can be prevented 2 Log Reading 1 GC operation Display the power On Off log and the system On Off log Display the log on whether analysis was executed to the end and whether the control was not deviated from the target value Display the key operation log and the parameter change log Display the log of displayed error messages
167. e injection Rinse AOC is operating after injection Putting vial A vial is being returned to the tray Wait AOC is waiting for analysis GC 2010 197 15 Optional Devices 15 1 Auto Injector Parameters 15 1 2 Parameter list SAMPLE WASH Range 0 99 Default 2 Set the number of times to rinse the syringe with sample before injection NUMBER OF INJECTION Range 0 99 Default 1 Set the number of times the sample should be injected SAMPLE SIZE Range 0 1 8 0 ul Default 1 0 ul Set the sample injection amount PRE SOLVENT WASH Range 0 99 Default 0 Set the number of times to rinse the syringe with solvent before injection This item is valid only when the injection mode is set to 0 normal SOLVENT WASH Range 0 99 Default 1 Set the number of times to rinse the syringe with solvent after injection PUMPING Range 0 99 Default 5 Set the number of times to raise and lower the plunger with the needle inside the sample to eleminate syringe air bubbles VISCOSITY Range 0 0 99 9 sec Default 0 2 sec During rinsing with sample and pumping the system waits for the specified period of time When aspirating sample before injection the system waits for either the valve set here or 4 seconds which ever is longer The wait time during rinsing with solvent is always 0 2 seconds DWELL TIME Range 0 0 99 9 sec Default 0 0 sec Set the length of time for the syringe to remain in the injection port after injection INJ
168. e is displayed in the Time field on the MONIT key screen Program steps do not need to be entered in order After you finish editing the Pre Run program programs are automatically sorted More than one step can be set for the same time The specified actions are executed at the same time lre kEun LINE FILE FILE Program time min 5 00 Time min Function Value p 2 00 val A 2 5 04 SPL1 Carrier Gag On Fig 16 4 1 Pre Run program main screen 16 4 2 PF menu PF menu Description pares New Creates a new Pre Run program 16 4 3 Del Line Deletes the program at the current cursor position Chng Line Changes over the screen of Pre Run program every line LA Print Prints the program to the Chromatopac E GC 2010 16 Special Functions 16 4 Pre Run Program 16 4 3 Creating a new Pre Run program Create a Pre Run program following the same procedure described in 16 3 3 Creating a new time program in 16 3 Time Program The parameters are equivalent to those shown in 16 3 5 Time Program Parameters except for STOP The STOP parameter is described below Up to 100 lines are available for the Pre Run program The possible Pre Run program execution time ranges from 0 00 to 9999 00 minutes Parameter Description Auto The AOC starts after the Pre Run program is finished If there is no AOC the GC starts Manual Stop program After the Pre Run progr
169. e optionally Both digital and analog signals can be output from one channel Even if two or more channels are set signals can be output from each channel at the same time Detector signals are transferred through an RS 232C cable for digital signals only when the C R8A or a personal computer are used and the chromatopac signal cable for analog signals 170 GC 2010 13 Detector 13 5 Setting the Output Signals 13 5 2 Background compensation If the baseline fluctuates considerably during programmed analysis the baseline fluctuation can be saved as a background baseline by the GC After wards the background is sub tracked from the baseline background compensation This section describes how to save the background baseline and perform background com pensation 1 2 3 4 5 Setting the signal output channel On the DET key main screen set SIGNAL OUTPUT PORT from Off to Channel 1 4 Ch3 and Ch4 for analog signal are available optionally Background storage setup On the DET key main screen set BACKGROUND SIG SAVE from Off to Buff 1 or Buff 2 to save the background baseline Saving the background baseline Without making an injection press the START key on the gas chromatograph to execute analysis The background baseline is saved Background compensation settings On the DET key main screen set BACKGROUND SIG COMP from No to Buff 1 or
170. e parameter related to transmission Ready Check Use to set the items which should be satisfied to light the STATUS indicator lamp and make the system ready Signal Setting Use to set the signals which can be output from the gas chromatograph Port Name Customization Use to change heater ports name carrier ports name AUX APC name relay name displayed on the screen Link Device Code Use to set the link device code when using it Temperature Offset Use to set the temperature offset for each heater port Other Configuration Use to set the language and the beep etc 7 Service Maintenance 8 Stop Watch Use to set the flow controller or initialize etc 9 Lock The stop watch can be used GC 2010 The key locking and the parameter locking can be used 3 gt 21 A AFC 35 37 Aluminum gaskets 282 ANALOG SIGNAL TYPE 152 163 Analysis counter 190 Analysis flow 67 Analysis log 185 AOC 197 AOC commands 273 AOC status 197 220 APC 35 37 42 ATMOSPHERIC COMPENSATION 254 ATMOSPHERIC PRESS 177 Auto extinguishment 155 Auto ignit 74 Auto Injector 197 automatic ignition 153 automatic re ignition 153 AUX APC 35 42 205 BACK LIGHT AUTO OFF 254 BACKGROUND SIG COMP 152 163 BACKGROUND SIG SAVE
171. eaa kPa oG Flow t ME 0 7 MakeUp Press kPa Flow Sis WI 20a Gas Kind He dir B Preaa kPa B Flow Sis WI 40 0 Refer to OPTIMAL FLOW in 13 2 3 2 Parameter list and check whether the flow rate of each detector gas is set correctly If not set it to the correct value Fig 13 2 3 Setting the detector gas flows 13 Detector 13 2 Hydrogen flame ionization detector FID 13 2 3 2 Parameter list H2 Range 0 0 200 0 ml min Default 40 0 ml min MAKE UP Range 0 0 100 0 ml min Default 30 0 ml min Make up gas is supplied to the detector to optimize its sensitivity For the FID both nitrogen and helium can be used Selecting nitrogen is recommended because it offers higher sensitivity GAS TYPE Air Selection N2 He Ar Default He Set the type of gas used as the makeup gas Do not use hydrogen for make up gas Range 0 0 1000 0 ml min Default 400 0 ml min OPTIMAL FLOW Refer to Fig 3 4 5 Fig 3 4 7 Normally set the flow rate of the makeup gas hydrogen and air as follows to maximize the FID sensitivity Makeup gas N2 Approx 30 ml min Makeup gas He Approx 30 ml min Hydrogen Approx 40 ml min Air Approx 400 ml min 13 2 3 3 PF menu PF menu Description Eeiorenco section Program The flow rate of makeup gas hydrogen and air supplied to detector can be 13234 controlled by a program Select Off to stop gas flow
172. eakage AN CAUTION It is important to hold the septum nut while removing the glass insert nut Otherwise the gas tubing can pull out the insert and the septum nut can break the insert 1 Hold the septum nut and remove the glass insert nut from the injection port Lift the septum nut straight up and move it out of the way Septum nut Glass insert nut Fig 12 3 2 116 GC 2010 2 Use tweezers to remove the glass insert Tweezers Glass insert Fig 12 3 3 pcs cC2010 117 118 12 Injection Port 12 3 Removing and inserting the glass insert E Attaching a fluoride rubber O ring Use a fluorid rubber O ring when the temperature of the injection port is 350 C or less Attach the fluoride rubber O ring as shown below and inset the glass inset in the injection port Fluoride rubber seals the injection port better than graphite and is normally used However it tends to deteriorate and leak over prolonged periods at high gt 350 C temperatures Check frequently for leaks Ensure that the inset is touching the bottom of the injection port This will place the O ring 3 mm from the top of the insert E Attaching a graphite O ring Use a graphite O ring when the temperature of the injection port is 350 C or higher Attach the graphite O ring shown as below and insert the glass insert in the injection port Although graphite O rings are recommended for high temperatures the sealing ability
173. ecial Functions 1 6 9 Key Lock and Parameter Lock 16 9 1 Screen description Select 9 LOCK from the FUNC key screen to display the Lock screen shown in Fig 16 9 1 If either key lock or parameter lock has already been activated the Unlock screen appeares instead Parameter Locking select funcbion Fig 16 9 1 Lock menu screen GC 2010 263 264 16 Special Functions 16 9 Key Lock and Parameter Lock 16 9 2 Key locking Select 9 LOCK from the FUNC key screen and then select 1 KEY LOCKING to display the Key locking screen shown in Fig 16 9 2 This screen indicates that the current status is not locked When keys are locked key operations are disabled This function is useful to prevent analy sis mistakes because no key operation is accepted When the keys are locked an icon indicating the lock status is displayed at the lower left corner of the screen When the keys are locked analyses can still be started and stopped and parameters can be monitored Press PF2 key to entering KEY LOCE mode tC Return Fig 16 9 2 Key Locking main screen E Unlocking keys Press the FUNC key when the keys are locked to open the screen shown in Fig 16 9 3 Once the keys are unlocked the screen shown in Fig 16 9 1 appears This screen is displayed when the current status is locked Press PF2 key to remove KEY LOCE mode m
174. ected to the column outlet The column flow rate can be calculated with the following equation 60xd P Po 2 Po a IA 3 E P 19 where Fc Column flow rate ml min Po Column outlet pressure d Column inner diameter mm 7 atmospheric pressure kPa L Column length m H Viscosity coefficient P Column inlet pressure kPa 19 4uPaesec helium at 20 C The viscosity coefficient depends the column oven temperature E Linear velocity Linear velocity indicates how many cm the carrier gas moves inside the column The terms VELOCITY linear velocity in this instruction manual indicate the average linear velocity inside the column The average linear velocity can be obtained with the following equation we x P 2Po x P 0 234 u P Po x P 2Po P D4 x 104 where K V Average linear velocity E Split ratio split frow For the GC 2010 split ratio refers to column flow 36 GC 2010 iagram D ine 3 AFC APC i 3 Flow L 3 HJTIOHLNOO LIIdS 9INO419313 983 are pue usBop y juo sjojuoo Ody ey 10479949P dy 104 HJTIOHLINOO 39und NNLAIS DAS se8 dnayew ayy Ajuo sjouoo DW eui s10329jep AOL Jo qoa 404 YSTIONLNOD MOT 1VLO1 D4L ajdwexa 10399jep 4 10 4 ue seyesjsnj eunBy siu 93oN I JOJONISOI JIy Jie 10 SALA 1621 99 PR mi pis I l I l Josues 9NSSSIH I I uuunjoo Je ideo JojoujseJ se6 dn ye Se
175. ection mode injection mode Returns column input pressure to value of analysis parameter 181 Turns On APC1 flow controller Turns Off APC1 flow controller 182 Turns On APC2 flow controller Turns Off APC2 flow controller 183 Turns On APC3 flow controller Turns Off APC3 flow controller 184 Turns On APCA flow controller Turns Off APCA flow controller 185 Turns On APC5 flow controller Turns Off APC5 flow controller 186 Turns On APC6 flow controller Turns Off APC6 flow controller 187 Turns On APC7 flow controller Turns Off APC7 flow controller 188 Turns On APC8 flow controller Turns Off APC8 flow controller 189 Turns On APC9 flow controller Turns Off APC9 flow controller 190 Turns On APC10 flow controller Turns Off APC10 flow controller 191 Turns On APC11 flow controller Turns Off APC11 flow controller 192 Turns On APC12 flow controller Turns Off APC12 flow controller 193 Turns On APC13 flow controller Turns Off APC13 flow controller 194 Turns On APC 14 flow controller Turns Off APC14 flow controller 195 Turns On APC 15 flow controller Turns Off APC15 flow controller 196 Turns On APC 16 flow controller Turns Off APC16 flow controller 197 Turns On APC17 flow controller Turns Off APC17 flow controller 198 Turns On APC18 flow controller Turns Off APC18 flow controller GC 2010 gt 279 280 GC 2010 AAA 10 1 sa The following tables list maintenance parts and their part numbers P N All parts are c
176. ector This section describes the detector signal configuration as well as the configuration of various other parameters which can be monitored on the screen 16 6 7 1 Screen description Select 6 GC CONFIGURATION from the FUNC key screen and then select 5 SIGNAL SETTING to display the signal settings screen shown in Fig 16 6 6 This screen allows you to adjust the GC signal parameters ma TE YI Cni SES Use the cursor to select the desired channel Che SPL1 Column Flow Press ENTER to open that Ch Not get channel s setup screen Chd Not set Fig 16 6 6 Signal setup screen 16 6 7 2 PF menu PF menu Description Reference section Gain etc Sets the signal gain and offset for each detector 16 6 7 6 Sets the format of digital signals Data File When GC is linked to a personal computer this item is automatically set to Y PC When link is ended this item automatically reverts to Chromatopac Sets signal output channels for all detectors The signal out put channels can also be specified for installed detectors Det Sig which have not been configured in an analytical line EN If two or more detectors are set to one channel data can be output to either channel without switching the output signal cable simply by changing the analytical line configuration GC 2010 16 6 7 3 Selecting the detector signals Select the signal type from t
177. ector signal of one detector from the signal of another detector This function is mainly used in a dual column flow line to subtract the data acquired without an injection from the data acquired with an injection The background signal is elimi nated For the details on SIGNAL OUTPUT PORT BACKGROUND SIG SAVE BACKGROUND SIG COMP and DET SIG SUBTRACTION refer to 13 5 Setting the Output Signals SIGNAL RANGE Selection x1 x10 1 x10 2 x10 3 x10 4 Default x10 1 Multiplies the analog signal by the coefficient 10 for a linear analog signal type If the data processing unit is saturated for example change the setting from x1 to x10 1 from x10 2 to x10 3 In case of the digital signal the signal is always output with x1 SIGNAL ATTENUATION Selection x1 x2 1 x2 2 x2 3 x2 4 Default x2 1 Multiplies the analog signal by the coefficient 2 for a wide analog signal type If the data processing unit is saturated for example change the setting from x1 to x21 from x2 2 to x23 In case of the digital signal the signal is always output with x1 ANALOG SIGNAL TYPE Selection Linear Wide Default Linear Set this item when the GC is connected to a Chromatopac in analog format When the GC is connected to a C R8A the value set here does not affect the signal because they are connected by a digital RS 232C cable Wide Select wide when connecting the GC to the C
178. ed Peak Info 196 GC 2010 2 15 Optional Devices 1 5 1 Auto Injector Parameters From the gas chromatograph specify the parameters of the Shimadzu AOC 20i Auto Injector and the AOC 20s Auto Sampler Carousel which automatically inject liquid samples into the gas chromatograph For detailed setting procedures refer to the User s Manual for AOC 20 and the User s Manual for AOC 20 Dual Injection System 15 1 1 Screen description After installing the auto injector on the gas chromatograph access the line configuration screen from the SET key and then select AOC1 for the analytical line select AOC2 in addi tion for the analytical line for dual injection systems Press the OPTION key again or press Next PF menu several times on the OPTION key screen to display the AOC parameter screen shown in Fig 15 1 1 The screen toggles among the AOC parameters gt AUX APC gt CRG screens sample Wash lt The AOC status is displayed z Number of Injection EE Sample Sizec ul 1 8 Pre Solvent Wash _ 48 solvent Wash 1 Pumping 5 Viscosity s 8 2 Dwell Time s a Inj Speed Plunger Fast Use the same Param Yes AOC POWER On Fig 15 1 1 AOC setup screen E AOC STATUS The AOC status can be monitored Screen display Description Inactive AOC is not operating Taking vial A vial is being picked up from the tray Preparation AOC is operating befor
179. eee 171 13 5 3 Detector signal subtraction oooooccoccooocoo teen ee 173 Diagnosis Standard Diagnosis Heese A xf xx x hh ee Pe es 175 14 1 1 Sereen descrlptiom moco ease At eie rd vtr pre aere ee ed qus ete dre Ete 175 14 1 2 BETIS ae cre etr dante tfo bo sia Pt otto cata cau ee tete afa ret te tpe 175 14 1 3 Diagnosis Parameters Joe debet A s Re tb a Cbr 176 14 1 4 Diagnosis parameter list liliis hn 177 14 1 5 Starting the diagnosis 5 yeaa eee a PIE Re Eee 179 14 1 6 PREMURA ek esu cu ptm xd 179 14 1 7 Stopping exiting the diagnosis oocoococccccco ere 180 14 1 8 PE men ida EA A AAA Ete bes dt eere te te s 180 14 1 9 Diagnosis results ccoo terri dedos 6i ek a da 181 144 10 PEuen llists eR RESP Sate A A IM RETE a hee be es 181 Log Reading Menu sseee eee n n n n m hh 183 14 2 1 Screen description x xot tete taste Sah are nine a 30 8 183 14 2 2 Parameter list ATA eer a aah MON NOM atu o oC e aere x dee bed or ed 183 14 2 3 GC Operation logie Ae Met sae tate b Me ee om tores uo iad ate eder MAL ire 184 14 2 4 Analysis log 1 5 s xe toes ecobbetalo TX E b be a AA A Neu 185 14 2 5 Parameter log 5x Lii pibe eb awed ad A POCO 187 14 2 6 Error log aiii ca deu LE be AI LL eibi eii duse 188 14 2 7 Diagnostic log 5 itu tet SA ee qae Rp VV EUR us 189 Analysis Counter cocina te rane seed ae ae TUNER TERRI Rd 190 14 3 1 Screen description 0 000 cece eee ee 190 14 3 2 Parameter list
180. efer to Fig 3 6 1 or 3 6 2 If Manual Start was already set proceed to the next step 2 Turn off the power Wait until the column oven the injection port and the detector have cooled down to 50 C or less 3 Turn on the power Wait for approximately 1 minute 4 Press the FLOW key once and the toggle key twice in that order Then the Fig 3 6 2 opens 5 Press the PF2 key The message Zero Calibration Start appears at the bottom of the monitor Approximately 10 seconds later the message Zero calibration completed appears Calibration of the AFC is complete 6 Return the Start GC setting to its original status NOTE Refer to 5 Basic Key Operation File Load 4 e FILEOg Manual Start When next power on Start Flow Start Time min Ae start Temp Det __ Yes Detector On uto ignite On Clean Up Stand By GC 2010 3 AFC APC 3 6 AFC and APC Offset Calibration ex MOT E mm UEM 100 Column flow 4 65 Liner vel BEA 62 2 Split ratio MOE i o Total flow ENENS 50 0 split mode SPLIT Control mode FRESS Carrier gas bype He Offset Fig 3 6 2 Perform the offset calibration of the APC using the following procedure 1 2 8 4 5 Press SYSTEM key toggle key PF1 key and change Start GC to Manual Start refer to Fig 3 6 1 or 3 6 2 If Manual Start was a
181. electing a PF menu item displayed at the bottom of the screen Because the PF menu includes direct operations some PF menu items do not have secondary screens E PF menu item selection Select a desired PF menu item by pressing the PF keys PF 1 PF2 and PF3 underneath the screen which correspond to PF menu items LineConfg Toggle key i Fig 5 3 1 If the PF menu continues over two or more pages press the Toggle key to display the desired PF menu then press the PF key Example 1st page of PF menu Indicates page 1 4 Press the Toggle key to display the 2nd page Indicates page 2 GC 2010 5 Basic Key Operation 5 3 Basic Key Operations 5 3 2 Moving the cursor Use the four keys A V X and gt to move the cursor to an item to be set However for screens with listed items only the A and V keys may be available to move the cursor The lt and gt keys may perform a different function E Moving the cursor using the A V lt and p gt keys Example Main screen of the COL key Colum FILE Temp Monit 8 BENZ Temp program total mi 28 288 Rate 5 Tempi Time min Init Be 2A 3 gt lat 10 00 z29 2 00 nd END Move the cursor using the A V lt and gt keys Equilibration Time min 3 8 Del Line Ins Line Fan Off
182. en by entering another start time in the Start GC PF menu 7 3 3 screen This function is useful if the preset start time is too long START TEMP DET Selection Yes No Default Yes Select Yes to start temperature detector control after the start time is elapses Select No to continue carrier gas flow only without starting temperature detector control DETECTOR Selection On Off Default On Prepares the configured detector for analysis but does not ignite the FID or FPD The DETECTOR setting on the SYSTEM key main screen is set here AUTO IGNITE Selection On Off Default On Establishes FID FPD ignition conditions Select On for the FID FPD detector to stand by in the ignited status Select Off for it stand by without igniting The AUTO IGNIT setting on the SYSTEM key main screen is set here CLEAN UP Selection Off Analysis Para Clean Up Para Default Off When performing clean up select whether to use an analysis method or the program set in Clean Up PF menu The CLEAN UP setting on the SYSTEM key main screen is set here Example starting the system with carrier gas flow In this example carrier gas flows for a certain period of time before temperature control begins The length of time the carrier gas should flow depends on how long the carrier gas flow was shut off If the same column is used in the same analytical flow line as the day before set a START TIME of approx 10 minutes
183. en have dropped below 50 C For the details on removing the capillary column refer to 4 Installing the column Inspection maintenance cycle In the following situations inspect and or maintain the capillary column When using a new column or a column which has not been used for a long time When ghost peaks are detected When the baseline is unstable 18 7 2 Inspection maintenance E Troubleshooting Check whether the baseline is unstable or ghost peaks are present A contaminated column can cause an unstable baseline or ghost peaks If these problems occur the column should be conditioned E Preparing the gas chromatograph main body NOTE If the system is operating press the SYSTEM key and select Stop GC PF menu The temperature of the injection port the column oven and detector automatically decrease Press the MONIT key and ensure that the temperature of the injection port the detector and the column are below 50 C Press the FLOW key and select Off PF menu The inspection maintenance can then begin For the details on handling the capillary column refer to 4 Installing the column E Conditioning the capillary column Condition the capillary column using the following procedure 1 Setting the carrier gas To condition the column use the an aleysis flow rate However reduce the split ratio to conserve carrier gas 2 Setting the column oven temperature Set the
184. ence PF menu Description E section Starts a time schedule This item is displayed when no time schedule is running If mode is set to number the same schedule will be executed on Start following day and beyond when schedule finishes E If mode is set to day the schedule for the current day is executed and the schedule for each day will be executed on the following day and beyond Next Runs the selected schedule on the following day If mode is set to day the schedule for the next day is executed Stop Stops the current schedule This item is displayed when a time schedule is running 218 GC 2010 16 Special Functions 16 1 Time Scheduler 16 1 13 Copying and deleting a time schedule Select 4 COPY or 5 DELETE from the time scheduler menu screen to display the time schedule copy screen or the time schedule delete screen shown in Fig 16 1 8 or Fig 16 1 9 To copy specify the copy source schedule and the copy destination schedule then press Copy PF menu To delete specify a schedule number to be deleted then press Delete PF menu NOTE A currently running schedule cannot be copied or deleted schedule Ho Ach ve schedule Ho Copy sre Ho 8 Det 4b Ho 3 schedule has been copied Delete schedule Humber dH No 4 schedule has been cleared Return Fig 16 1 8 Schedule copy screen Fig 16 1 9 Schedule de
185. ened by injecting air PLUNGER SUCTION SPEED Selection Slow Middle Fast Default Fast Set the plunger speed during sample injection SPEED OF PLUNGER Selection Slow Middle Fast Default Fast Set the plunger speed during rinsing with sample or pumping SYRINGE HEIGHT 1 Range 0 20 mm Default 0 mm Set the syringe height when it moves down to a sample vial moves syringe up from default SYRINGE HEIGHT Range 0 2 mm 1 5 ml vial 0 10 mm 4 ml vial Default 0 mm Set the syringe height when it moves down to a sample vial moves syringe down from default SYRINGE HEIGHT INJ Range 0 22 mm Default 0 mm Set the syringe height when it moves down during sample injection moves syringe up from default MULTI INJ Range 1 99 Default 1 Set the number of times to inject each sample 202 GC 2010 15 Optional Devices 15 1 Auto Injector Parameters KINDS OF VIALS Selection 1 5 ml 4 ml Default 1 5 ml Specyfy the vial type RACK Selection Short Long Default Short Set the rack type KINDS OF THE SYRINGE Selection 10 1 50 pl 250 pl Default 10 pl Set the syringe type SUCTION VOLUME FOR WASHING Selection 80 60 Default 80 Set the aspiration volume during sample wash and pumping RACK POSITION Range 0 2 Default 1 Set the rack position while sampler is used 15 1 9 PF menu Reference PF menu Description z section Inj Mode For details refer to 3 3 3 Injection mode
186. ensation _On Zero ab Ready n Polarity in Ready _Open SPL 1 Primary Presse 5Aan aeakrFa WEI 2 Primary Fress 5an 3eaakra Fig 16 6 21 Setup screen of other configuration 16 Special Functions 16 6 GC Configuration GC 2010 3 gt 253 16 Special Functions 16 6 GC Configuration 16 6 11 2 Parameter list LANGUAGE Selection Alt English Default English Switch between Japanese Alt and English screen languages BACK LIGHT AUTO OFF Range 0 9999 sec Default O sec Set the period of time when the backlight LCD display automatically turns off PRESSURE UNIT Selection kPa bar psi Default kPa Set the pressure units for display Range kPa 1 Increase quantity kPa 1 0 1 bar 1 100 0 01 psi 1 6 895 0 1 NOTE In the case that the presssure unit of bar or psi are used pay attention to the following e The range of the primary pressure is not displayed in the value of bar psi Set up it with the value that consults the following table and transformed into kPa kPa bar psi 300 500 3 00 5 00 43 5 72 5 500 900 5 00 9 00 72 5 130 5 900 980 9 00 9 80 130 5 142 1 e The pressure axis on the screen after pressing MONIT key is displayed in the value of kPa regardless of the pressure unit sets e The setting value measured value of the primary pressure of the diagnosis result of the standard diagnosis is displ
187. erature increases to the temperature set Press Ignit PF menu to ignite the FID The baseline should indicate whether ignition was successful The message Ignition finished appears and the ignition is completed 154 GC 2010 13 Detector 13 2 Hydrogen flame ionization detector FID Bi Ignition troubleshooting When ignition has failed and the message Ignition failed appears check the following items Cause Solution Connect the column for FID to be ignited and Column is not connected ensure that carrier gas is flowing Hydrogen is not supplied Supply hydrogen Hydrogen flow rate is incorrect Set the hydrogen flow rate to a proper value Air is not supplied Supply air Air flow rate is incorrect Set the air flow rate to a proper value Unused FID FPD is set to On Set unused detectors to Off FID jet is clogged Clean the FID jet Replace the FID jet Igniter filament is broken Replace the igniter 13 2 2 5 Extinguishing the FID This section describes how to extinguish the FID when the Advanced Pressure Control APC is installed E Auto extinguisher From the SYSTEM key main screen press STOP GC PF menu The detector temperature gradually decreases supply of hydrogen and air is stopped and the flame is automatically extinguished When a time program is running or a stop time has been
188. fault Yes SEPTUM PURGE Selection Yes No Default Yes Indicate which injection port septum purge flow lines should included in the check The displayed items depend on the injection port type DET FLOW GAS MAKE UP Selection Yes No Default Yes HYDROGEN Selection Yes No Default Yes 242 GC 2010 NOTE 16 Special Functions 16 6 GC Configuration AIR Selection Yes No Default Yes Indicate which detector APC zones should be included in the check The displayed items depend on the detector type AUX APC APC1 APC18 PRESS FLOW Selection Yes No Default Yes This item is available only when optional APC units are installed DETECTOR CONTROLLER Selection Yes No Default Yes This item is available only when the FID is installed DRIFT Selection Yes No Default No This item compares the baseline drift to the drift limit for 10 minutes Once the GC becomes ready the GC re evaluates of the ready status 10 minutes later WAIT SIGNAL Selection Yes No Default Yes The wait signal applies to all detectors configured in analytical lines User specified names are used in this screen 16 6 6 3 PF menu PF menu Description Reference section Drift Set the baseline drift limit GC 2010 gt 243 244 16 Special Functions 16 6 GC Configuration 16 6 7 Parameter Configuration Signals are output from four gas chromatograph channels To assign detector channels see 13 Det
189. fault name WRPT Sample Wash 0 99 2 WMOD Solvent Wash 0 99 1 REPT Number of Injection 1 99 1 IVOL Sample Size 0 1 8 0 1 0 WPRS Pre solvent Wash 0 99 PUMP Pumping 0 99 WTPP Viscosity 0 0 99 9 0 2 WAIT Dwell Time 0 0 99 9 0 ISPD Inj Speed Plunger Slow 0 Fast 2 Fast 2 SSPD Inj Speed Syringe Slow 0 Fast 1 Fast 1 SAND Inj Mode 0 4 0 SOLV Solvent selection in 3 All 0 SINT Priority Sample No 1 0 SSNO Soll No Only this sample is 4 0 SNO2 Injected sample No for sub AOC 1 0 AAIR Air Aspiration No O Yes 1 No 0 USPD Plunger Aspiration Speed Slow 0 Middle 1 Fast 2 Fast 2 DSPD Speed of Plunger Slow 0 Middle 1 Fast 2 Fast 2 HIGH Syringe Height 1 0 20 0 LOWS Syringe Height 2 ar 0 INJH Syringe Height Inj 0 22 0 STRI Multi Inj 1 99 1 FSAM ie No Samples after that are not 4 0 WKEY A un ee before injection in 0 4 0 UVOL Aspiration volume during pumping 8 ul O 6 pl 1 8 ul 0 SLMD Using 3 Solvent Vials No O Yes 1 No 0 VIAL Vial size 1 5 ml 0 4ml 1 1 5 ml 0 CKTR With without tray check With 0 Without 1 Without O TANL Analysis time 0 655 0 TSTR Analysis start time 0 0 99 9 0 0 LSYR Syringe Volume pl en 10ul O GC 2010 273 274 17 Printing 17 2 AOC commands command Item Range Default name SAMU Use of the sampler Not use 0 Use 1 Not use 0 SUBU Use of the sub AOC Not use 0 Use 1 Not use 0 BARC Bar Code Reader Not
190. ff contact of one contact in one circuit option PRG option PRG 11 Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit option PRG option PRG 12 Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit option PRG option PRG 13 Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit option PRG option PRG 14 Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit option PRG option PRG 45 Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit option PRG option PRG 46 Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit option PRG option PRG 51 Performs zero adjustment of DET 1 Frees zero adjustment of DET 1 52 Performs zero adjustment of DET 2 Frees zero adjustment of DET 2 53 Performs zero adjustment of DET 3 Frees zero adjustment of DET 3 54 Performs zero adjustment of DET 4 Frees zero adjustment of DET 4 Turns on CAR1 gas saver Turns off CAR1 gas saver 61 Sets split ratio to value of CAR1 gas saver split Returns split ratio to value of analysis ratio 1 parameter GC 2010 277 278 17 Printing 17 4 Event No No Meaning
191. for Septum _No Counter for Insert o Ho CRG Use Time Yes Temp Sensor Dias Yes LCI Use Tine Yes Fan Use Time Yes DC Voltage Yes Room Tempetature Yes Atmospheric Press Yes Primary Fress Yes CPU Registor YES Real Time Clock Registor Yes Fig 14 1 2 Diagnosis setup screen 176 GC 2010 14 Diagnosis 14 1 Standard Diagnosis gt 14 1 4 Diagnosis parameter list For each item specify whether it is to be checked or tested Test items are marked Yes Items which are ignored are marked No Each item is marked either Yes or No For example if the septum counter is marked Yes both the INJ1 and INJ2 will be chacked AN CAUTION At the time of Diagnosis set the Split mode to SPLIT When WBI column is used set the split mode to DIRECT COUNTER FOR SEPTUM COUNTER FOR INSERT Verifies whether the preset number of injections has been exceeded The ANALYSIS COUNTER limit is displayed CRG USE TIME Verifies whether the valve On time exceeds the preset operating time The COOLANT CONSUMPTION limit is displayed TEMP SENSOR USE TIME The operating time for the temperature sensor in use at 300 C or above is displayed Refer to the guidelines for operating time TEMP SENSOR DIAG Verifies whether spiking noise has been generated to detect deterioration of the platinum sensor LCD USE TIME Verifies whether the accumulated backlight ON time exceeds the preset
192. g 3 4 3 At that time the column inlet pressure varies depending on the column type the purge flow rate and the column oven temperature When the Control mode is set to PRESS the AFC controls the TFC Total Flow Controller to keep the column inlet pressure constant The control method is equivalent to the sampling time in SPLITLESS mode The control diagram is shown in Fig 3 4 2 When the Control mode is set to VELOCITY the column inlet pressure is set to a value which keeps the linear velocity constant despite changes in the column oven temperature Even if the column oven temperature changes as in programmed temperature analysis the linear velocity is always kept constant Generally when the column oven temperature increases the viscosity of the carrier gas also increases and does not flow as easily Control mode FLOW 7ml min TO rea Total Flow Controller 7ml min Control mode PRESS or VEROCITY SPC Pressure sensor Septum Purge Controller Detector Column oven Fig 3 4 3 Direct Control GC 2010 3 gt 41 3 AFC APC 3 4 AFC and APC control 3 4 5 Control by APC The APC performs its control as illustrated in the figure below m Pressure sensor GAS IN NINAN gt To detector Resistance Valve Fig 3 4 4 As shown in Fig 3 4 4 the APC controls the pressure The flow rate is calculated based on resistance and pressure For example for a flow rate of 400 ml min of air
193. gas The TCD sensitivity is proportional to the difference in thermal conductivity between the sample and the carrier gas Because the thermal conductivity of the sample is lower than that of the carrier gas the TCD sensitivity increases as the thermal conductivity of the carrier gas increases For high sensitivity analysis use helium with a purity of 99 9995 or more Thermal conductivity k x10 4Wm 1K 1 at room temperature 300 K Gas Thermal Gas Thermal conductivity conductivity He 1499 Inorganic CO2 166 2 Simple H2 1815 compounds H20 181 compounds N2 259 8 Organic acetone 115 Ar 177 2 compounds hexane 128 13 3 3 1 Screen description Select Det Gas PF menu from the DET key main screen to display the flow screen shown in Fig 13 3 4 When the Start Flow status is selected on the SYSTEM key screen the makeup gas flow starts When the stop time elapses and the detector temperature drops to the value set by Stop Seq PF menu on the Det Gas PF menu the makeup gas flow stops E MakeUp 29 3 1 He PresskPa Flow the Gag Kind Refer to OPTIMAL FLOW in 13 3 3 2 Parameter list and check whether the flow rate of each detector gas is set correctly If not set it to the correct value Fig 13 3 4 Setting the detector gas flows GC 2010 gt 165 166 13 Detector 13 3 Thermal conductivity detector TCD 13 3
194. ge appear when the time or the count exceed the set value but does not indicate any error Refer to 14 Diagnosis and clear the message In case of xxx sensor use time warning Turn off the power and contact your Shimadzu representative Code Message CS Note 9010 System is not ready No This message appears when the system was started before it was ready Normally do not start the system until it is ready If this message appears when all the parameters are ready check the ready setting for unused components and check the equilibration time Code Message CS Note 9011 Ignition finished retried No Ignition sequence was re attempted because the ignition failed initially This does not affect the analysis If this massage appears frequently check DETECTOR IGNITE and DETECTOR IGNITION by the standard diagnosis procedure Also check for gas leaks and verify the gas flow rates If set values are correct contact your Shimadzu representative GC 2010 201 SYSTEM 29 20 Appendix Function List SET The parameter related to start and stop of the GC can be set And on the sub screen the file management the clean up and the maintenance of injection port can be set MONIT COL The parameters which are frequently set can be set And on the screen of LineConfg the combination of injection ports detectors etc can be changed The status of the injection port th
195. gher temperatures the com pounds with a low boiling point will co elute too rapidly There is an optimal temperature for separating various compounds Using an oven tempera ture that increases gradually controls the elution and improves the separation of all the compounds 11 2 3 Creating a temperature program E Screen terminology 1 ramp temperature program Column oven temperature Initial setting TEMP T1 Initial setting hold time TIME a T2 T1 Program rate RATE b Final temperature TMP T2 Final temperature hold time TIM C I lt gt Equilibration time ETIM d Program Program Time starts finishes GC 2010 109 11 Creating an Oven Temperature Program Y 11 2 Temperature Programs E Program creation 1 ramp temperature program 220 C 2min 10 C min 60 C 2min l 1 l l l I E a 9 Initial 1st stage temperature VS FILEO Temp Monit t BEN Temp program total mim 0 04 Ratetzz Temptt Time min Int 6a 9 2 0 Lat 10 00 228 0 E A end END Equilibration Time min 5 8 Del Line Ins Line Fan Off Fig 11 2 1 Temperature program Example 1 2 ramp temperature program 160 C 5min 10 C min 120 C 2min 5 C min o oe o Q a N 3 5 Initial 1st stage 2nd stage temperature Col unn Q FILEO Temp Monit t BEEN Temp program total min 5 88 Rate Temp c Time m
196. gned to the event No Refer to 17 4 Event No 16 5 3 PF menu Reference PF menu Description z section Runs the specified operation Execute Input event No to be run and press Execute PF menu GC 2010 237 Y 16 Special Functions 1 6 6 GC Configuration 238 16 6 1 Screen description Select 6 GC CONFIGURATION from the FUNC key screen to display the GC configuration screen shown in Fig 16 6 1 Gc Configuration Date Time Setting Max Temperature ransmission Parameter El Ready Check f Signal Setting S Port Name Customization Link Device Code ES Temperature Offset 8 Other Configurations select function Fig 16 6 1 GC Configuration setup screen 16 6 2 Parameter list DATE TIME SETTING Set the date and the time MAX TEMPERATURE Set the maximum temperature limit for each headed zone TRANSMISSION PARAMETER Set the parameters related to transmission READY CHECK Indicate the conditions which should be satisfied in order for the system to be ready and the STATUS light to illuminate SIGNAL SETTING Set the signals which can be output from the gas chromatograph PORT NAME CUSTOMIZATION Customize the names of various GC items LINK DEVICE CODE Set the link device code the GC is linked to a Chromatopac GC 2010 16 Special Functions 16 6 GC Configuration 2 TEMPERATURE OFFSET Set the temperature offset for each heated zone OTHER CONFIGURATIO
197. gth and is automatically set to 49 6 kPa In the same way the column flow rate is automatically set to 1 67 ml min and the total flow rate is set to 69 8 ml min 7 1 67 ml min x 40 3 ml min 7 purge flow rate When the Control mode is set to PRESS the column inlet pressure is controlled to remain at 49 6 kPa regardless of the column oven temperature When the Control mode is set to VELOCITY the column inlet pressure is set to a value which keeps the linear velocity constant despite changes in the column oven temperature Even if the column oven temperature changes as in programmed temperature analysis the linear velocity is always kept constant Generally when the column oven temperature increases the viscosity of the carrier gas also increases and does not flow as easily Regardless of the Control mode the ESC controls the column inlet pressure and the TFC controls the total flow rate as shown in Fig 3 4 1 1 When WBI Injection is used do not select Split mode or Splitless mode GC 2010 TFC 71 6ml min 177777 Total Flow Controller CARRIER IN _ 71 6ml min GC rear 49 6kPa Pressure sensor Pressure sensor 3ml min a gt JET oe PURGE VENT 66 9ml min Septum Purge Controller Injection Column oven 66 9ml min oo SPLIT VENT ESC Electronic Split Controller Valve b Sensor a Valve b is controlled so that the value of sensor a remains constant Column inner diameter 0 30 m
198. h detector No DET 1 to DET 4 CONT TYPE For display only The type of each installed detector control unit is automatically recognized and displayed DET APC No For display only When the slot No is selected for each installed detector gas flow controller the name DET APC 1 to DET APC 4 is automatically assigned to each flow controller UNIT TYPE When an APC is installed the APC type is displayed for the Slot No selected APC 1ch indicates an APC for ECD TCD APC 2ch indicates an APC for FPD APC 3ch indicates an APC for FID FTD When manual flow controllers are selected DET GAS is automatically displayed SLOT NO Selection NON SLOT1 SLOT2 SLOT3 SLOT4 SLOT5 SLOT6 SLOT7 SLOTS Default NON When a manual flow controller is installed specify the installation location Slot No SLOT1 SLOTS SLOT5 and SLOT7 are available When a APC is installed select an available Slot No Slot No which have already been set cannot be selected HEATER PORT Specify the detector heated zone where the flows controller tubing is connected This assosiates the flow controller to a detector Changes are not in effect until the GC has been turned off and on GC 2010 gt 259 16 Special Functions 16 7 Service and Maintenance 16 7 5 INITIALIZATION 16 7 5 1 Screen description Select 7 SERVICE MAINTENANCE from the FUNC key screen and then select 3 INITIALIZE to display the Initialization screen
199. he Flow Rate 101 Monitoring the Temperature 100 N N A 182 N I 182 N S 182 N T 182 O Offset 46 129 157 166 On column injection system 113 OPTIMAL FLOW 157 166 OPTION key 56 197 O ring for glass insert 281 283 Oven Temperature 107 OVER TEMP PROTECTION 178 Index Packed column injection system 113 Parameter locking 265 Parameter log 187 PARITY 241 Parts 5 password 266 Peak Genarator 196 PF key 55 56 60 PF menu 60 power cable 17 Power consumption 261 Power source 17 power supply 4 Pre Run Program 234 Pressure program 132 PRESSURE UNIT 254 Primary press 177 254 Printing 269 Programmed analysis 109 Programmed temperature vaporizer injection system 113 PROTOCOL 241 PURGE FLOW RATE 86 R RAM 178 Ready Check 242 REAL TIME CLOCK REGISTOR 177 REMAIN TIME 99 Reset IC 178 179 Restart GC 74 Retention time Rt 99 ROM 178 ROOM TEMPERATURE 177 RS 232C 28 31 SAMPLING TIME 86 128 Schedule number 212 Screen 57 Septum 122 281 283 284 Septum purge flow rate 86 138 SET key 55 56 85 Setting a numeric value 62 Setting the column 130 Setting the Output Signals 170 Setup value 57 SIGNAL ATTENUATION 152 163 SIGNAL OUTPUT PORT 163 SIGNAL POLARITY 162 P U SIGNAL RANGE 152 163 Silica wool 114 115 281 291 SLEEP TIME 74 SPC 37 Split injection system 113 124 Split mode 38 40 87 128 Split ratio 36 86 128 Split ratio program 136 Splitless injection system 113 124 Splitter fix 140 Standar
200. he capillary adapter If this occurs unclog the adapter with com pressed air or a thin wire 4 4 2 Positioning the graphite ferrule Position the ferrules as shown below Fig 4 4 7 If the adjusters were used to fasten the ferrules to the column as described in the previous section the ferrules should already be in the proper location In the split injection method using the wide bore column fix the graphite ferrule at a place 15mm from the column end The ferrule adjuster included in the accessories is not available for this case FID Detector column insertion length TCD Detector column insertion length Split Splitless WBI Injection port column insertion length T X mm When the splitless analysis is 50mm performed using the wide bore column 34mm 15mm e LEN Graphite ferrule Psi Capillary column Fig 4 4 7 Attaching position of graphite ferrule GC 2010 53 4 29 4 Installing the column Installing and removing the capillary column N WARNING Do not install or remove the capillary column until the temperature of the column oven injection port and detector have dropped below 50 C Danger of burns 4 5 1 Installing the capillary column 1 Attach the capillary column to the column hanger 2 Connect the capillary column to the injection port and the detector Note the following items during column installation a Do not force the column to
201. he capillary column 00000 cece eee eee 5 Basic Key Operation 5 1 Keypad Description and Operation 5 1 1 Keypad operation sis auii aa e e tr A e ee Saas ot 5 12 Sreema aa seem pb Ra err eae dad 5 1 3 Status indicators liliis ee 5 2 Adjusting The Display essen n n I 5 3 Basic Key Operations 00 0 cece eee eee eee eee 5 3 1 Screen display ia tag ae e c bat 5 3 2 Moving the cursor ia ai a ren 5 3 3 Entering numeric values 000 00 cee eee eee eee 5 3 4 Changing a selection 0 0 cece tee 5 3 5 Changing item names occccccco seh 5 4 Getting Help ee in read 5 4 1 Screen Helpa Meelis eh eet ld an bata 5 4 2 PR Mem acicate ER ORDRE IKE Tena iad Table dias 6 Analysis Flow Chart 6 1 Analysis Flow Chart 0000 c ee eee eee eee nn nnn 6 1 1 Preparation tiie ccs AAT EE vas eet ee 6 1 2 Setting Parameters o oocccccccccoo sese 6 1 3 Analysis Metadata ai 7 Starting and Stopping the GC SYSTEM 7 1 SYSTEM Key Main Screen LLelese 7 1 1 Screen Description 32 rk Rer ete mew te RE ES 7 1 2 Parameter coto odo der teed fet iets Eu bb Ae E ed 7 1 3 PE MON umet AE RARN ire eth eph or QN TA e rer roin i GC 2010 7 2 7 3 7 4 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 10 10 1 3 gt Contents Specifying Clean Up Parameters 0 00 cece eee eee n nnn 76 7 2 1 Screen Description i scien A cee 76
202. he change To cancel any changes If you have changed the schedule but would like to return to the former schedule press Cancel PF menu before pressing Finish PF menu The schedule returns to its former status GC 2010 16 Special Functions 16 1 Time Scheduler gt 16 1 10 Time schedule example Example 7 00 System starts 19 00 System stops First program Screen display 1 Time 7 00 Edit program Time hh mn 2 v 2 Start stop Edit program Program start u COB Other v 3 Start GC Start Stop dbotart GC Second program 4 Time 19 00 Edit program Time hh mm 19 5 Start stop Edit program Program start u Start Stop Other v 6 Stop GC Start Stop v T Setting i leted Selig 12 Complele Time Function Value i 67 00 Start GC 2 lg 88 Stop GC GC 2010 217 16 Special Functions 16 1 Time Scheduler 16 1 11 Starting stopping a time schedule Select 3 START STOP from the time scheduler menu when no time schedule is executing to display the screen shown in Fig 16 1 6 Select 3 START STOP while a time schedule is executing to display the screen shown in Fig 16 1 7 schedule Ho schedule Ho Time schedule starts with Time schedule stops with PFS PFE It will start tomorrow with PFS Fig 16 1 6 Schedule start screen Fig 16 1 7 Schedule stop screen 16 1 12 PF menu Refer
203. he column do not allow the maximum oven temperature to exceed the maximum column temperature INJ1 DET1 DET2 Range 10 0 470 0 C Default 470 0 C INJ2 Range 0 0 470 0 C Default 470 0 C AUX3 AUX4 AUX5 Range 10 0 470 0 C Default 470 0 C AUX3 AUX4 and AUX5 are available optionally If the are installed the AUX temperature control unit P N 221 48458 91 is required 16 6 4 3 PF menu list Reference PF menu Description chapter Protect Protection against contamination Selection Yes No Default Yes When Yes is selected the Detector temperature setting value must be bigger than the Oven temperature setting value 240 GC 2010 16 6 5 Setting transmission parameters 16 6 5 1 Screen description Select 6 GC CONFIGURATION from the FUNC key screen and then select 3 TRANSMISSION PARAMETER to display the Transmission Parameter screen shown in Fig 16 6 4 ranemission Parameter Protocol Nonel Baud Ratelbpe 260 Stop Bit 1bit Parity NONE Fig 16 6 4 Transmission parameter setup screen 16 6 5 2 Parameter list PROTOCOL Selection None LEVEL1 LEVEL2 LEVEL3 Default LEVEL2 BAUD RATE Selection 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 bps Default 9600 bps Set the communication speed STOP BIT Selection 1 bit 2 bit Default 1 bit PARITY Selection NONE EVEN ODD Default NONE 16 Special Functions 16 6 GC Configuration gt
204. he flow rate or the split ratio You have input is outside the set range Change the conditions so that the pressure is within the set range and enter the new value Overflow of calculated flow rate value Code Message cs Note 5009 5011 CARx calc flow out of range No x 1 3 The carrier gas total flow rate calculated from the split ratio or the pressure you have input is outside the set range Change the conditions and enter a new value Overflow of calculated APC pressure value Code Message CS Note 5012 5015 n 1 4 5018 5021 MUPn calc prss out of range No make undas 5045 5048 Pg 5013 5016 n 1 4 5019 5022 HGNn calc prss out of range No Hydrogen 5014 5017 n 1 4 5020 5023 AIRn calc prss out of range No Air 5024 5041 y 1 18 5049 5066 APCy calc prss out of range No AUX APC 5042 5044 x 1 3 5067 5069 PURx calc prss out of range No septum purge The pressure calculated from the flow rate you have input is outside the set range Change the conditions and enter a new value Overflow of calculated flow rate value in programs Code Message CS Note 5073 5074 5077 5078 CAR m calc flow out of range No m 1 2 5075 5076 CAR m calc ratio out of range No m 1 2 The carrier gas total flow rate calculated from the split ratio program you have input is out side the set range GC 2010 313 19 Troubleshooting 19 2 Error Messages 19 2 3 Optiona
205. he gas saver function reduces the split ratio during a split of splitless analysis This reduces the amount of carrier gas flowing through the split flow line conserving carrier gas Even though this can change the split ratio the column inlet pressure is kept at a constant value In other words changing the split ratio does not affect the carrier gas flow rate through in the column 12 5 4 1 Screen description Select Gas Saver PF menu from the FLOW key to display the Gas Saver screen shown in Fig 12 5 6 Gag saver 14b Offi Split ratio 5 Time min 1 06 Fig 12 5 6 Gas saver setup screen 12 5 4 2 Parameter list GAS SAVER Selection On Off Default Off Select On to use the gas saver function Select Off to disable the gas saver function GAS SAVER SPLIT RATIO Range 0 0 9999 9 Default 5 0 Set the split ratio which will reduce the split flow to conserve carrier gas Setting 0 closes the split flow line GAS SAVER START TIME Range 0 00 9999 99 min Default 1 00 min Specify the period of time after analysis starts until the split ratio switches to gas saver mode This period of time should be longer than the time required for the sample to move from the injection port to the column Setting the gas saves start time too early can provide unpredictable quantitation results GC 2010 131 12 Injection Port 12 5 Split Splitless Injection System 12 5 5 Pressure program You can set a program t
206. he main screen and then press DET SIG to display the screen shown in Fig 16 6 7 Select the type of signal to output For a description of the settings refer to 13 5 Setting the Output Signals in 13 Detector 16 Special Functions 16 6 GC Configuration For detector signal subtraction also specify the channels 1 4 for the subtraction bisgnal Setting Channel 1 Temp Flow output Signal Tee For background signal com pensation also specify the background signal No 1 or 2 The currently set channel No is displayed gt Background sig comp Det sig subtraction Back Ground Number 4MBuffifj When saving the background signal specify which signal 1 or 2 should be saved Fig 16 6 7 Detector signal setup screen 16 6 7 4 Selecting the temperature control signal Select the signal type from the main screen and then press TEMP to display the screen shown in Fig 16 6 8 Select the temperature control signal to be output The currently set channel Signal Setting Channel Det Sig Flow MMMM Signal Select Temp Column Temp E DELI Temp WEIZ Temp FIDi Temp TCDZ Temp CAUKS Temp CAUKA Temp CAUAS Temp No is displayed Fig 16 6 8 Temperature control signal setup screen GC 2010 gt 245 16 Special Functions 16 6 GC Configuration 16 6 7 5
207. hen the GC is connected to a C R8A the value set here does not affect the signal because they are connected by a digital RS 232C cable Wide Select wide when connecting the GC to the C R7A CR 7A plus The signal multiplied by 1 2 is output from the GC then the signal received by the Chromatopac is multiplied by 2 When connecting the GC to a C R7A CR 7A plus for the first time or replacing the Chromatopac set the detector signal output to Off and perform calibration For the calibration procedure refer to 2 7 Connecting external device cables Linear Select linear when connecting the GC to any Chromatopac other than the C R7A CR 7A plus GC 2010 163 When connecting the GC to a C R7A CR 7A plus and setting the ANALOG SIGNAL TYPE to Linear the optional signal cable linear P N 221 47251 92 is required 13 3 2 3 PF menu PF menu Description Rererence section Det Gas Sets the makeup gas flow rate supplied from the reference cell to the 13 3 3 sample cell if the Advanced Pressure Control APC is installed Next Det Toggles to the setup screeen of another detector The DET key can also be used to switch screens 164 66200 eee 13 3 3 Setting the detector gas flows 13 Detector 13 3 Thermal conductivity detector TCD The gas tubing is routed so that the reference gas effluent is used as the makeup gas of the TCD Helium and nitrogen are available as the makeup
208. higher oven temperatures than those used for the analysis After Set bake out time return the temperatures to their normal analytical parameter GC 2010 71 6 Analysis Flow Chart 6 1 Analysis Flow Chart E Shutting down the GC To shut down the system select Stop GC PF menu on the SYSTEM key screen Then the system stops temperature control after the period of time set as the stop time flows the carrier gas for the period of time set as the flow off time then stops When shutting down the GC the temperature of each part should be decreased at first then the carrier gas should be stopped so that the column can be protected It is convenient to use the stop time and the flow off time Do not turn off the power before select Stop GC PF menu When shutting down the GC the heated zones are cooled and then the carrier gas flow is turned off To accomplish these in the correct sequence automatically use a stop time this stops temperature control at the set time and flow off time turns off carrier gas flow at the set time Do not turn off the GC without first selecting Stop GC PF menu E Obtaining reproducible analysis results Follow these suggestions to obtain reproducible results Use an AOC 20i auto injector If more than one heated zone is dedicated as an injection port but only one injection port is in use do not increase the temperatures of the unused zones If dual injections are normally perfomed but
209. hoe bk bh a e bunt Abe nib ba added e gest 1 1 1 3 High speed analysis enabled oooccccccccoo e 1 Specifications iii ELI Rer UB DR Rr E E e EORR eas ya age RR nce n cn 2 1 2 1 GColurmn oVel 0 os sero S eme Gode e SA c CUR Re Qc ta e s era e o as 2 1 2 2 Temperature program zzi El eb eet ae ER UU Abba Be be Ee e due 2 1 2 3 Injection port simae ae oh eee pe ph Pb Vm UO edet prs 2 1 2 4 Detector cu ete reed ex duobns an be eee reor deseo d tg ANE Aaa ga quede 2 1 2 5 Auxiliary heated Zone icon a a V aaa ed ec e ere PA Se EUR Ee e es 3 1 2 6 Carrier gas flow control unit ia hada tx Re LIE Rl A Ead 3 1 2 7 Detector gas flow controller ooococcoccococooo he 3 1 2 8 Display tarro tbe a to a ea lr S CR S Rd ae Rie tu Rte cent Nr ax Mbt Mog UR Ilem ari 3 1 2 9 Dimensions weight and power supply 0000 cece ne 4 Installation Shipment Verification oo ooooocccnronone nn 5 Component description lora nrw aed ux E EA Eh 8 Installation site 1 ee a a A MUR Re 14 2 3 1 Ambient temperature and humidity liliis 14 2 3 2 Installation location et coord e UE TRO Aa Rr 14 2 3 3 Gorrosiv gas and dust ia ace ee oA ues Rae the cs ad ec e exc ata 14 2 3 4 Electro magnetic fields and power supply noise 000 cece eee eee ee 14 2 3 5 Other precautions nannan anana teen ren 14 2 3 6 Rear ClearanCe 5 2e enge EA A b gn Fc ee S Tee TP rn 15 2 3 7 Left cl arance REP EE E Satara vel oa
210. i zero d Edit program Relay Detector A Flow controller Cancel Fig 16 3 2 Time program edit screen PF menu Description esie Finish Validates the time program p Prev Page Returns to previous setup screen Next Page Moves to next item RI Cancel Cancels the time program being created GC 2010 gt 229 16 Special Functions 16 3 Time Program 16 3 5 Time Program parameters Parameter Description Relay Sets range or attenuation for the detector configured in the Range analytical line A Changes the polarity between and for TCD configured in Polarity j the analytical line Current Sets current for the detector configured in the analytical line 2 Detector Zero Adj Turns on off zero adjustment for the detector configured in the analytical line Flame Ignites Extinguishes the flame Turns on off voltage feedback to make current constant for FTD FTD F eee configured in the analytical line Turns on off control of detector configured in the analytical line Detector controller during analysis program Splitter Ctrl Opens closes splitter Flow Flow controller On Off Turn carrier gas septum purge detector gas and APC on off controller High press inj mode Turns high pressure injection mode on off Gas saver Turns gas saver function on off DET1 DE
211. ia ce senate 92 Changing Items Displayed with Customiz eere 95 8 4 1 Screenidescription erica basta sd abe et edd ds e td ed ib as 95 Monitoring the GC MONIT key Main Screen leeeeeeeeseserll e 97 9 1 1 Screen description uou cese Ee athe a enndem MERE EN 97 9 1 2 Parameter list 2 52 ehe Rex rera o n apre ce ek ka E E ane 99 9 1 3 PR MENU ise eet ve des ERA YO e eL LE RR red one bt Pda ds a RR extet 99 Monitoring the Temperature with Temp Mon lleeesese 100 9 2 1 Screen description 3 cba ote Dex ue erbe e EE RE UBI 100 9 2 2 PESmenuc oS 4o ars ate dnd nds e ae uod telethon esto MM EE 100 Monitoring the Flow Rate with Flow Mon esses 101 9 3 1 Screen description rr o See terio e pL dd AERE qd 101 9 3 2 PE Menu sea eu aote e o Cl DA pea A e d e AR RUE Pr 101 Zero Point Adjustment 0 cece eee nn nnn 102 9 4 1 Screen description sa nessie na un rere t Rea e ede tu e oe e Er ee 102 Starting and Stopping Analysis Making an Injecting and Starting an Analysis eee eee 103 10 1 1 Verifying the gas chromatograph status ooococccoccooco ee 103 10 1 2 Making manual injection oooooccoccorocona Rm hn 103 GC 2010 10 2 11 11 1 11 2 12 12 1 12 2 12 3 12 4 12 5 12 6 12 7 13 13 1 13 2 13 3 13 4 29 Contents 10 1 3 Starting the arnalysis a ia a B e A ate da 104 Terminating the An
212. ica wool or column is dirty Clean or replace glass insert Condition column Cell is dirty Condition cell Make several solvent injections Temperature in room where system is installed deviates from the commended range and or considerably fluctuating Keep the room temperature within the commended range and reduce fluctuation of the room temperature by making sure that system is not directly exposed to air conditioner wind etc Cell conditioning procedure Remove the column and seal the detector by installing a new graphite ferrule with its wire in the column nut Q Set the current value to 0 mA Begin makeup gas flow at the flow rate used in analysis Set the detector temperature 30 C higher than the analysis temperature However the detector temperature cannot the maximum operating exceed 400 C temperature Detector Thermal insulation cup New graphite ferrule with a wire Column nut The conditioning time varies depending on the degree of contamination but is approximately 1 to 12 hours The baseline may fluctuate because the temperature of a heated zone or the flow rate is not stable Check the monitor display If this problem occurs contact your Shimadzu representative 3 Baseline noise is high Possible Cause Solution Carrier gas or makeup gas is contaminated Sufficiently purge air inside flow lines Replace tubing Use h
213. ickness 0 25mm 0 25um 100kPa 210kPa 0 32mm 0 25um 60kPa 120kPa 0 53mm 1 5um 20kPa 40kPa Example 2 Column oven temperature 200 C carrier gas helium Length 30m 60m I D of column Film thickness 0 25mm 0 25um 130kPa 275kPa 0 32mm 0 25um 80kPa 160kPa 0 53mm 1 5um 30kPa 60kPa NOTE Fig 12 7 2 shows the relationship between the column flow rate and the column inlet pressure Column flow rate ml mn m 0 fF Oi O 4 O CO 1 D 0 53mm Length 30m Carrier gas helium 20 C Column flow rate is in inversely proportional to the column length I D 0 32mm Length 30m Linear velocity X 30cm s N 1 D 0 25mm Length 30m huc aiis a aaa 50 100 Column inlet pressure kPa x 103 Column outlet pressure atmospheric pressure kPa 0 _ 60xd4 P Po 2 Po 256pL Po Fc Column flow rate ml min d Column I D mm L Column length m P Column inlet pressure kPa Po H Viscosity coefficient 19 4uPaes helium 20 C Fig 12 7 2 GC 2010 147 4890 66200 eee 1 Introduction E Detectors This manual describes the operating of an FID and TCD Consult the Operation Manual for infor mation on other types of detectors Common GC detectors are listed below Hydrogen flame ionization detector FID Thermal conductivity detector TCD Electron capture detector ECD option Flame thermionic detector FTD option Flame pho
214. ier gas is supplied to the specified injection port If APC is present detector gases are supplied to the detector s specified One injection port and up to two detecotrs can be included in an analytical flow line Temperatures are not controlled and gases are not supplied to conponents which are not part of the analytical flow line The line configuration screen displays all the components installed Move the cursor to the desired component using the A and V keys Use the lt and gt to specify the ana lytical flow line 1 4 to which the component belongs Press Enter to validate the selection If more than one injection port is specified for an analytical flow line the most recent selec tion applies Line Configuration Mi Injector Mim BRA Pli B WBI2 H SPL3 LA Detector DLL E FIDi H TCD EH FPD4 5 ECD5 a UU ES a0c1 H AOCZ AS HSS Fig 8 3 1 Line configuration setup screen GC 2010 8 Setting the Analytical Parameters and File Management 8 3 Specifying the Analytical Flow Line Components Line Config E Line configuration examples Suppose that a SPL split splitless injection port a WBI direct injection port a FID hydrogen flame ionization detector and a TCD thermal conductivity detector are installed 1 When using only the SPL and the FID Select the SPL and the FID for line 1 In this case only the temperature of the SPL and th
215. ifies whether the contents of the A D converter on the flow controller PCB can be read correctly GAS CONTROL Checks that the pressure flow rate is normally controlled OVER TEMP PROTECTION Ensure that the overheat protection circuit is normal CPU PERIPHERAL RESET IC Verifies that the reset circuit works normally WATCH DOG TIMER Ensures that the IC which checks for software problems is functioning normally ROM Checks that the ROM is intact RAM Verifies whether the RAM can be correctly written and read GC 2010 14 Diagnosis 14 1 Standard Diagnosis 14 1 5 Starting the diagnosis Press Start Diag PF menu from the standard diagnosis main screen shown in Fig 14 1 1 to start diagnosis and to display the screen shown in Fig 14 1 3 Standard Diagnosis Diagnosing Reset IC Progress Ki Reset IC will be checked Fress PFZ key The syetem is reget and the diagnosis conbinues stop Diag Fig 14 1 3 Starting the Diagnosis 14 1 6 PF menu PF menu Description Relvienes section i Stops the diagnosis Stop Diag If the program is stopped items not yet executed are canceled Ga Before stariting the IC diagnosis the message Reset IC will be checked Reset Press PF2 key appears Press Reset PF menu to check whether reset IC is functioning normally GC 2010 gt 179 14 Diagnosis 14 1 Standard Diagnosis 14 1 7 Stopping exiting the diagnosis Press St
216. ig 12 5 1 Bi Splitless injection system The splitless injection system is used to analyze samples of low concentration In a splitless injection system the split vent is closed and the initial temperature of the column oven is low Then after injection and once the vaporized sample has moved to the column the split vent is open and the column temperature increased so that the condensed sample inside the column is vaporized again and separated Refer to 3 4 AFC and APC control PURGE TFC CARRIER PURGE c PURGE VENT TFC CARRIER PURGE VENT SPLIT m close SPLIT VENT SPLIT ESC eoo SPLIT VENT Capillary column Capillary column a During sampling time b After sampling time Fig 12 5 2 124 GC 2010 12 Injection Port 12 5 Split Splitless Injection System gt 12 5 1 Setting the temperature with INJ key 12 5 1 1 Screen description Press the INJ key to display the main screen shown in Fig 12 5 3 and to set the temperature of the injection port Injection Fort CARI US FILES ACTUAL SETTING Temp tC 1018 Next Inj Fig 12 5 3 INJ key main screen GC 2010 125 126 12 Injection Port 12 5 Split Splitless Injection System 12 5 1 2 Parameter list TEMP Range 0 0 450 0 C Default 25 0 C Set the temperature of the injection port Keep the injection port temperature as low as is practical to increase
217. igher purity gas Gas leaks Check for leaks in connection area injection port and column Current value is too high Reduce the current Makeup gas flow rate too low Increase flow rate Excessively high current can damage the filament and cause significant noise Contact your Shimadzu representative for ceel replacement GC 2010 gt 307 308 19 Troubleshooting 19 1 Troubleshooting 19 1 4 Chromatogram and data 19 1 4 1 No peaks or extremely small peaks Peaks may not be able to be detected because of high noise Refer to 19 1 3 1 3 and 19 1 3 2 3 baseline noise is high FID detector Possible Cause Solution Carrier gas is not flowing Start carrier gas flow Carrier gas leaks Tighten leaking connectors Split ratio is large Reduce split ratio Sample concentration is low Or injection volume is too low Increase sample concentration or injection volume Wrong column is used Replace existing column with one appropriate for the compounds analyzed more polar less polar etc Column temperature is too low Increase column temperature Signal cable of detector is connected incorrectly Connect signal cable correctly Detector is set to Off Set detector to On Detector parameter have been is set incorrectly Increase range and attenuation sensitivity Hydrogen flame is extinguished
218. improves the reproducibility of results i GC 2010 13 Detector 13 3 Thermal conductivity detector TCD 13 3 3 4 Flow rate program for detector gas Press Program PF menu from Det Gas PF menu to display the Detector Make up screen shown in Fig 13 3 5 Here set a flow rate program for detector gas A 7 ramp program can be set o NOT READY Be 0 FILEO Flow monitor aa Program total min 6 00 Rate e Flow Time min Init 8 8 o 00 lat END Fig 13 3 5 Detector gas program GC 2010 3 gt 167 168 13 Detector 13 3 Thermal conductivity detector TCD 13 3 3 5 Detector gas program parameters FLOW RATE Range 0 0 20 0 ml min Default 8 0 ml min Set the default flow rate and the final flow rate for each stage of the detector gas flow rate program TIME Range 0 00 9999 99 min Default 0 00 min Set the retention time for the initial flow rate and the final flow rate for each ramp of the detector gas flow rate program RATE Range END 400 0 400 0 ml min Default END Set the program rate of the detector gas flow rate program If you set the rate to 0 END appears and the program ends at the previous ramp Move the cursor to END and set any numeric value other than 0 to enter the pressure and the time for that ramp 13 3 3 6 PF menu E Reference PF menu Description section Del Line Deletes a li
219. in Init ea 8 Z Ba Lat 5 88 120 0 za znd 160 00 168 8 5 08 3rd END Equilibration Time min 3 0 Del Line Ins Line Fan Off Fig 11 2 2 Temperature program Example 2 110 GC 2010 11 Creating an Oven Temperature Program 11 2 Temperature Programs 3 gt Multiple ramp temperature program with temp increase decrease olu Q FILEO Temp Monit t BN Temp program total min 53 04 Rate Tempit Time min Init TA bl 3 00 lat 5 00 120 6 A 0A end 10 00 200 0 5 00 3rd 5 a FRE 1 00 200 C bmin 5 C min 4th END 70 C 3min 70 C 1min ME NE Equilibration Time min a eS ES Initial 1st 2nd 3rd temperature stage stage stage Del Line Ins Line Fan Off Fig 11 2 3 Temperature program Example 3 E Allowable temperature settings and ranges for temperature programs Item Set Range Control Range Default value Up to 200 C 0 40 C min Heating Up to 350 C 07230 0 15 C min Normal oven C min Up to 450 C 0 7 C min Up to200 C 0 70 C min Program rate Heating Up to 350 C 0 250 0 50 C min 0 C min High power oven C min Up to 450 C 0 30 C min 250 0 Differ from the room Cooling o gt temperature or the C min oven temperature 450 C 7 C min 40 C min 50 C E Fig 11 2 4 Example of column oven temperature increase decrea
220. inlet pressure is 970 kPa or less The purge flow rate ranges from 0 to the total flow rate subtracted by the column flow rate and the split flow rate wo GC 2010 gt 87 88 8 Setting the Analytical Parameters and File Management 8 1 SET Key Main Screen 8 1 3 PF menu PF menu Description Reference section File Displays file list to change the current file 82 On this sub screen you can select files to load copy initialize and rename Specifies the injection port detectors and options which make up the ana Line Confg lytical flow line 8 3 Units set on this sub screen are displayed on the SET key main screen Customiz Set the parameters displayed on the SET key main screen 8 4 Print Prints temperature pressure and total flow rate on a Chromatopac Next Line Switches through each of the parameter screens in turn Press the SET key from the SET key main screen to switch to the next screen GC 2010 29 9 Setting the Analytical Parameters and File Management 2 File Management 8 2 4 Screen description Select File PF menu from the SYSTEM key main screen to display the file list shown in Fig 8 2 1 To change the current file enter a file No or move the cursor using the A and V key then press the Load PF menu key File Management TAA u s iz FILE1 FILE FILES FILE4 FILES FILES FILE FILES FILE9 0 FILEO CONSUSONA
221. ion and Maintenance Graphite Ferrule NM WARNING Risk of burns Do not perform maintenance until the temperature of the injection port detector and oven have doopped below 50 C NM CAUTION Wait until the heated zones have cooled to loosen screws and nuts to present them from binding NOTE For the details on handling of the graphite ferrule refer to 4 Installing the column 18 6 1 Inspection maintenance cycle A graphite ferrule is used at both ends of the capillary column In the following situations inspect or replace the graphite ferrule When a new graphite ferrule is being installed When ghost peaks are detected during temperature increase When the baseline drifts significantly during temperature increase 18 6 2 Inspection maintenance E Troubleshooting 1 Check for carrier gas leaks Deteriocating ferrules can cause carrier gas leaks and poor reproducibility Check the condition of the graphite ferrule If it is in poor condition replace it with a new graphite ferrule Indicates deterioration D D New graphite ferrule Graphite ferrule in poor condition Fig 18 6 1 Graphite ferrule 2 Check for the source of contamination Ghost peaks can be caused by a poorly made column inlet connection Baseline drift can be caused by a poor connection at the column outlet provided the column has been sufficiently conditioned If a contaminated
222. isplayed on the SET key main screen Set an item to On to display it on the main screen Set the item to Off to wide its display Even if the sampling time display is On the sampling time is only displayed in SPLITLESS mode Move the cursor using the A and V keys to select an item to be changed select On or Off using the lt and p gt keys then press the ENTER key to validate the selection The default it setting displays the column inlet pressures column flow rate split ratio sampling time and the split mode Display Customization Inlet Pressure 4 ong Column Flow Rate n Linear Velocity Off Total Flow Rate Off split Ratio _ n septum Purge Flow Rate Off sampling Time _On split Mode n Control Mode Off Fig 8 4 1 Customizing the Set key main screen GC 2010 95 96 ME GC 2010 Le 9 9 1 1 Screen description Press the MONIT key to display the main monitor screen shown in Fig 9 1 1 In the upper portion of the main screen monitor the status of the injection port the column and the detectors configured in each line In the lower portion of the screen monitor the 29 9 Monitoring the GC MONIT key Main Screen chromatogram the temperature program etc Select Temp Mon and Flow Mon PF menu to monitor the temperature the pressure and the flow rate of all injection ports columns and detectors configured in all configured lines The injection port
223. l JE Print Fig 14 2 3 Analysis log screen NOTE During a temperature program if the rate of temperature increase is too great the GC may not be within the Ready range When this occurs the analysis log shows Fail NOTE If there are more items than can be displayed on one screen scroll through the screen using the left and right arrow keys 2 PF menu PF menu Description Reference section Deletes all displayed logs Clear Lo When Clear Log PF menu is pressed the screen changes and the 9 message Clear log with PF2 appears Press Clear Log PF menu to clear the log Print Prints the analysis log to a Chromatopac EE GC 2010 gt 185 14 Diagnosis 14 2 Log Reading Menu 3 Analysis log details On the analysis log main screen use the cursor to select a log item with on the right and press the ENTER key to display the screen shown in Fig 14 2 4 The screen provides details about each error when the monitored value deviated from the set value and for which an alarm or warning was issued during the analysis Analysis Log detalle 1 Error Time SET ACT Room temp range erorr 1 ZUmin 25 00 25 52 Detarcs PCE error 3 3 min i38 151 DETH4 PCE error 2 S min jeg 111 CAR1 WEI PCB error 1 Z amp min 25 25 FCT 9 PCB error 2 5min l g 111 COL 8D error 3 S lmin Fig 14 2 4 Details screen 186 GC 2010 14 Diagnosis
224. l device error AOC 20i s Code Message cs Note 6001 6023 AOCm rack error No 6002 6024 AOCm syringe error No 6003 6025 AOCm plunger error No 6004 6026 AOCm can not start No 6005 6027 AOCm RAM initialized No 6006 6028 AOCm ROM error No 6007 6029 AOCm CH2 command error No 6008 6030 AOCm sample vial is not set No 6009 6031 AOCm RAM error No 6010 6032 AOCnm installation error No 6011 6033 AOCm CH1 error No m 1 2 1 Main AOC 6012 6034 AOCm CH2 error No 2 SUB AOC 6013 6035 AOCm waste vial is not set No 6014 AOC 20s rotating error No 6015 AOC 20s exp and ctrl Error No 6016 AOC 20s up down error No 6017 AOC 20s can not start No 6018 AOC 20s vial setting error No 6019 AOC 20s vial returning error No 6020 AOC 20s holding error No 6021 AOC 20s sample vial removed No 6022 AOC 20s vial is not set No One of the these messages appear when an error has occurred in the AOC 20i auto injector or the AOC 20s auto sampler For details refer to the AOC 20 User s Manual 19 2 4 Communication errors External device communication error i e Chromatopac Code Message CS Note 4001 Time out No 4002 Parity error No 4003 Message is not accepted No 4004 Data is invalid No 4005 Command is invalid No 4006 Data is out of range No 4007 TRS port is shut down No 4008 TRS file error No One of these mes
225. last diagnosis are shown in the Details PF menu screen described in 14 1 Standard Diagnosis 1 Screen description Select 2 LOG READING MENU from of the DIAG key main screen then select 5 DIAGNOSTIC LOG The screen shown in Fig 14 2 7 appears Up to 50 logs are saved lf the number of logs exceeds 50 existing logs are deleted starting from the oldest as as as as as as as as as as i 12 12 i 11 ii in 11 Ii ii Diagnostic Log Diag date da 98 gs 38 ga Ja 93 ga 98 gs US a7 ar o zB ze zB ze ea e ed 58 58 58 3B ze 18 18 e 58 Return Clear Log Status Good Good Good Not Good Not Good Good Good Good Good Net Good Print Fig 14 2 7 Diagnosis log screen NOTE If there are more items than items than can be displayed on one screen scroll through the screen using the left and right arrow keys 2 PF menu PF menu Description Tenes section Deletes all displayed logs Clari When Clear Log PF menu is pressed the screen changes and the 9 message Clear log with PF2 appears Press Clear Log PF menu to clear the log Print Prints the diagnosis log to a Chromatopac pene GC 2010 gt 189 3 14 Diagnosis 14 3 Analysis Counter Use the analysis counter to set the replacement timing of the septum and the glass insert when the counter exeeds the limit an error
226. ldest GC Operation Log Start Time Stop Time 08 12 08 0 system 88 12 mT 5e8 808 12 07 50 Syeten 0s 12 ar ba Poner 0s 11 20 10 08 11 20 20 System 05 11 05 00 82 11 20 10 System 0s 11 07 50 88 11 20 30 Power Estuni lear Log Print Fig 14 2 2 Operation log screen NOTE If there are more items than can be displayed on one screen scroll through the screen using the left and right arrow keys 2 PF menu Reference PF menu Description section Deletes all displayed logs When Clear Log PF menu is pressed the screen changes and the Clear Log message Clear log with PF2 appears Press Clear Log PF menu to clear the log Print Prints the the operation log to a Chromatopac 184 GC 2010 14 Diagnosis 14 2 Log Reading Menu 14 2 4 Analysis log When 2 ANALYSIS LOG is selected the analysis log is displayed This log records whether analyses were allowed to finish and whether monitored valves exceeded their set valves 1 Screen description Select 2 LOG READING MENU from the DIAG key main screen then select 2 ANALYSIS LOG to display the screen shown in Fig 14 2 3 25 545 logs are saved The number of saved logs depends on the size of each log If the number of logs exceeds the capacity existing logs are deleted starting from the oldest nalyeie Log i 1 Start time nal len Stat 03 11 18 32 15min 1 Fai
227. ler ree anann o pet rete a Ra Me dk A Rte e Rack dete Rl a ted 283 18 2 7 Hydrogen flame ionization detector FID lille 283 18 2 8 Cleaning the Unit eer arr O De dl edet pac A Gea CET EP 283 Inspection and Maintenance Septum oooccococcn nnn nnnnnn 284 18 3 1 Inspection maintenance cycle o oooocccoc rn 284 18 3 2 Inspection maintenance o 284 Inspection and Maintenance O ring for glass inSert o oo 286 18 4 1 Inspection maintenance cycle oooocccoco n 286 18 4 2 Inspection maintenance ooooco rr 286 Inspection and Maintenance Glass Insert slsulsse 289 18 5 1 Inspection maintenance cycle o ooooccccco rn 289 18 5 2 Inspection maintenance 0 0 cette eee 289 Inspection and Maintenance Graphite Ferrule 292 18 6 1 Inspection maintenance cycle o ooooccocccc rn 292 18 6 2 Inspection maintenance o 292 Inspection and Maintenance Capillary Column Llseee 294 18 7 1 Inspection maintenance cycle 000 tenets 294 18 7 2 Inspection maintenance 060 tenets 294 Inspection and Maintenance Flow Controller oooooooooooo 296 18 8 1 Inspection maintenance cycle o oococccoc rn 297 18 8 2 Inspection maintenance oooooco eee eee eee 297 Inspection and Maintenance FID 2 000 e eee eee eee eee 299 18 9 1 Inspection maintenance cycle 000 cette eee 299 1
228. less than 10 cm s However nitrogen is not a good carrier gas for capillary analysis for the following reasons 1 If the linear velocity deviates only slighty from the optimum value the HETP increases dramatically 2 To obtain the optional linear velocity the flow rate must be low resulting in long analysis times Helium is frequently used as the carrier gas because the HETP is low over a considerably wider linear velocity range starting at 20 cm s The column efficiency of hydrogen is good at higher linear velocities than for helium For this reason hydrogen can be used for rapid analyses However hydrogen is seldom used in reality because it is extremely flammable and therfore too dangerous E Efficiency of an analysis Usually analyses are performed with a flow rate that is higher than the optimal flow rate as long as separation of conpounds is sufficient This reduces the analysis time For general analyses on this system setting the linear velocity to 30 cm s is recommended The tables below show the column inlet pressure at which the linear velocity becomes approximately 30 cm s Use the tables as the guideline for setting the column inlet pressure However the inlet pressure also depends on the column type GC 2010 12 Injection Port 12 7 Setting the Flow Rate Parameters Example 1 Column oven temperature 50 C carrier gas helium Length 30m 60m I D of column Film th
229. lete screen GC 2010 3 gt 219 3 16 Special Functions 1 6 2 Batch Schedule Use the batch schedule to continuously and automatically perform analyses A batch is useful for switching methods automatically during the analyses 16 2 1 Screen description Select 2 BATCH from the FUNC key screen the Batch screen shown in Fig 16 2 1 appears I i 4 Single AO0C 28i a Vial GC DP HIMJ Mk CHD 3 8 Chi iu c 6 1 Chi i U Return Inactive The AOC status is displayed Fig 16 2 1 E ACC status Batch schedule screen The ACC status is displayed on the Batch screen Screen display Description Inactive ACC is not operating Taking vial Auto sampler arm is picking up a vial Preparation ACC is operating before injection Rinse ACC is operating after injection Putting vial Auto sampler arm is returning a vial to the tray Wait ACC is waiting for analysis 220 GC 2010 16 Special Functions 16 2 Batch Schedule 16 2 2 Parameter list Vial GC DP INJ Mk CMD Initial No and final vial No Example 1 9 Analysis starts from vial No 1 and ends at vial No 9 GC method file for analyses Channel No of chromatopac and file No Example 1 5 Channel 1 and data processing file No 5 are used This setting is ignored when using GC solution software Number of times to inject U
230. ling time indicates the period of time after analysis starts until the split flow line is opened When setting the sampling time ensure that the program time is longer than the sampling time Otherwise the sampling time connot function correctly CONTROL MODE Selection PRESS VELOCITY FLOW for direct injection mode Default PRESS When the injection mode is set to SPLIT or SPLITLESS PRESS Controls the system so that the column inlet pressure remains constant VELOCITY Controls the system so that the linear velocity remains constant When the injection mode is set to DIRECT PRESS Controls the system so that the column inlet pressure remains constant VELOCITY Controls the system so that the linear velocity remains constant FLOW Controls the system so that the flow rate remains constant GC 2010 12 Injection Port 12 5 Split Splitless Injection System CARRIER GAS TYPE Selection He N2 H2 Ar Default He Specify the carrier gas type supplied to the AFC This parameter is used for the measurement control of the flow rate If this parameter is not set correctly flow rate calculations may not be performed correctly Example If this parameter is set to N2 when He is actually used the displayed total flow rate column flow rate and linear velocity are lower than the actual values 1 The column flow rate ranges from 0 to the value at which the calculated column inlet pressure is 970 kPa or less and the calculated tot
231. lready set proceed to the next step Turn off the power Wait until the column oven has cooled down sufficiently Turn on the power Wait for approximately 1 minute Press the DET key the PF2 key and the toggle key in that order The screen shown in Fig 3 6 3 opens Make sure that flow monitors of each gases do not change When they change wait for a while Press the PF2 key The message Zero calibration Start appears at the bottom of the monitor Approximately 10 seconds later the message Zero calibration completeds appears Calibration of the APC is complete Return the Start GC setting to its original status GC 2010 gt 47 48 amp 3 AFC APC 3 6 AFC and APC Offset Calibration Flow DET 1 He EN Press kPa Flow Ha EBEN 54 0 MakeUp Press kPa Flow a WI 20a Gas Kind He dr Ei Press kPa Flow as WI 00 60 GC 2010 3 gt 4 Installing the column 1 Capillary Column Overview Two types of columns can be installed in a gas chromatograph The first type the capillary column chemically fuses the liquid phase to the interior of the column wall The other type the packed column fills the interior of the column with packing material with the liq uid phase coating the particles This type of column is becoming obsolete Fused silica chemically bonded capillary columns are in wide use today this chapter describes capillary column installation in
232. lt On Set Or or Off for the start signal of each channel GC 2010 2 251 16 Special Functions 16 6 GC Configuration 16 6 10 Temperature offset If the actual temperature of the various heated zones as measured by a thermocouple differs flow the set temperature set a temperature offset value to compensate 16 6 10 1 Screen description Select 6 GC CONFIGURATION from the FUNC key and select 8 TEMPERATURE OFFSET to display the temperature offset screen shown in Fig 16 6 20 emperature Offset Column au SPL1 Hie pg aa WBIZ e oa FIDi E pg ea TCDZ e ea Fig 16 6 20 Offset set up screen 16 6 10 2 Parameter list COLUMN INJ1 INJ2 DET1 DET2 AUX3 AUX4 AUX5 Range 10 00 10 00 Default 0 00 The temperature of each heated zone can be offset Uninstalled ports are not displayed For example when 1 C is obtained by subtracting the column oven temperature measured by thermocouple from the gas chromatograph value with an offset value of 0 input 1 as the offset value 252 GC 2010 16 6 11 Other Settings 16 6 11 1 Screen description Select 6 GC CONFIGURATION from the FUNC key screen and then select 9 OTHER CONFIGURATIONS to open the configurations screen shown in Fig 16 6 21 Other Configurations Language 4kEnglish Backlight auto off sec _ Pressure unit kPa Beep volume Hig Eeep tone Hi Atmospheric comp
233. lysis 10 1 1 Verifying the gas chromatograph status 1 Ensure that the STATUS indicator light is green 2 When the STATUS light is green perform a zero point adjustment See 9 4 Zero Point Adjustment For a description of the items which determine the Ready Status refer to 16 6 6 Setting the Ready Check Parameters 10 1 2 Making manual injection E Aspiration 1 Preparation 10 uL Syringe Sample Rinse solvent Liquid waste container 2 Syringe handling precautions Needle Barrel Plunger Plunger button Fig 10 1 1 Typical syringe The plunger keeps the sample from becoming contaminated Do not bend it or touch it Keep it clean Never bend the needle 3 Solvent pre wash Clean the syringe with solvent 3 to 5 times using the following procedure 1 Place the syringe into the rinse solvent Pull the plunger to aspirate approximately 10 ul of Solvent 2 Expel the solvent into the liquid waste container 4 Sample pre wash Flush the syringe with sample 3 to 5 times using the following procedure 1 Place the syringe into the sample Pull the plunger to aspirate approsimately 10 ul of sample 2 Expel the sample into the liquid waste container GC 2010 103 104 10 Starting and Stopping Analysis 10 1 Making an Injecting and Starting an Analysis 5 Preparing to inject 1 With the needle in the sample vial pump the plunger to eliminate air bubbles inside the syringe Bi Inje
234. m Column length 25 0m Film thickness 0 50 m Carrier gas He Split ratio 40 66 9 ml min 1 67 ml min split flow rate column flow rate Fig 3 4 1 Split control m Sc 2010 39 40 3 AFC APC 3 4 AFC and APC control 3 4 3 Split mode SPLITLESS AFC The control method changes only during the sampling time During sampling time the AFC controls the TFC Total Flow Controller so that the output from the column inlet pressure sensor becomes constant and then controls the column inlet pressure After the sampling time the AFC controls the total flow rate to keep it at a constant value using the TFC Total Flow Controller inside the AFC As in split mode the ESC Electronic Split Controller is controlled to maintain the column inlet pressure constant Figure 3 4 2 shows the control status during the sampling time with a split ratio of 1 40 a velocity of 30 cm sec a purge flow rate of 3 ml min and a column oven temperature of 50 C The column inlet pressure is calculated based on the linear velocity the oven temperature the column inner diameter and the column length and is automatically set to 49 6 kPa In the same way the column flow rate is automatically set to 1 67 ml min When the sampling time expires control is identical to the split mode shown in Fig 3 4 1 When the Control mode is set to PRESS the column inlet pressure is controlled to remain at 49 6 kPa regardress of the column oven
235. message is displayed 14 3 1 Screen description Select 3 ANALYSIS COUNTER from the DIAG key main screen to display the screen shown in Fig 14 3 1 Analysis Counter LIME 1 AOC Wait 4 gt __ Nol MU Counter for Serti Use Counter Yes Analysis counter petting to warn 188 Commer for Insert Use Counter Yes Analysis counter g settings bo warn 166 Return Fig 14 3 1 Analysis counter screen 190 GC 2010 14 Diagnosis 14 3 Analysis Counter 14 3 2 Parameter list AOC WAIT Selection Yes No Default No When the threshold is exceeded during batch processing select Yes to temporarily pause the AOC operation when the analysis counter has exeed the limit USE COUNTER Selection Yes No Default Yes ANALYSIS COUNTER Selection O SETTING TO WARN Range 0 999 Default 100 NOTE The septum glass insert replacement interval depends on the type of analysis Periodically replace the septum and the glass insert even if the warning message is not displayed 14 3 3 PF menu gt PF menu Description eS section Reset Resets analysis number counter of the current item PEN Next Displays the setup screen of the analysis counter of another injection port PE GC 2010 191 3 14 Diagnosis 1 4 4 Coolant Consumption Counter The coolant consumption display allows you to confirm the total time that the CRG has been On The CRG is an opti
236. mn is conditioned then the column over is cooled Carrier gas flow is then shut down STOP TIME Column conditioning time FLOW CONTROL End FLOW OFF TIME Approx 20 minutes Atthe end of an analysis each heated zone is cooled but carrier gas is kept flowing for rapid equilibration for the next day s analysis The next day the system is automati cally restarted 15 hours 900 minutes later and temperature control resumes START TIME 0 minutes because the carrier gas continued to flow STOP TIME 0 minutes FLOW CONTROL Cont to keep carrier gas flow on RESTART GC On SLEEP TIME 900 minutes at the end of the SLEEP TIME the GC restarts At the end of an analysis each heated zone is cooled and the carrier gas flow is stopped once the column oven is cool The following day 15 hours 900 minutes later carrierr gas flow is turned back on and temperature control begins START TIME 10 minutes because carrier gas flow was off STOP TIME 0 minute FLOW CONTROL End FLOW OFF TIME Approx 20 minutes RESTART GC On SLEEP TIME 900 minutes at the end of the SLEEP TIME the GC restarts GC 2010 83 84 j GC 2010 joe 8 1 1 29 8 Setting the Analytical Parameters and File Management 1 SET Key Main Screen Main screen Press the SET key to display the main screen shown in Fig 8 1 1 and to make frequently used parameter settings To make changes to the COL FLOW INJ and DET parame
237. monitor Program total min Timetmin Split Ratio Int 50 9 Lat 5 an 58 4 end 6 au END Fig 12 5 12 Example of split ratio program GC 2010 137 12 Injection Port 12 5 Split Splitless Injection System 12 5 8 Septum purge Set the septum purge flow rate The septum purge removes contamination from the injection port at the septum The septum purge flow rate is set here In addition you can create a program to change the septum purge flow rate during analysis 12 5 8 1 Screen description Select Purge PF menu from the FLOW key main screen to display the septum purge screen shown in Fig 12 5 13 septum Purge CARI LINE FILES Or Flow monitor 4a ENEN Program total min ge ag Rate Ms Flow Time min Init ase 3 8 e eo A program can contain up to iet END 7 ramps IM Fig 12 5 13 Septum purge setup screen 138 GC 2010 12 5 8 2 Parameter list FLOW RATE Refer to Fig 3 5 3 Default 3 0 ml min Set the initial flow rate of the flow rate program and the final flow rate for each stage Even if no program is set specify septum purge flow rate in the initial flow rate column TIME Range 0 00 9999 99 min Default 0 00 min 12 Injection Port 12 5 Split Splitless Injection System Set the initial flow rate for the flow rate program and the hold time of the final pressure at each stage RATE Range END 400 00 400 00 kPa min
238. more detectors are set an error message appears Set the dimensions of the column installed Example Set the dimensions of the column using Column of the FLOW key Press Load PF menu to load the analytical conditions of the standard installation test If the analytical condition need to be changed for the installation test change the parameters Make an injection then verify whether the data has been acquired correctly When analysis finishes press Unload PF menu to return the analytical conditions to their former status GC 2010 3 gt 195 29 14 Diagnosis 14 6 Peak Generator Select 6 PEAK GENERATOR to generate electronic peaks to confirm of the operation of the data processing unit 14 6 1 Screen description Select 6 PEAK GENERATOR from the DIAG key screen to display the Peak generator screen shown in Fig 14 6 1 Peak Generator Peak Generator _On Mode Noise Chi Standard Signal On Che Standard Signal 4k oft Ch Standard Signal Ott Chd Standard Signal Off Return PeakInfo ss Fig 14 6 1 Peak generator setup screen 14 6 2 Parameter list PEAK GENERATOR Range On Off Default Off MODE Range Noise No Noise Trunc Default Noise Ch1 Ch4 STANDARD SIGNAL Range On Off Default Off 14 6 3 PF menu Reference PF menu Description F section Specify the parameters retention time full width at half height and peak height of the peaks to be generat
239. n preparation Confirm that the insert is appropriate for the injection mode that the silica wool has not moved and that the glass insert O ring has not deteriorated After approximately 100 injections replace the septum Attach the column to the hanger install the hanger and verify the proper position of the graphite ferrules Tighten the injection port and detector collumn nuts When the above preparations are complete turn on the GC 6 1 2 Setting Parameters Set the column information and the flow rates Set the temperature of the detector and the injection port Set the COL temperature and the temperature program v Start GC control Set the detector From the FLOW key screen set the column inlet pressure the injection mode the split ratio the sampling time etc From the Column PF menu set the column inner diameter the column length and the film thickness From the Purge PF menu set the purge flow rate Changing the column temperature after the flow rate has been set may change the flow rate From the screens of the INJ and DET keys set the temperatures If the detector is set to Off turn it On From DET Gas PF menu set hydrogen air makeup gas etc From the screen of the COL key set the column initial temperature and the temperature program Temperature settings must be within the allowable column and detector ranges Press the SYSTEM key to display the main
240. n the connection or retighten it Replace the seal material 5 Wipe off the leak detecting fluid or soapy water using a wet cloth Electronic leak detectors can also be used for hydrogen and helium leaks Option Snoop Gas leak detecting fluid P N 670 11514 Fig 2 6 8 Leak detecting fluid N CAUTION Do not use the leak detecting fluid nor soapy water for gas leak check on the connections above the carrier and detector gas controllers AFC APC The drips may damage the controller GC 2010 27 29 2 Installation Connecting external device cables E Connecting the RS 232C cable Connect the RS 232C cable to its terminal on the rear panel OOO OEEk Fig 2 7 1 Connecting the RS 232C cable Detector control signal I O and digital signal output occur through the RS 232C cable RS 232C cable connection parameters e Connection to C R8A Set data transmission parameters to equivalent values between the GC system and the C R8A Example of C R8A settings For details refer to the C R8A instruction manual Make the following settings on the transmission parameter setup screen for LEVEL 2 and 9 600bps CCONFIG T TTRS CY D PORT MODE No BPS STD2 12917 8 9600 Power cycle the C R8A after changing transmission parameters For GC 2010 data transmission parameters refer to 16 6 5 Setting transmission parameters
241. nducted to Pin No 1 COM at EVENT 91 Pin No 3 black NO Conducted to Pin No 1 COM at EVENT91 EVENT92 Pin No 4 yellow COM Pin No 5 blue NC Conducted to Pin No 4 COM at EVENT 92 Pin No 6 black NO Conducted to Pin No 4 COM at EVENT92 OPTION Pin No 7 brown GROUND Pin No 8 gray GROUND 2 Installation GC 2010 gt 33 34 GC 2010 js 1 AFC and APC Overview The AFC Advanced Flow Controller is an electronic flow controller which sets and controls carrier gas pressures and flow rates based on entered parameters The APC Advanced Pressure Controller is an electronic flow controller for controlling detector gas pressures The AUX APC can control the gas pressure of other optional devices m CC 2010 t 35 39 3 AFC APC 2 Definition of Terms E Column inlet pressure Column inlet pressure refers to the injection port pressure When set to 0 kPa the injection port pressure is equal to atmospheric pressure E Total flow rate Total flow rate is the flow rate controlled by the TFC Total Flow Controller located upstream of the injection port Refer to Fig 3 3 1 E Column flow rate The column flow rate in the GC 2010 gas chromatograph indicates the volume flow rate inside the column converted at the atmospheric pressure and the room temperature which corresponds to the flow rate measured at room temperature by a flow meter conn
242. ne at the current cursor position Ins Line Inserts a line in line at the current cursor position ee GC 2010 gt 13 Detector 1 3 4 Filter Signal Time Constant E Selecting the filter time constant Normally analyes can be performed with the time constant set to the default value However in order to improve the S N ratio the time constant can be changed by measuring the half width of a test peak Fig 13 4 1 shows the relationship between the peak half width and the time constant where the S N ratio is maximaized For example if the half width of a peak is 0 1 sec the S N ratio is maximaized when the time constant is set to 20 ms 1 2 1 0 8 0 6 0 4 Normalized SN ratio 0 2 Half width 10s Half width 1s D Half width 0 1s 0 L L L L L L L e o e e o e o LA QS QS QS QS uS NV Y DS JE OE O AP e Time constant Fig 13 4 1 Relationship between time constant and S N ratio GC 2010 169 gt 13 Detector 1 3 5 Setting the Output Signals 13 5 1 Detector signal output O O O O O O D gt RS 232C D chi D ch2 Fig 13 5 1 Location of connector Set the detector signal digital and analog signals output from the gas chromatograph There are four signal output channels Ch3 and Ch4 are availabl
243. ngs the service life of the temperature sensor To instantly vaporize the injected sample set the injection port temperature approximately 30 C higher than the final column oven temperature Because the sample quantity is usually minute the sample is vaporized at temperatures lower than the boiling point of sample compounds To set the maximum temperature limit refer to 16 6 4 Setting the maximum temperature limits in 16 6 GC Configuration 12 6 1 3 PF menu Reference PF menu Description x section Print Prints the temperature program to a Chromatopac E Toggles to the next setup screen when two or more injection ports are Next Inj installed in this system ES The INJ key can also be used to switch screens GC 2010 143 144 12 Injection Port 12 6 Direct Injection System 12 6 2 Setting the flow rate 12 6 2 1 Screen description Press the FLOW key to display the main Flow Screen shown in Fig 12 6 3 Set the AFC parameters to control the carrier gas pressure and the flow rate Total flow s Control mode Carrier gas bype He Fig 12 6 3 FLOW key main screen 12 6 2 2 Parameter list INLET PRESS Range 0 0 970 0 kPa Refer to Fig 3 5 1 Default 100 0 kPa Set the column inlet pressure When creating a pressure program this specifies the initial pressure When the control mode is set to PRESS the system controls the column inlet pressure so that it remains const
244. nsitivity Maximum temperature With differential type filament protective circuit tungsten rhenium filament dual element configuration Constant current 105 20 000mV ml mg 400 C Auxiliary heated zone AUX3 to AUX5 Available optional Carrier gas flow control unit O Split splitless mode Range Program ramps Program rate Split rate setting O Direct injection mode Pressure mode Range Program ramps Program rate Flow rate mode Range Program ramps Program rate 0 to 970 kPa The maximum pressure limit is the primary pres sure minus 10 kPa 0 1 kPa increments 7 ramps possible 400 to 400 kPa min 0 01 kPa min increments 0 to 9999 9 0 1 increments 0 to 970 kPa The maximum pressure limit is the primary pres sure minus 10 kPa 0 1 kPa increments 7 ramps possible 400 to 400 kPa min 0 to 1200 ml min When primary pressure is 980 kPa 7 ramps possible 400 to 400 ml min min 0 1 ml min min increments Detector gas flow controller Range Program ramps Program rate Display 0 1200 ml min Air 0 1 ml min increments 0 200 ml min H2 0 100 ml min Makeup He 7 ramps possible 400 to 400 ml min min 0 01 ml min min increments Back light LCD 240 x 320 dot 16 lines The display can be switched between Japanese and English GC 2010 3 gt 1 2 9 Dimensions weight and power supply Dimensions mm 515 W x 440 H x 530 D
245. nspection and Maintenance FID and inspect the FID If a jet is clogged clean or replace it A defective Ignitor filament must be replaced Contact your Simadzu representative AN WARNING If the FID ignition has failed shut off the hydrogen gas supply immediately and inspect the FID GC 2010 gt 305 19 Troubleshooting 19 1 Troubleshooting 2 The FID baseline is fluctuating Possible Cause Solution Carrier gas leaks Tighten leaking connections Replace tubing or septum Refer to 2 6 Gas supply plumbing in Instruction Manual Carrier gas quality is poor Replace carrier gas with higher purity gas Provide a molecular sieve filter in the carrier gas flow line Molecular sieve filter is saturated Recondition the molecular sieve filter Injection port is contaminated Clean or inspect the glass insert Refer to 18 5 Inspection and Maintenance Glass Insert in Instruction Manual Compressed air is contaminated the baseline fluctuates according to the compressor pressure Install a silica gel trap on either end of the pressure regulator Use air from a gas oylinder instead with the FID on Hydrogen gas has not been flowing long enough to replace the air in the tubing Wait for 30 to 60 minutes to allow the air to be completely replaced with hydrogen Room temperature is not within the recommended range and or is fluctuating c
246. o increase and decrease the column inlet pressure during analysis If high boiling point contaminants are clunting shorlty after the target compounds a pressure program can be used so that the oven temperature does not need to be set higher than nec essary This prolongs column service life 12 5 5 1 Screen description Select Press Prog PF menu from the FLOW key main screen when the control mode is set to PRESS to display the carrier press screen shown in Fig 12 5 7 appears Carrier Fress CARL m Q FILEO Press monitor kPa Program total min Rate 2 PreatkPa Time min Init eese 188 e uo ist END Up to 7 ramps of pressure increase or decrease can be set Del Line Ing Line Fig 12 5 7 Pressure program setup screen 12 5 5 2 Parameter list PRESS Range 0 0 970 0 kPa Refer to Fig 3 5 1 Default 100 kPa Set the initial pressure and the final pressure for each stage of the pressure program TIME Range 0 0 9999 99 min Default 1 00 min Set the hold time for the initial pressure and the final pressure for each stage of the pressure program RATE Range END 400 00 400 00 kPa min Default END Set the pressure program rate If you set the rate to 0 END appears and the program finishes at the previous ramp If you move the cursor to END and set any numeric value other than 0 the pressure and the time for that ramp can be enterd NOTE The pressu
247. of Event xx Example Event 1 Meaning of Event xx Example Event 1 Turns on CAR1 gas saver Turns off CAR1 gas saver 62 Sets split ratio to value of CAR1 gas saver split Returns split ratio to value of analysis ratio 2 parameter Turns on CAR2 gas saver Turns off CAR2 gas saver 63 Sets split ratio to value of CAR2 gas saver split Returns split ratio to value of analysis ratio 1 parameter Turns on CAR2 gas saver Turns off CAR2 gas saver 64 Sets split ratio to value of CAR2 gas saver split Returns split ratio to value of analysis ratio 2 parameter 71 Ignites frame Extinguishes frame 81 Turns on feedback of FTD 1 Turns off feedback of FTD 1 82 Turns on feedback of FTD 2 Turns off feedback of FTD 2 83 Turns on feedback of FTD 3 Turns off feedback of FTD 3 84 Turns on feedback of FTD 4 Turns off feedback of FTD 4 91 N O contact between two contacts in one circuit N C contact between two contacts in one circuit 92 N O contact between two contacts in one circuit N C contact between two contacts in one circuit 93 N O contact between two contacts in one circuit N C contact between two contacts in one circuit option PRG option PRG 94 N O contact between two contacts in one circuit N C contact between two contacts in one circuit option PRG option PRG 103 Closes CAR1 splitter control Opens CARI splitter control 104 Closes CAR2 splitter control Opens CAR2 splitter control 105 Turns On AC blower Turn
248. of graphite is inferior to that of rubber Tighten the injection port nut securely Ensure that the graphite O ring is the correct size for the glass inset de O ring For split analysis For splitless WBI analysis Fig 12 3 4 Attaching graphite and fluoride rubber O ring GC 2010 Inserting the glass insert Insert the glass insert according to the following procedure after attaching the fluoride rubber O ring or graphite O ring 1 Insert the glass insert into the injection port 2 Move the septum nut back over the glass insert and slowly tighten the glass insert nut by hand at first then 1 3 1 2 turn with wrench Septum nut Glass insert nut Fig 12 3 5 NOTE The position of the injection port components is shown below Injection port Carrier Stopper Right Septum nut Fig 12 3 6 m 8c 2010 i 119 120 12 Injection Port 12 3 Removing and inserting the glass insert Bi If the glass insert breaks in the injection port If the glass insert breaks in the injection port take out the thermal insulation cup and the capi llary adapter from within the oven and carefully remove the broken glass i Injection port Sealing surface 9 o c c o 2 O Capillary adapter II 5 5 Thermal insulation cup Fig 12 3 7 NOTE Re install the capillary adapter without allowing leaks If glass chips etc are present on the se
249. olvent Vials Yes solvent select All Air Suction Ho Plunger Suction Speed Fast epeed of Plunger Fast Syringe Heightt f 8 Syringe Heighb _ 8 Syringe Heisht In E Multi In al Kinda of Vials 1 5ml Return InjHode Fig 15 1 3 Additional AOC parameter setup GC 2010 201 15 Optional Devices 15 1 Auto Injector Parameters 15 1 8 Other AOC Parameter INJ SPEED SYRINGE Selection Slow Fast Default Fast Set the syringe injection speed USING 3 SOLVENT VIALS Selection Yes No Default No Specifies whether three solvent vials are present and the autosampler carousel is not in use This item is only available when USE OF THE SAMPLER in Sampler PF menu is set to Not Use SOLVENT SELECT Selection All A only B only C only Default All This item is available when USING 3 SOLVENT VIALS is set to Yes or USE OF THE SAMPLER in Sampler PF menu is set to Use All Three solvent types are used For the details refer to Fig 3 4 1 in 3 4 Auto Sampler in the AOC 20 User s Manual AIR SUCTION Selection Yes No Default No Set whether or not 1 ul of air is aspirated into the siringe after aspirating sample This type of injection is useful for samples with a wide boiling point range when compound discrimination problems can occur AN CAUTION When the column initial temperature is high or when a PEG based polar column is used the column life may be short
250. on Port 12 5 Split Splitless Injection System 3 gt 12 5 6 3 PF menu PF menu Description Reference section Del Line Deletes a line at the current cursor position Ins Line Inserts a line in line at the current cursor position Print Prints the flow rate program to a hromatopac 12 5 6 4 Setting a flow rate program E Screen terminology 1 ramp flow rate program Flow rate Initial flow rate FLOW F1 Initial flow rate hold time TIME a 2 F1 Program rate RATE b Final flow rate FLW F2 Final flow rate hold time TIM c Program Program Time starts finishes E Program creation 1 ramp flow rate program jer Flow CARI 5 LINE A FILES Flow monitor Yg METE Program total min 23 33 Rate ms Flow Time min Init 20 8 14 He Lat 3 00 38 0 18 88 znd END 30ml min 5min 3ml min 20ml min 10min Fig 12 5 10 Flow rate program example GC 2010 135 136 12 Injection Port 12 5 Split Splitless Injection System 12 5 7 Spl it ratio program You can change the split ratio during a split analysis In addition you can set a split ratio program after the sampling time has elapsed during splitless analysis The split ratio program and the gas saver perform basically the same operation However the split ratio program is used for more general purposes 12 5 7 1 Screen description split Ratio CAR
251. onal accessory If the coolant consumption exceeds the time limit specified setting to warn a warning message is displayed Replace the gas supply 14 4 1 Screen description Select 4 COOLANT CONSUMPTION from the DIAG key main screen to display the Coolant consumption screen shown in Fig 14 4 1 Mi ooo TT Use Counter Yeg Consumpbion min EN Setting to warn min ide DULL Wwe UN Use Counter 4b Nol Consumption min O Setting to warn min a Fig 14 4 1 Coolant consumption sets screen screen 192 GC 2010 14 Diagnosis 14 4 Coolant Consumption Counter 14 4 2 Parameter list USE COUNTER Selection Yes No Default Yes CONSUMPTION Default Omin The total time that the CRG is Or is displayed Refer to 15 3 Setting the CRG Parameters SETTING TO WARN NOTE Range 0 9999min Default 100min The coolant consumption time depends on the gas cylinder volume and the number of analyses which requier CRG Set the warning time according to the analysis conditions 14 4 3 PF menu PF menu Description Reference section Reset Resets the Use counter GC 2010 2 193 29 14 Diagnosis 14 5 Standard Installation Test After the system has been installed by your Shimadzu representative the standard installation test is performed to check whether the system is functioning properly 14 5 1 Screen description Select 5 STANDARD
252. onsiderably Keep the room temperature within the recommended range and move the system away from heat or A C vents etc 3 Baseline noise is high Possible Cause Solution Carrier gas quality is poor Replace carrier gas with higher purity gas Provide a molecular sieve filter in the carrier gas flow line Hydrogen gas quality is poor Replace hydrogen gas with higher purity gas The quartz jet is dirty Inspect clean or replace the jet If the jet is damaged replace it If the collector is coated with white powder contact your shimadzu representative for replacement 19 1 3 2 TCD 1 The detector cannot be zeroed Possible Cause Solution Data processing unit is not connected properly Connect them properly Current is Off Turn the current on Current value is too high Set current to a lower value Turning on the TCD current when oxygen is present in the cell can oxidize or blow out the filament making it impossible to zero the detestor the cell must be replaced contact your Shimadzu reprensentative GC 2010 2 Fluctuating baseline 19 Troubleshooting 19 1 Troubleshooting Possible Cause Solution Carrier gas or makeup gas is contaminated Sufficiently purge air inside flow lines Replace tubing Use higher purity gas Current value is too high Reduce the current Injection port glass insert or sil
253. onsumables tenance Parts 29 18 Maintenance and Inspection Miscellaneous maintenance part are listed in 18 1 8 Miscellaneous 18 1 1 18 1 2 18 1 3 18 1 4 18 1 5 Septum Parts name P N Purpose Silicon rubber septa with 20pcs 201 35584 Injection port septa Up to 350 C Septa for high temperature with 20pcs 221 48398 91 Injection port septa above 350 C O ring for glass insert Part name P N Purpose Fluoride rubber O ring with 5pcs 036 11203 84 standard Up to 450 C Graphite O ring for splitless WBI with 4pcs 221 47222 91 For high temperature 350 C to 450 C Graphite O ring for split with 4pcs 221 48393 91 For high temperature 350 C to 450 C Glass insert Part name P N Purpose Glass insert For split 221 41444 01 For split injection technique Glass insert For splitless 221 48335 01 For splitless injection technique Silica wool with 2g 201 48600 Packed in glass insert Graphite ferrule Part name P N Purpose Graphite ferrule G0 5 with 10pcs 221 32126 05 Capillary column installation Graphite ferrule GO 8 with 10pcs 221 32126 08 Wide bore column installation Capillary column To select a capillary column refer to a column manufactuer s catarog GC 2010 281 282 18 Maintenance and Inspe
254. op Diag PF menu during diagnosis to display the diagnosis stop screen shown in Fig 14 1 4 When the diagnostics are allowed to complete the total diagnosis results Test Result and the number of abnormalities Number of NG are displayed Standard Diagnosis Test Result Not Good The diagnosis is terminated Fig 14 1 4 Diagnosis stops 14 1 8 PF menu PF menu Description beide section When the diagnosis is stopped diagnosis results up to that time are dis played Detalls When the diagnosis ends the diagnosis results of all items are displayed AS Press Print PF menu to print out the displayed diagnosis results 180 GC 2010 14 Diagnosis 14 1 Standard Diagnosis 14 1 9 Diagnosis results Press Details PF menu from the screen shown in Fig 14 1 4 once the standard diagnosis is have stopped or ended the Test Result screen shown in Fig 14 1 5 appears Press Details PF menu from the standard diagnosis screen shown in Fig 14 1 4 to display the results of the last test since the power was turned on Once the power is turned off the diagnosis results are cleared Diagnosis Report Test Result Good Temp Sensor Dias Kolum Good SFL1 Good FIDI Good WEIZ Good TCDS Good AUES Good AUEA Good AURS Good I LCD Use Time brad JReturn Print Fig 14 1 5 Diagnosis results 14 1 10 PF menu list Reference PF menu Description section
255. operating time The limit 15 000 hours FAN USE TIME Verifies whether the accumulated fan operating time exceeds the preset operating time The limit is 43 800 hours DC VOLTAGE 5 VDC 24 VDC 15 VDC FTD 24 VDC Verifies whether each DC voltage has exeeded its limit ROOM TEMPERATURE Verifies whether the current room temperature is within the optimal range The range is 5 to 40 C ATMOSPHERIC PRESS Verifies whether the atmospheric pressure is within the optimal range PRIMARY PRESS Verifies whether the gas supply pressure is within the maximum set pressure CPU REGISTER REAL TIME CLOCK REGISTER Verifies that each register is correctly written and read DETECTOR ROM Verifies that the data saved in the detector ROM is read correctly DETECTOR ADC REGISTER Verifies that the data saved in the detector A D converter register is read correctly DETECTOR HV SOURCE Verifies whether the detector high voltage power supply is within the threshold GC 2010 177 178 14 Diagnosis 14 1 Standard Diagnosis DETECTOR IGNITE Checks that the ignition pulse is normal DETECTOR IGNITION Verifies whether the ignition operation is normally executed ECD FREQUENCY Verifies whether the frequency of the pulse voltage applied to the ECD is below the limit CARRIER GAS ROM DETECTOR GAS ROM APC ROM Verifies whether the data saved in the ROM on the flow controller PCB can be read correctly CARRIER GAS AD CONVERTER DETECTOR AD CONVERTER APC AD CONVERTER Ver
256. or flow rate program setup screen for the AUX APC 15 2 4 In flow mode the difference between the set and actual value can be elim Resistor inated by installing a restrictor in the flow line On the resistor screen enter 15 2 5 the i d length and resitance of the restrictor tubing On Off Set APC to be used to On Default value is On Offset Performs offset calibration of APC sensor to improve the reproducibility of 3 6 results Next Toggles among AOC parameters AUX APC CRG screens in that order GC 2010 15 Optional Devices 15 2 Setting the AUX APC Parameters 15 2 4 Setting a program A pressure of flow rate program can also be created for the AUX APC Set the control mode to Pressure on the AUX APC main screen select the desired APC and then press Pro gram PF menu The APC program screen shown in Fig 15 2 2 opens Similarly a flow rate program can be creaded by selecting FLOW mode and pressing Pro gram PF menu This opens the flow rate program screen For the program setting procedure refer to 12 5 5 Pressure program and 12 5 6 Creating a Flow rate program A program can contain up to 7 ramps of pressure or flow rate increase decrease Press monitor kPa Program total min Rate 9 PrestkPa Time min Init iog o Be lat END Eeturn Del Line Ing Line Fig 15 2 2 APC pressure program setup GC 2010 gt
257. our middle finger you can smoothly inject the sample and keep the plunger in the syringe Example Do not bend the plunger when holding the syringe in this position AM WARNING Hold here N e ll How to hold a syringe when injection GC 2010 6 Analysis Flow Chart 6 1 Analysis Flow Chart 3 gt E Glass insert liner There are two types of glass inserts one for split analysis and the other for splitless WBI analysis Select the correct type based on the sample injection method b A glass insert for split analysis can be Y Somm used for splitless analysis However when injecting thermolabile samples or samples that are highly absorptive or of low concentration use the splitless insert The position of the glass wool in the insert directly affects the reproducibility of results For the AOC 20i auto injector the glass wool is normally positioned 25 mm from the upper end of the glass insert Samples come into direct contact with the inner surface of the glass insert and the silica wool On these hot surfaces A unstable compounds may be decomposed For split analysis For splitless or adsorbed If this occurs use deacti Mna vated lineas and glass wool Fig Correct placement of silica wool 25mm 25mm Silica wool E Analytical column Verify that carrier gas is flowing through the column before increasing the column oven temperature Otherwise the column liquid phase becomes oxi
258. ow rate is equivalent to column flow rate split flow rate septum purge flow rate In direct mode the total flow rate is equivalent to column flow rate septum purge flow rate SPLIT RATIO Range 1 0 0 0 9999 9 Default 1 0 The split ratio is split flow rate column flow rate When you set a split ratio the system sets the total flow rate based on the calculated carrier gas flow rate and split flow rate so that the desired split ratio occurs at the oven temperature Set the split ratio to 1 0 to fix the total flow rate regardless of the oven temperature PURGE FLOW RATE Default 3 3 0 ml min Set the septum purge flow rate SAMPLING TIME Range 0 00 9999 99 min Default 1 00 min Sets the sampling time for splitless analysis The sampling time indicates the period of time after analysis starts until the split flow line is opened GC 2010 8 Setting the Analytical Parameters and File Management 8 1 SET Key Main Screen SPLIT MODE Selection SPLIT SPLITLESS DIRECT Default SPLIT SPLIT Controls the column inlet pressure and the total flow rate so that the column inlet pressure and split ratio occur as specified SPLITLESS Closes the split flow line during the sampling time so that the set column inlet pressure is controlled by the Total Flow Controller Opens the split flow line and controls the Electronid Split Controller so that the preset column inlet pressure occurs Refer to Fig 12 5 2
259. plays the current and set temperatures of column injection port and 92 detector Displays inlet pressure total flow rate and purge flow rate for injection port Flow Mon and hydrogen flow rate air flow rate and makeup gas flow rate for detector 9 3 The display format depends on the typeof flow controller installed Zero Adj Automatically moves the baseline to zero point 9 4 Zero Free Returns to the baseline level before zero point adjustment 9 4 Up Moves the baseline up by 100 uV from current level 9 4 Down Moves the baseline down by 100 uV from current level 9 4 Switches the graph display from chromatogram and column oven tempera ture program to chromatogram and pressure program For direct injection Chng Graph mode with flow control the flow rate program is displayed instead of the pressure program Chng Line Displays the monitor screen for another configured analytical line Switch between monitored lines by pressing MONIT key from the monitor screen GC 2010 3 gt 99 100 29 9 Monitoring the GC 2 Monitoring the Temperature with Temp Mon 9 2 1 Screen description Press Temp Mon PF menu from the MONIT key main screen to display the Temp Moni tor screen shown in Fig 9 2 1 Monitor the temperature of all installed column ovens injection ports and detectors from this screen emp Monitor amp CTUAL SETTING Column Temp OMEESNS 62 9 SPL1 Temp tt 150 6
260. program so that its total execution time does not exceed 9999 99 min The program continues running after this error occurs and stops at 9999 99 min Temperature control errors Code Message CS Note 1001 Heat is escaping Yes This message appears when large heat loss is occurring The oven door may be open or the insulation may not be in place If the column over door is open close it and select Reset Error If the insulation has been disturbed replace the insulation and then restart the system Code Message CS Note xxx COL INJ1 DET1 1002 1009 xxx temp exceed the limit Yes INJ2 DET2 AUX3 AUXA AUX5 This message appears when the maximum temperature limit has been exceeded Change the maximam limit temperature if necessary Temperatu re sensor errors Code Message CS Note 1010 1017 xxx sensor is short circuit Yes xxx COL INJ1 DET1 1018 1025 Xxx sensor is down Yes INJ2 DET2 AUX3 1026 1033 XXX sensor is error Yes AUXA AUXS When one of these messages appear the temperature sensor may have failed The sensor cannot be used Replace or repair it Turn off the system and contact your Shimadzu representative Unstable temperature with CRG Code Message CS Note 1034 COL CRG cannot be controlled Yes 1035 INJ2 CRG cannot be controlled Yes This message appears when the column
261. r side S For Split spiltless injection port E For FID detector 1 Remove the wire from a new graphite ferrule Slide the graphite ferrule on the capillary column Graphite ferrule Wire that comes with new ferrules Slide ferrule on to capillary column Fig 4 4 1 Fig 4 4 2 2 Pull the capillary column through the column insertion jig so that 10 mm of column protrudes Tighten the column nut to fasten the ferrule to the column at that position tighten the column nut by hand then 3 4 turn further with two wrenches in opposition Column injection jig Fasten the ferrule at this position Column nut Fig 4 4 3 3 Because graphite may be present on the column end the column must be clipped as shown below a Clip the column so it is flush with the and of the jig Clip the column here Fig 4 4 4 b The edge of the cut must be completely straight gt O E x Fig 4 4 5 52 GC 2010 4 Installing the column 4 4 Proper Placement of graphite Ferrules 3 gt NOTE Use only capillary column scoring tool to clip the column P N 221 50595 91 4 Remove the slipped graphite with tweezers etc At that time be careful not to damage the capillary column CC Q x U Remove this additional graphite W o Fig 4 4 6 NOTE Graphite which becomes lodged under the adjuster must be removed from the column If alolowed to remain the graphite could clog t
262. ram after the GC enters Ready status If the maximum temperature of the clean up oven temperature program is too close to maximum temperature of the column select Analysis Para to perform clean up using a regular analysis program STOP TIME Range 0 0 6000 0 min Default 0 0 min Sets the period of time after Stop GC PF menu is pressed or after a program finishes if the program was running to stop temperature control and cool the heated zones FLOW OFF TIME Range 0 0 6000 0 min Default because the gas control is set to Cont Sets the period of time after temperature detector control ends until gas control ends This item cannot be set if Flow Control is Cont that is if carrier gas is kept flowing FLOW CONTROL Selection End Cont Default Cont Select End to stop gas control after the flow OFF time finishes This stops the flow of carrier gas Select Cont to continue the carrier gas flow SLEEP TIME Range 0 0 6000 0 min Default because the RESTART GC is set to Off Sets the period of time after temperature detector control ends until the GC restarts This item cannot be set if the GC is set to not restart RESTART GC Selection On Off Default Off Select On to restart the GC after the sleep time elapses Select Off to disable automatic GC restart GC 2010 7 Starting and Stopping the GC SYSTEM 7 1 SYSTEM Key Main Screen 7 1 3 PF menu PF menu ae Reference
263. rate 10 to 20 mL min Temperature 300 C Time 3 to 4 hours 5 After regeneration immediately reinstall the molecular sieve filter into the gas chromatograph so that it does not become contaminated 298 M GC 2010 gt 18 Maintenance and Inspection 1 8 9 Inspection and Maintenance FID AN WARNING Verify that the following items have been checked before starting FID inspection maintenance 1 Stop the supply of hydrogen gas and extinguish the hydrogen flame 2 Set the detector temperature to 50 C or less 3 Turn off the power of the FID 4 Remove the capillary column from the FID Risk of burns Do not perforem maintenance until the temperature has dropped below 50 C AN CAUTION When the FID is hot do not loosen screws and nuts or move parts to prevent binding NOTE For correct FID handling procedures refer to 13 Detector 18 9 1 Inspection maintenance cycle When the following problems occur inspect the FID and perform maintenance if necessary When the FID cannot be ignited When peaks do not appear When noise is high When the peak shape is abnormal 18 9 2 Inspection maintenance a Inspection and replacement of the igniter are described E Troubleshooting Check for blown filaments Replace the igniter with a new one if the filament is blown E Removing and installing the igniter Loosen the igniter mounting screw shown
264. re increase decrease program rate control range may be limited depending on the total flow rate setup value the column in use and the purge flow rate 132 GC 2010 12 Injection Port 12 5 Split Splitless Injection System 3 gt 12 5 5 3 PF menu PF menu Description Reference section Del Line Deletes a line at the current cursor position Ins Line Inserts a line in line at the current cursor position PRINT Prints the pressure program to a Chromatopac 12 5 5 4 Setting a pressure program E Screen terminology 1 ramp pressure program Pressure Initial pressure PRSS P1 Initial pressure hold time TIME a 2 P1 Program rate RATE b Final pressure PRS P2 Final pressure hold time TIM C Program Program Time starts finishes E Program creation lt 1 ramp pressure program Sg Q FILEO Press monitor kPa ME Program total min 17 04 Rate 8 PreatkPa TimeCmin Init _ 80 8 Z 08 Lat 4 00 100 6 5 09 end END 100kPa 5min ___ 4kPa min 60kPa 2min ran Del Line Ins Line Fig 12 5 8 Pressure program example GC 2010 133 12 Injection Port 12 5 Split Splitless Injection System 12 5 6 Creating a Flow rate program If the control mode is set to FLOW increase and decrease the total flow rate during analysis by making a flow rate program When you set a flow rate program for the APC a
265. re only carrier gas flows to eliminate background resis tance fluctions TCD cell Reference gas O Output signal Fig 13 3 1 160 GC 2010 13 Detector 13 3 Thermal conductivity detector TCD gt 13 3 2 Setting the detector 13 3 2 1 Screen description Press the DET key to display the Detector main screen shown in Fig 13 3 2 Here set the detector temperature the detector gas flow rate etc When the detector is configured in the analytical line the output signal settings appear in the lower portion of the screen le or DET HE CD 5 Tempt MITE 200 0 eignal Polarity Current m4 T5 Filter Time Constant z ems signal Output Port Che For output of the detector j signal refer to 13 5 Setting Background usa a o ott the Output Signals Background sig comp Off Det sig subtraction off signal Range 1071 Analog Signal Type Linear Fig 13 3 2 DET key main screen 13 3 2 2 Parameter list DETECTOR CONTROLLER Selection On Off Default On When a detector is set to On its current and voltage are controlled When a detector is configured in an analytical line and set to On the detector is con trolled and its signal monitored However even if a detector is set to Off the gas flow is controlled and the temperature increases to the set value if the detector is configured in an analytical line TEMP Range 0 0 400 0 C Default 25 0
266. re within the allowable maximum pressure range AN CAUTION Hydrogen gas supply precautions Make sure that the supply pressure to the flow controller does not exceed 500kPa If the flow controller fails with a hydrogen gas supply pressure over 500 kPa a dangerous situation exists Lange amounts of leaking hydrogen could cause the FID flame to expand out of the detector Hydrogen gas is lighter than air If it leaks it can accumulate near the ceiling Pay strict attention to ventilation so that leaking hydrogen is vented out of the room and cannot accumulate N CAUTION Supply pressure When the GC shares gas supplies with other insturmentation check all instrument specifications in order to provide adequate gas supply pressures for all the instruments AN WARNING Hydrogen carrier gas precautions If much hydrogen gas is released into the poorly ventilated room it may cause the explosion 1 In order to prevent hydrogen gas accumulate in the room attach tubes to split vent purge vent TCD vent and ECD vent Discharge the gas to open air or a ventilation equipment such as the draft chamber 2 Install the GC in the well ventilated area Ex in the draft chamber 3 In order to measure hydrogen gas concentration equip a hydrogen gas sensor in the room Keep the hydrogen concentration low GC 2010 3 gt 23 2 Installation 2 6 Gas supply plumbing E Supply ga
267. ric shock In some sensitive analyses Snoop can interfere with proper detec tion In those situations use an electronic leak detector If a leak is found replace the offending part Leaking part Replacement Near septum nut Replace septum Around injection port nut Replace glass insert O ring At column connection Replace graphite ferrule and column nut At split or purge vent during leak test Replace blank nut AN CAUTION Do not use the leak detecting fluid nor soapy water for gas leak check on the connections above the carrier and detector gas controllers AFC APC The drips may damage the controller GC 2010 gt 121 29 12 Injection Port 1 2 4 Removing and installing the septum NM WARNING Danger of burns Do not perform injection port maintenance until the temperature has dropped below 50 C NM CAUTION Wait until the injection port has cooled to loosen screws and nuts to prevent them from binding E Type of septum The type of septum to install depends on the temperature of the injection port 1 Silicon rubber septum When the temperature of the injection port is below 350 C 2 Low bleed septum When the temperature of the injection port is above 350 C E Removing the septum Remove the septum according to the following procedure 1 Check the following items before removing the septum The temperature of the column o
268. rom 1 to 8 as shown in Fig 16 7 3 Set 0 when a unit is not installed Set 9 when a unit is installed in a position not shown in Fig 16 7 3 Top view Fig 16 7 3 Component installation location NOTE Changes are not in effect until the GC has been turned off and on GC 2010 257 16 Special Functions 16 7 Service and Maintenance 16 7 4 INSTALLATION PIPING 16 7 4 1 Screen description Select 7 SERVICE MAINTENANCE from the FUNC key screen and then select 2 INSTALLATION PIPING to open the Installation Piping Screen shown in Fig 16 7 4 In the carrier gas flow controller fields specify where the flow controller injection port tubing is connected In the detector gas flow controller fields specify the detector configuration including detector type and flow control unit Installation Piping A A 10000000 Unit Type AFC PU Cont Type FID slot No SLOTI DET AFC Mo Det PC 1 Temp Port 4 INJil Unit Type APCOGch TAREA Slot No 4 SLOTSN Carrier gas Unit Type AFC PU Heater Port DETi Detector gas flow controller 4 Slot No SLOTZ A E ow controller settings Temp Port INJZ Cont Type TCD S settings OL CARS TTT DET APC No Det PC 2 Unit Type gt Unit Type APCCich Slot Ho Slot No LOTA Temp Port NON Heater Fort DETZ MA MN M I CETHS TTT
269. rom the actual baseline This pro duces a stable baseline despite considerable baseline fluctuations DET SIG SUBTRACTION Selection Off DET 1 DET 2 DET 3 DET 4 Default Off Subtracts the detector signal of one detector from the signal of another detector This function is mainly used in a dual column flow line to subtract the data acquired without an injection from the data acquired with an injection The background signal is elimi nated For the details on SIGNAL OUTPUT PORT BACKGROUND SIG SAVE BACKGROUND SIG COMP and DET SIG SUBTRACTION refer to 13 5 Setting the Output Signals SIGNAL RANGE Selection x1 x10 1 x10 2 x10 3 x10 4 Default x10 1 Multiplies the analog signal by the coefficient 10 gt for a linear analog signal type If the data processing unit is saturated for example change the setting from x1 to x10 1 from x10 to x10 3 In case of the digital signal the signal is always output with x1 SIGNAL ATTENUATION Selection x1 x2 1 x2 2 x2 3 x2 4 Default x2 1 Multiplies the analog signal by the coefficient 2 for a wide analog signal type If the data processing unit is saturated for example change the setting from x1 to x2 1 from x2 to x2 3 In case of the digital signal the signal is always output with x1 ANALOG SIGNAL TYPE Selection Linear Wide Default Linear Set this item when the GC is connected to a Chromatopac in analog format W
270. s then set the current AN CAUTION To avoid broken filaments and poor performance set the current below the valves indicated by the curves below The current setted should be below the curve in the diagram for the selected gas type in order to prevent damage to the filament or deterioration of TCD performance 150 T t g 3 100 2 E o o o x E 100 200 300 400 DET temperature setting C Fig 13 3 3 Maximum operating current 162 GC 2010 13 Detector 13 3 Thermal conductivity detector TCD gt FILTER TIME CONSTANT Selection 4 ms 5 ms 10 ms 20 ms 50 ms 100 ms 200ms 500 ms 1 s 2 s Default 200 ms This constant affects the processing of the detector signal As the time constant increases noise as well as the peak height are reduced Select the optimum value in accordance with the peak half width Refer to 13 4 Filter Signal Time Constant SIGNAL OUTPUT PORT Selection Off Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Default Channel is automatically assigned Select the digital and analog signals output Channels Four channels are available However for analog output only Ch1 and Ch2 are available as standard BACKGROUND SIG SAVE Selection Off Buff 1 Buff 2 Default Off Background baseline signals can be saved for the purpose of background subtraction BACKGROUND SIG COMP Selection Off Buff 1 Buff 2 Default Off Subtracts the saved background signal baseline f
271. s Off AC blower 106 Closes air solenoid valve Opens air solenoid valve 107 Closes air solenoid valve only in 17A mode Opens air solenoid valve only in 17A mode 109 Turns On AC CRG INJ Turns Off AC CRG INJ 110 Turns On AC CRG Column Turns Off AC CRG Column 111 Turns On AC Cooling fan Turns Off AC Cooling fan 131 Turns On DET 1 detector controller Turns Off DET 1 detector controller 132 Turns On DET 2 detector controller Turns Off DET 2 detector controller 133 Turns On DET 3 detector controller Turns Off DET 3 detector controller 134 Turns On DET 4 detector controller Turns Off DET 4 detector controller 141 Turns On CAR1 carrier gas Turns Off CAR1 carrier gas 142 Turns On CAR1 septum purge Turns Off CAR1 septum purge 143 Turns On CAR2 carrier gas Turns Off CAR2 carrier gas 144 Turns On CAR2 septum purge Turns Off CAR2 septum purge 145 Turns On CARS carrier gas Turns Off CAR3 carrier gas 146 Turns On CARS septum purge Turns Off CAR3 septum purge 147 Turns On DET 1 makeup gas Turns Off DET 1 makeup gas 148 Turns On DET 1 H2 Turns Off DET 1 H2 149 Turns On DET 1 Air Turns Off DET 1 Air 150 Turns On DET 2 makeup gas Turns Off DET 2 makeup gas 151 Turns On DET 2 H2 Turns Off DET 2 H2 152 Turns On DET 2 Air Turns Off DET 2 Air 153 Turns On DET 3 makeup gas Turns Off DET 3 makeup gas 154 Turns On DET 3 H2 Turns Off DET 3 H2 155 Turns On DET 3 Air Turn
272. s Off DET 3 Air GC 2010 17 Printing 17 4 Event No No Meaning of Event xx Example Event 1 Meaning of Event xx Example Event 1 156 Turns On DET 4 makeup gas Turns Off DET 4 makeup gas 157 Turns On DET 4 H2 Turns Off DET 4 H2 158 Turns On DET 744 Air Turns Off DET 4 Air Turns On CARI gas saver Sets split ratio to value of CAR1 gas saver split Turns Off CAR1 gas saver 161 ratio 1 Returns split ratio to value of analysis When GC becomes ready split ratio returns to parameter value of analysis parameter Turns On CAR1 gas saver Sets split ratio to value of CAR1 gas saver split Turns Off CAR1 gas saver 162 ratio 2 Returns split ratio to value of analysis When GC becomes ready split ratio returns to parameter value of analysis parameter Turns On CAR2 gas saver Sets split ratio to value of CAR2 gas saver split Turns Off CAR2 gas saver 163 ratio 1 Returns split ratio to value of analysis When GC becomes ready split ratio returns to parameter value of analysis parameter Turns On CAR1 gas saver Sets split ratio to value of CAR2 gas saver split Turns Off CAR2 gas saver 164 ratio 2 Returns split ratio to value of analysis When GC becomes ready split ratio returns to parameter value of analysis parameter Turns Off CAR1 CAR2 CAR3 high pressure 171 Turns On CAR1 CAR2 CAR3 high pressure inj
273. s the HELP key on the screen to display the item and its description For example Fig 5 4 1 displays the Diagnosis Help text Items which may be difficult to understand are linked to further descriptions Access these underlined item descriptions by pressing Display PF Menu with the cursor on the item Fig 5 4 2 shows the pop up screen linked to the word Log Diagnosis Log The diagnosis function checks The operation of the equipment if each part of the equipment is recorded on the log is operating without a Uperation log problem The time record of the start The execubion of each test can and the stop be customized Display nalyeis log The result of this test la The time record of the recorded on the Mog analysis enp sensor use bime gt Errors during the analysis are The accumulated time of each Back also recorded temperature sensor used over arameber log saaCc degree The record of the change of x Return Display Return Display Fig 5 4 1 Help screen Fig 5 4 2 Linked screen 5 4 2 PF menu PF menu Description Return Returns to the screen displayed before HELP key was pressed Display Displays the explanation on item at the cursor position Back Returns to the previous screen GC 2010 65 66 MEE GC 2010 AAA 29 6 Analysis Flow Chart 1 Analysis Flow Chart 6 1 1 Preparation Glass insert preparation Septum preparation Colum
274. s tubing There are two types connections in the Gas Chromatograph Type M and Type G Type M connections are located at the main tubing connections in the instrument interior and exte rior The metal fittings contact directly Type G connectors which are used in high temperature areas are connected by tightening three to five aluminum gaskets between the fittings MF fitting BK Fig 2 6 1 Joining Type M fittings S GM fitting GF fitting Alminum gaskets 3 5pcs Fig 2 6 2 Joining Type G fittings Tightening the tubing connections Tools 2 wrenches 10x12 standard accessory Use the 12mm wrench for Type M connections and the 10mm wrench for type G connections Fig 2 6 3 Tightening the joints 24 GC 2010 2 Installation 2 6 Gas supply plumbing gt E Tubing between the gas cylinder and gas chromatograph Gas filter lt option gt GC 2010 Gas cylinder Fig 2 6 4 Tubing between the gas cylinder and gas chromatograph Use tubing with a 3mm O D and 2mm I D between the gas cylinder and gas chromatograph The use of a gas filter is highly recommended Contaminated tubing or poor quality gases can interfere with baseline stability Option Gas filter P N 221 05619 01 This absorbs organic compounds and moisture in the supply gas improving its purity The filter can be regenerated by baking in the GC oven at 250 C wi
275. sages appear during a link failure or communication failure When a communication error occurs the link is automatically disconnected When one of these messages appear check the connection status and reset the link 314 GC 2010 19 Troubleshooting 19 2 Error Messages AOC communication errors Code Message CS Note 4009 AOC command is invalid No 4010 ACC data is out of range No 4011 AOC time out No 4012 AOC2 TRS error No 4013 ACC link error No One of these messages appear during a link failure or communication failure When a communication error occurs the link is automatically disconnected When one of these messages appear check the connection status and reset the link 19 2 5 Detector errors Over current Code Message CS Note 4101 4104 DET n TCD cell error Yes n 1 4 4105 4108 DET n FTD current error Yes nz1 4 Abnormal detector current If the resistance of the filament becomes abnormally high when the TCD or the FTD is in use the protection circuit is actuated to prevent damage to the filament and an alarm sounds If either error has occurred turn off the system Possible reasons for the protection circuit to be activated are described below The current value set exceeds the maximum operating current The makeup gas is not flowing A gas leak has occurred A significant amount of air is present in the flow line for TCD Remove the cause of error then
276. screen Press Start GC PF menu to start GC control Press the MONIT key and ensure that the temperature of each zone the gas flow rate the gas pressure etc are correct From the screen of the DET key set the range and the time filter constant Ensure that the temperature of the detector is rising then ignite the FID or set the TCD current value When all parameters reach their respective setup values the STATUS indicator light becomes green and the system is ready for analysis The default zero parameter Zero at Ready zeroes the detector sig nal when the GC is ready GC 2010 67 68 6 Analysis Flow Chart 6 1 Analysis Flow Chart 6 1 3 Analysis Set the data processing unit Check the baseline Inject the sample Perform the required settings for the data processing unit such as specifying the processing parameters Press the MONIT key and ensure that the baseline is stable Press Zero Adj PF menu to zero the detector output When the baseline is stable you can start analysis Aspirate the sample in the syringe inject it into the GC injection port and press START to analyze it For capillary column analysis normally inject 1 2 uL Wear protective goggles when using a syringe to inject samples y The syringe plunger could be expelled due to injection port back pressure nn Sample could get into the eyes By holding and supporting the plunger from the side with y
277. screen shown in Fig 16 6 11 Signal Setting Carrier Gas Detector Gas 16 Special Functions 16 6 GC Configuration Channel 1 amp Det Sig Temp DII Signal Select Flow i The currently set channel No is displayed 16 6 7 6 Select an item to be output APC APC APCS from each area APC amp PC5 APCS CAPCT APCS APC APCE PCl1 APC12 CAPCIS CAPC14 APC15 APC16 PC17T APC18 PET Ch C Fig 16 6 11 APC gas signal setup screen Signal offset When you select Gain etc PF menu from the signal setup main screen the Gain and offset screen shown in Fig 16 6 12 appears Set the offset and the the detector signal gain here Select Sig Ch PF menu to set the gain and the offset for any signal other than defector signals such as temperature or pressure In addition you can set the time constant and the zero adjustment of the signal for each channel Gain and Off TUAE mal FIDA Gain l Offset A ignal 00000000 Gain 1 4 Offset a TAA ignal FPD Gain 1 4 Offset a I 000000000 Gain A Offset a Fig 16 6 12 Detector signal gain and offset screen GC 2010 3 gt 247 248 16 Special Functions 16 6 GC Configuration 16 6 8 Customizing Component Names 16 6 8 1 Screen description Select 6 GC CONFIGURATION from the FUNC key screen
278. se curve GC 2010 111 112 E GC 2010 AAA 3 gt 12 Injection Port 1 2 1 Introduction E Types of injection ports described There are six types of injection system available for gas Chromatography Split injection system Splitless injection system Direct injection system option Packed column injection system option On column injection system option Programmed temperature vaporization injection system option In this manual only the split splitless and direct injection system are described For other systems refer to the User s manual for each optional unit Bi Injection system and injection port Injection system Injection port Type of insert Split injection system s P Glass insert for split Split spitless injection port Splitless injection system Glass insert for splitless WBI Direct injection system Glass insert for splitless WBI injecti Direct injection port Packed column injection Glass insert for packed column system On column injection system Adapter for on column Programmed temperature On column injection port evt EE Glass insert for PTV vaporization injection system GC 2010 113 29 12 Injection Port 2 2 Glass Insert and Packing Requirements It is necessary to pack silica glass wool into the glass insert liner in order to sufficiently mix the vaporized sample and to prevent high boiling point compounds from contaminating the capill
279. set the detector gas is shut off at the end of the program extinguishing the FID fmame E Manual extinguishment To extinguish the detector flame without waiting automatic extinguishment set the gas con trol of H2 and Air to Off on the Det Gas PF menu screen The detector gas is shut off extinguishing the FID flame ZN CAUTION The cover of FID detector should be raised and set up using tweezers for prevention of a scald in case of maintenance and inspection Put down the cover on its side using tweezers in case of analysis GC 2010 gt 155 156 13 Detector 13 2 Hydrogen flame onization detector FID 13 2 3 Setting the detector gas flows The FID detector gas consists of makeup gas hydrogen and air The makeup gas is inert gas supplied to the detector to prevent peak tailing and optimize FID sensitivity Usually the carrier gas is used as the makeup gas Hydrogen gas and air are supplied to be combusted inside the detector creating the FID flame 13 2 3 1 Screen description Select Det Gas PF menu from the DET key main screen to display the flow screen shown in Fig 13 2 3 When the Start Flow status is selected on the SYSTEM key screen the makeup gas flow starts Just before the ignition procedure begins hydrogen and air flow starts Selecting Stop Temp Det status from the SYSTEM key main screen gas flow stop GC 2010 Flow DET 1 HZ E Pr
280. single injections are being done set temper atures for both injection ports The GC is designed to perform optimally at room temperatures of 18 28 C Room temper atures above 28 C will negatively inpact reproducibility 72 GC 2010 7 29 7 Starting and Stopping the GC SYSTEM 7 1 1 Screen Description SYSTEM Key Main Screen The SYSTEM key main screen contains parameters related to starting and stopping the GC When you press the SYSTEM key while the GC is in the system Off status the screen shown in Fig 7 1 1 appears However if automatic start was set the GC starts as soon as the power is turned on and the screen shown in Fig 7 1 1 does not appear To set up parameters related to the GC start such as start time and clean up method on or off press Start GC PF menu The GC starts then enters standby mode according to the main Screen setting However if the GC is in system ON mode pressing the SYSTEM key will access the screen shown in Fig 7 1 2 Here set up parameters relating to turning off the GC such as stop time flow off time sleep time etc Once the parameters have been specified press Stop GC PF menu to begin the GC stop operations If no program is running the stop time countdown begins immediately If a program is running the countdown begins once the program is finished When the countdown elapses the GC stops and shuts down according to the GC stop parameters Current File 4
281. split ratio is split flow rate column flow rate When you set a split ratio the system sets the total flow rate based on the calculated carrier gas flow rate and split flow rate so that the desired split ratio occurs at the oven temperature Set the split ratio to 1 0 to fix the total flow rate regardless of the oven temperature TOTAL FLOW RATE Range 0 0 1200 0 ml min Refer to Fig 3 5 1 Default 500 0 ml min In split or splitless mode the total flow rate is equivalent to column flow rate split flow rate septum purge flow rate SPLIT MODE NOTE Selection SPLIT SPLITLESS DIRECT Default SPLIT SPLIT Controls the column inlet pressure and the total flow rate so that the column inlet pressure and split ratio occur as specified SPLITLESS Closes the split flow line during the sampling time so that the set column inlet pressure is controlled by the Total Flow Controller Opens the split flow line and controls the Electronid Split Controller so that the preset column inlet pressure occurs Refer to Fig 12 5 2 after the sampling time elapses DIRECT Closes the split flow line and the set column inlet pressure in pressure mode or the set total flow rate in flow rate mode occurs When making direct injection analyses select WBI in the setup screen so that SPLIT mode is not available SAMPLING TIME Range 0 00 9999 99 min Default 1 00 min Sets the sampling time for splitless analysis The samp
282. ss kPa Column flow 2 mz 62 Liner vel MEAR 62 2 t t Actual values Set values Fig 5 1 2 GC 2010 3 gt 57 58 5 Basic Key Operation 5 1 Keypad Description and Operation 5 1 3 Status indicators Three status lights indicate the GC status regardless of the screen display The STATUS TEMP and FLOW lights indicate the GC status the temperature control status and the gas control status respectively Light color and illumination are also used to indicate instrument parameter status E STATUS indicator Color Status Meaning Off Power is OFF On System is ready Green Blinking Program like the temperature program are executing Vell On System is OFF Alternatively the system is ON but is not ready ellow Blinking Diagnosis baking or flow controller calibration is being executed Red On An error has occurred in system B TEMP indicator Color Status Meaning Off Temperature control is not performed ish On All temperature controlled zones are ready Blinking Temperature program is running Yellow On One of the temperature controlled zones is not ready Blinking Temperature program is finished and system is being cooled Red On An error related to temperature control has occurred E FLOW indicator Color Status Meaning Off Gas control is not performed On All gas control lines are
283. ssing the GC STOP key however does not stop the Chromatopac NOTE To stop the Chromatopac from starting automatically refer to 16 6 9 Setting the link device code Key operation from the chromatopac The gas chromatograph is not controlled by the Chromatopac Pressing the Chromatopac START or STOP key does not start or stop a GC analysis E When the gas chromatograph is linked to a personal computer pc Press the GC START key or the PC STOP key to start both units However each unit must be stopped individually Stopping one unit does not affect the other However the end of a batch sequence signals both units to stop GC 2010 105 106 GC 2010 js 1 1 29 11 Creating an Oven Temperature Program COL Key Main Screen 11 1 1 Screen description Press the COL key to display the column screen shown in Fig 11 1 1 The oven temperature program is set from this screen Enter a value other than 0 in the rate field displayed with END Once a valid rate has been entered set the temperature final temp and time hold time for the line In addition to the oven temperature program the equilibration time is set from this screen Equilibration time is the length of time allowed for the oven temperature to properly equili brate before the system is Ready Column Up to 20 temperatue increase decrease ramps can be set Temp Monit E 50 0 0 FILE NOTE
284. t compounds To set the maximum temperature limit refer to 16 6 4 Setting the maximum temperature limits in 16 6 GC Configuration FLAME Selection On Off Default Off When the AUTO IGNIT is set to On the FLAME is set to On Select On to ignite the flame Select Off to extinguish the flame FILTER TIME CONSTANT Selection 4 ms 5 ms 10 ms 20 ms 50 ms 100 ms 200ms 500 ms 1 s 2 s Default 200 ms This constant affects the processing of the detector signal As the time constant increases noise as well as the peak height are reduced GC 2010 gt 151 152 13 Detector 13 2 Hydrogen flame onization detector FID Select the optimum value in accordance with the peak half width Refer to 13 4 Filter Signal Time Constant SIGNAL OUTPUT PORT Selection Off Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Default Channel is automatically assigned Select the digital and analog signals output channels Four channels are available However for analog output only Ch1 and Ch2 are available as standard BACKGROUND SIG SAVE Selection Off Buff 1 Buff 2 Default Off Background baseline signals can be saved for the purpose of background subtraction BACKGROUND SIG COMP Selection Off Buff 1 Buff 2 Default Off Subtracts the saved background signal baseline from the actual baseline This produces a stable baseline despite considerable baseline fluctuations DET SIG SUBTRACTION Selection Off DET 1 DET 2 DET 3 DET 4 Default Off Subtracts the det
285. t the detector controller on the DET key screen to off Refer to 13 2 2 2 On the Chromatopac press the Win 3 key and type the following LOAD ZCALIB 3 Press the RUN key of the Chromatopac 4 When Channel No 1 CH1 2 CH2 is displayed enter the Chromatopac Channel num ber 1 for Ch 1 2 for Ch 2 5 When Save to disk Y Yes N No is displayed enter Y 6 Set the detector controller to on Check whether the calibration has done correctly as the following procedure while the GC status is System On and the detector is set to On Refer to 7 Starting and Stopping the GC SYSTEM and 13 Detector 1 Set Signal Attenuation to x1 2 Press the Win 1 key and press F to set Chromatopac zero level to FREE Refer to User s manual of Chromatopac 3 Press Zero adj PF menu on the screen of MONIT key The detector signal level moves to OV Refer to 9 Monitoring the GC 4 The signal level on the display of the Chromatopac is within 50yVe the calibration has done correctly If the calibration was failed permorm the above mentioned calibration procedure again The maximum difference between the signal level GC and Chromatopac is equal or less than 5 50pV in case signal level is form 1000 to 1000uV In case of SYSTEM Off and or Detector controller Off the detector signal level on screen of the MONIT key is Op V but Chromatopac shows 10004Ve when the
286. t vaporizes This can result in too much solvent being diverted from the column reducing sensitivity Sending power to the split flow valve at sample injection can keep the split ratio at its desig nated valve 12 5 9 1 Screen description Select Advanced PF menu from the FLOW key main screen when not in DIRECT mode to open the advanced screen shown in Fig 12 5 14 Advanced CARL MII High Pes Ing TT High press inj mode 4 om High prs inj press kPar 108 0 High prs inj bime Cmin 1 00 TASTE AAA splitter Fix Mode Off Fix Timemin 1 98 Fig 12 5 14 Setup screen for high pressure injection and splitter fix mode GC 2010 12 Injection Port 3 12 5 Split Splitless Injection System 12 5 9 2 Parameter list E High Pressure Injection HIGH PRESS INJECTION MODE Select One of the following three modes Off Disables high pressure injection On Sets the column inlet pressure to high value immediately Auto Immediately sets the column inlet pressure to high pressure When analysis is finished and the GC returns to the ready status the column inlet pressure automatically increases Injection analysis starts Analysis ends Injection analysis starts Analysis ends READY Y v READY 1 lamp light 1 lamp light Column inlet Column inlet pressure t pressure i during high 1 during high 1 pressure 1 Temperature program pressure Temperature program injection injection
287. tart AFC control key and 0 key 12 16 12 Injection Port 12 3 Removing and inserting the glass insert Wait five minutes Confirm that the inlet pressure is 125 and 175 kPa If the inlet pressure is above 175 kPa loosen the column nut slightly to reduce the pres sure If the inlet pressure is below 125 kPa increase the pressure from the gas cylinder slightly Verify that the total flow is less than 2 ml min If the flow is above 2 ml min a leak exists Press On Off PF menu on the FLOW key screen to stop AFC control In case of fluoride rubber O ring verify that the pressures does not drop more than 215 kPa in one hour or 2 5 kPa in 10 minutes In case of graphite O ring verify that the pressure does not drop more than 21 kPa in one hour or 3 5 kPa in 10 minutes If it does a leak exists If there are no leaks restore the connections and operational status of the GC 2010 E Resolving leaks If the leak test procedure reveals the presence of an injection port leak use the following procedure to resolve the problem Use Snoop or a similar leak detection fluid to check the column connection for leaks Tighten the connections at the septum nut injection port nut split and purge vents if the blank nuts are inplace for the leak test and gas supply tubing NOTE Take precautions when using Snoop or similar soap solution not to drip onto electronic parts or wiring This could cause an elect
288. ted clean up is performed before running the batch schedule GC 2010 223 224 16 Special Functions 16 2 Batch Schedule 16 2 6 PF menu list PF menu Description dial Finish Validates the schedule Prev Page Returns to previous setup screen i Next Page Moves to setup screen for next item HON Cancel Cancels the schedule being created E 16 2 7 Creating a new batch schedule for dual injectors Select New PF menu from the batch schedule screen to display the new batch schedule screen shown in Fig 16 2 3 The vial set up screens are divided into main set up and sub set up screens Once the main injector setup is complete the sub injector setup screen appears On the screen two lines one for the main and the other for the sub make one schedule Set an item using the A and V keys and ENTER key When Finish PF menu becomes available and the items have been set press Finish to validate the schedule sabeh Inactive Dual 400 20i 8 Vial GC DP HINJ Mk CMD i 3 8 Chi 8 i uU EE 4 8 8 Che a pod ug Vial The dual injector parameters Start vial No ec are the same as the single Final vial Ho 16 injector parameters y TZ Sample dk Inject sample Cancel Fig 16 2 3 New batch schedule screen for dual injector GC 2010 16 2 8 Editing a batch schedule To change an existing batch processing schedule move the cursor using the A and V
289. temperature When the Control mode is set to VELOCITY the column inlet pressure is set to a value which keeps the linear velocity constant despite changes in the column oven temperature Even if the column oven temperature changes as in programmed temperature analysis the linear velocity is always kept constant Generally when the column oven temperature increases the viscosity of the carrier gas also increases and does not flow as easily Regardless of the Control mode the ESC controls the column inlet pressure and the TFC controls the total flow rate as shown in Fig 3 4 1 after the sampling time TFC 4 67 ml min rm Total Flow Controller Aue CARRIER IN 4 67ml min GC rear 3 Pressure sensor 3ml min a ge PURGE VENT TW SPLIT VENT Septum Purge Controller Pressure sensor SPC kPa Oml min Column oven lt Electronic Split Controller Completely closed Valve b Sensor a Valve b is controlled so that the value of sensor a remains constant Column inner diameter 0 32 mm Column length 25 0m Film thickness 0 50 m Carrier gas He Fig 3 4 2 Splitless control during sampling time GC 2010 3 4 4 CARRIER IN GC rear 3 AFC APC 3 4 AFC and APC control Split mode DIRECT The AFC offers three types of DIRECT mode FLOW PRESS and VELOCTY When the Control mode is set to FLOW the TFC controls the total flow rate as shown in Fi
290. ters the customiz PF menu key is pressed Changes to these parameters are reflected in the SET key main screen The screen shows parameters for the components which make up one analytical flow line injection port detectors and options Use the Line Config PF menu to change the com ponents in the flow line When the system is turned on the temperatures are controlled for the components in the flow line If the AFC is present carrier gas is supplied to the injection port specified If APC is present detector gases are supplied to the detector specified One injection port and up to two detectors can be included in an analytical flow line Temperatures are not controlled and gases are not supplied to components which are not part of the analytical flow line Analysis Settings A FILES A Column Oven TTT Tempi WEN 00 3 DLL Flow JL BI Inlet press kPa 100 0 Column flo 3 85 Split ratio EBENEN 2 8 split mode SPLIT O TH lt iit Temp E E 150 0 A DET x Muni Temp tE 158 0 LineConfg Customiz Fig 8 1 1 SET key main screen GC 2010 85 86 8 Setting the Analytical Parameters and File Management 8 1 SET Key Main Screen 8 1 2 Parameter list COLUMN OVEN Range 0 0 450 0 C Default 25 0 C Sets the default temperature in the oven temperature program INLET PRESS Range 0 0 970 0 kPa Refer to Fig 3 5 1 Default 100 0 kPa Sets the column inlet pressure
291. th 30mL min carrier gas purging the filter Capacity Approx 200mL Absorbent Molecular sieve 5A Fig 2 6 5 Gas filter GC 2010 25 2 Installation 2 6 Gas supply plumbing E Gas chromatograph tubing connections Connections are provided on the rear panel of the unit for connecting external tubing They are labeled as follows Carrier gas CARRIER Makeup gas MAKE UP Hydrogen HYDROGEN BUE e rares alas AIR Ex 1 When Carrier gas and Makeup gas are identical Branch tube standard accessory Hydrogen Air mg Carrier gas 56 t TER WERE Fig 2 6 6 When Carrier gas and Makeup gas are identical lt Ex 2 gt When Carrier gas and Makeup gas are different Hydrogen Make up gas Carrier gas Fig 2 6 7 When Carrier gas and Makeup gas are different 26 GC 2010 2 Installation 2 6 Gas supply plumbing gt E Checking for gas leaks After plumbing the unit check for gas leaks according to the following guidelines 1 Open the main valve of the gas cylinder 2 Adjust the gas supply to the specified pressures 3 Check for leaks with leak detecting fluid option or soapy water on all connections Bubbles can be observed if a leak exists 4 If aleak is detected Further tighte
292. th a thicker film Room temperature is not within the recommended range or is considerably fluctuating Keep the room temperature within the recommended range or reduce temperature fluctuations Syringe tip is clogged and sample is not properly injected Clean or replace syringe If the gas supply pressure is fluctuating due to failure of the gas cylinder pressure regulator repair or replace it Contact your Shimadzu representative 19 1 4 5 Poor peek area reproducibility Possible Cause Solution The carrier gas cylinder is almost empty Replace the gas cylinder with one of at least 3 MPa pressure Carrier gas flow rate is fluctuating due to a gas leak Tighten leaking connections Replace tubing Sample is not injected completely Perform injections accurately Replace the syringe with a new one Column is overloaded Dilute sample Increase split ratio Use a column with a thicker film Room temperature is not within the recommanded range or is considerably fluctuating Keep the room temperature within the recommended range or reduce temperature fluctuations Syringe tip is clogged and sample cannot be aspicated well Clean or replace syringe Syringe tip is clogged and sample is not property injected Clean or replace syringe Syringe plunger is stiff and does not move smoothly Clean syringe barrel and plunger Clean or replace syringe
293. the pressure is controlled and set to approximately 61 kPa based on the pressure flow rate characteristics of air stored in the memory of the GC 2010 Refer to Fig 3 4 5 The resistance depends on the detector type and the gas type air hydrogen or makeup gas Fig 3 4 5 3 4 8 show the pressure flow rate characteristic curves of the standard restrictor AUX APC offers PRESS and FLOW mode When the Control mode is PRESS AUX APC controls the pressure as shown in Fig 3 4 4 When the Control mode is FLOW the pressure is calculated based on the set flow rate calculated from the restrictor inner diameter and length Refer to column flow rate in 3 2 Definition of Terms The equation in 3 2 is accurate when the flow in the restrictor is layer Therefore the flow rate accuracy depends on the restrictor used Air 1000 900 800 700 600 500 400 300 200 100 0 1 L 1 i 1 1 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Pressure kPa Flow rate ml min Fig 3 4 5 42 GC 2010 Flow rate ml min Flow rate ml min Flow rate ml min Ha 250 200 150 100 50 o 1 00 200 300 400 500 Pressure kPa Fig 3 4 6 Makeup gas FID 250 200 150 100 50 0 100 150 200 250 350 400 Pressure kPa Fig 3 4 7 Makeup gas TCD 120 100 80 60 40 20 y 100 200 300 400 500 Pressure kPa Fig 3
294. ther int the insert than for injection by an auto injec tor However ther is no need to change the silica wool position for manual injections By plasing a sep tum on the needle the length of the needle can be shortened to approximately 40 mm Alternatively change the position of the silica wool for manual injections Example Needle length Septum Approx 40mm Y a Manual injection performed b Manual injection with a with an AOC 17 20 needle syringe with a 50 mm 43 mm length long needle Fig 12 2 2 Proper needle length for manual injections E Packing the silica wool Pack silica wool evenly without making it too densely pacleed or too fluffy E Applying and releasing pressure If the column inlet pressure is released abruptly the silica wool could change position In particular do not remove the septum or loosen the column nut when the injection port is under pressure GC 2010 3 gt 115 29 12 Injection Port 1 2 3 Removing and inserting the glass insert NM WARNING Risk of burns Do not perform injection port maintenance until the injection port tem perature has dropped below 50 C N CAUTION Wait until the injection port has cooled to loosen screw and nuts to prevent them from binding E Tool requied Fig 12 3 1 Wrench for Glass insert nut P N 221 46977 E Removing the glass insert The glass insert should be removed carefully to avoid br
295. tighten the septum nut by hand until it touches the nut below the screw then loosen a half turn When performing mamual injections you can extend the life of the septum by tightening the septum nut by one thread after approximately 10 injections When the injection port is hot the septum nut is also hot When tightening the septum nut wear gloves to prevent burns E Restarting the gas chromatograph main body Using tweezers replace the derector cover then the INJ DET cover When starting up the GC again select Anal PF menu The GC automatically flows the carrier gas for 5 minutes and then restores the temperatures set prior to maintenance When the STATUS indicator light turns green and the baseline becomes stable you can start analysis GC 2010 285 gt 18 Maintenance and Inspection 1 8 4 Inspection and Maintenance 286 NOTE 18 4 1 18 4 2 O ring for glass insert AN WARNING Danger of burns Do not perform injection port maintenance until the tempelature of the injection on port has dropped below 50 C AN CAUTION Wait until the injection port has cooled to loosen screws and nuts to prevent them from binding For the details on handling the glass insert and O ring refer to 12 Injection Port Inspection maintenance cycle Two types of O rings are available for the glass insert and the fluoride rubber type is usually used But when the fluoride rubber
296. tion ports and detectors 9 2 GC 2010 101 102 29 9 Monitoring the GC 4 Zero Point Adjustment Zero point adjustment should be executed when the baseline is off scale If the baseline cannot be seen on the screen execute zero point adjustment so that the baseline returns to the zero point The baseline level can also be manually adjusted 9 4 1 Screen description Press Zero Adj or Zero Free PF menu from the Monit key main screen the chromatogram displayed on the monitor screen changes as shown in Fig 9 4 1 or Fig 9 4 2 Press Up or Down PF menu to adjust the baseline level manually Zero point adjustments are effective not only for the GC monitor screen but also a con nected pc or Chromatopac However zero point adjustments made on the Chromatopac do not adjust the monitor screen baseline level Down Held down Zero Adj Up Held down Zero Adj Zero Free Since the Down has been held down too long the zero point has deviated into the negative zone Fig 9 4 1 Zero point adjustment Fig 9 4 2 Zero free adjustment NOTE Zero point adjustments are only valid for the currently displayed detector To adjusts the zero point for another detector first switch to its display by pressing Chng Line PF menu then execute the adjust ment GC 2010 1 0 29 10 Starting and Stopping Analysis Tom aking an Injecting and Starting an Ana
297. tometric detector FPD option M w GC 2010 1 149 gt 13 Detector 1 3 2 Hydrogen flame ionization detector FID 150 Carrier gas 13 2 1 Principle of FID operation In the hydrogen flame ionization detector FID hydrogen gas is mixed with the column outlet gas at a certain ratio as shown in Fig 13 2 1 The gas mixture combusts in the air atmosphere An electrode exists at each end of the FID jet and DC voltage is applied between the electrodes If only pure carrier gas nitrogen helium or argon and hydrogen gas are mixed little current is produced between the electrodes When an organic compound is mixed with the carrier gas current is produced proportionally to the amount of organic compound present This is because ions mainly carbon ions are generated when an organic compound combusts within the hydrogen flame and the generated ions are captured by the collector For isomers the ion quantity generated is almost proportional to the number of carbons contained in the compound However carbon atoms in a C 0 form do not create a signal The presence o halogens in the compound decreases sensitivity Because the ion current obtained by the FID is very low it is amplified into a proper voltage then output to a Chromatopac or personal computer High resistance ES Electrometer Collector Amplifier Chromatopac or PC High voltage Injection port Hydrogen Air Fig 13 2 1 GC 201
298. tter to the test Then select Reset Error 1 Set the Flow Control to Cont on the screen after pressing SYSTEM key 2 Push the Stop GC PF menu and the system stops 3 Wait that all oven temperature injection port temperature and detector temperature is below 40degrees on the screen after pressing the MONIT key 4 Push the On Off PF menu on the screen after pressing the FLOW key and the control of AFC stops Set the purge flow rate to 0 ml min 5 Remove the capillary column and blank off with the graphite ferrules and column nut 6 Install the blind G type blank nut to the split vent and purge vent port 7 Make sure that the supply pressure to the carrier gas the pressure from a gas cylinder is above 300 kPa 8 Set the Split mode to DIRECT and Control mode to PRESS on the screen of the after pressing the FLOW key 9 Set the inlet pressure to 150 kPa Push the On Off PF menu and the control of AFC starts 10 Wait for five minutes Confirm that the inlet pressure is 125 175 kPa If the inlet pressure is above 175 kPa unfasten the column a little nut and set the pressure free If the inlet pressure is below 125 kPa raise the supply pressure a little 11 Confirm that the total flow is below 2 ml min If the total flow is above 2 ml min then there is a leak somewhere 12 Push the On Off PF menu on the screen of the FLOW key and the control of AFC starts GC 2010 287
299. ture detector control and the end of gas control This item cannot be set if Flow Control is Cont that is if carrier gas is kept flowing The FLOW OFF TIME setting on the SYSTEM key main screen is set here 82 GC 2010 7 Starting and Stopping the GC SYSTEM 7 4 Specifying the Stop Procedures 3 gt FLOW CONTROL Selection End Cont Default Cont Select End to end gas control after the flow off time elapses Select Cont to continue the carrier gas flow The GAS CONTROL setting on the SYSTEM key main screen is set here SLEEP TIME Range 0 1 6000 0 min Default because the RESTART GC could be set to Off Sets the period of time after temperature detector control ends until the GC restarts This item cannot be set if the GC is not set to restart automatically The SLEEP TIME setting on the SYSTEM key main screen is set here RESTART GC Selection On Off Default Off Select On to restart the GC once the sleep time has elapsed Select Off to not restart the GC automatically The Restart GC setting on the SYSTEM key main screen is set here 7 4 3 System shut down examples The following examples show various situations where STOP TIME and FLOW OFF TIME can be used effectively After the end of an analysis each heated zone is cooled Once the column over is cool carrier gas flow is shut off STOP TIME 0 minutes FLOW CONTROL End FLOW OFF TIME Approx 20 minutes A colu
300. type is used for long hours at more than 350 C the time duration being leaktight is rather short so check for leakage every week When operating the system for long hours at more than 350 C the graphite type is recommended But the graphite type has a little less sealing effect than the fluoride rubher type The fluoride rubber type can be used for sevaral glass insert replacements but graphite type can be used only once However replacing the O ring when replacing the glass insert is recommended Normally rubber O ring is used If the rubber O ring is used above 350 C for an extended period it deteriosates rapidly Use a graphite ferrule on the glass insert in this case although its sealing ability is inferior to the rubber type Perform inspection and maintenance of the O ring when the following problem occurs When the carrier gas leaks To stop leaks tighten the glass insert nut If the leak contnues inspect the O ring and replace if necessary Inspection maintenance E Preparing the gas chromatograph NOTE Select Maint INJ PF menu from the SYSTEM key main screen If the system is operating press the SYSTEM key and select Maint INJ PF menu The temperature of the injection port and the column oven automatically drops and the carrier gas stops when the temperature drops below 51 C When the message GC is ready for maintenance appears on the screen injection port inspection maintenance can begin
301. up program CLEAN UP TIME Range 0 00 9999 99 min Default 0 00 min Sets the final flow rate hold time for the clean up program 78 GC 2010 7 Starting and Stopping the GC SYSTEM 7 2 Specifying Clean Up Parameters 7 2 3 PF menu PF menu Description Reference section Temp Prog Sets the column oven temperature for the clean up program 11 2 Press Prog Sets the column inlet pressure for the clean up program 12 5 5 Flow Prog Sets the total flow rate for the clean up program 12 5 6 Run Displayed only while GC is in system ON status Immediately runs the clean Up program Sto Stops clean up P This item is displayed only when the clean up program is in progress Next Line Displays the clean up program set up screen for another analytical flow line E GC 2010 79 80 29 7 Starting and Stopping the GC SYSTEM 3 Specifying Start Procedures 7 3 1 Screen description Select Start Seq PF menu from the SYSTEM key main screen to display the start procedure setup screen shown in Fig 7 3 1 On this screen set whether the system automatically starts Auto Start when the power is next turned on or whether the system does not start until Start GC PF menu is pressed Manual Start Alternatively only carrier gas flow is turned on the next time the power is turned on To start the system select Start GC PF menu as for a manual start This is known as a semi auto start Finally
302. ure setting Overheat protection Injection unit 1 Overview 2 Specifications 1 2 1 Column oven 280 W x 280 H x 175 D 13 7 Room temperature 4 C to 450 C 50 C to 450 C When liquid carbon dioxide gas is used 1 K Calibrated at 0 01 C Within 2 C on a 200mm diameter column holder Within 0 05 C 0 01 C C increase in power voltage 100 VAC 40 C min up to 200 C 15 C min up to 350 C 7 C min up to 450 C in power voltage 230 VAC 70 C min up to 200 C 50 C min up to 350 C 35 C min up to 450 C Approximately 6 minutes cooling from 450 C to 50 C Programmable up to 470 C A fixed circuit provides protection at 500 C 1 2 2 Temperature program 20 ramps in total Heating and cooling available 0 1 C increments 250 to 250 C min 0 01 C min increments Up to 9999 99 minutes 1 2 3 Injection port Up to 450 C 0 1 C increments Programmable up to 470 C Split Splitless injection Direct injection 1 2 4 Detector O Hydrogen flame ionization detector FID Range of temperature Overheat protection Minimum detection Dynamic range Jet material Time constant GC 2010 Up to 450 C 0 1 C increments Programmable up to 470 C 3pg C s 107 Fused quartz 4 ms to 2 s selectable 1 2 5 1 2 6 1 2 7 1 2 8 1 Overview 1 2 Specifications O Thermal conductivity detector TCD Amplifier Power Dynamic range Se
303. use 0 Use 1 Not use 0 SPMD Distribution of sample for dual AOC 0 8 0 PAR1 Use of Same Param No 0 Yes 1 No 0 GLPM Setting of validation mode 0 1 0 GRPT Number of times of GLP sample discharge 1 99 50 GVOL GLP sample discharge volume 1 80 20 GPMP Pa of times of pumping after second 0 5 4 ATSP Automatic stop function Off 0 On 1 On 1 ARSG Ready signal polarity Open 0 Close 1 Open 0 TLET Rack Short 0 Long 1 Short 0 TSEL Rack position while sampler is used 0 2 1 1 Without autosampler short rack 1 6 Without autosampler long rack 1 12 With autosampler 1 150 NOTE Command names marked with GC 2010 cannot be set on the GC screen gt 17 Printing 1 f 3 Program Parameters Press Print from a time program or Pre Run program to print the program as event No or parameter names This paragraph describes the parameter names and the display when a program stops E Event No EVNT Refer to 17 4 Event No E Temperature Heated zone names from a temperature program are printed with the parameter names shown below Column temperature INJ2 DET1 DET2 AUX3 AUXA AUX5 CITP AITP Pre Run program only DETT AUXT TCDT AX4T AXST E Detector range polarity and current value Detector range polarity and the current value from a program are printed with the parameter names shown below Range of DET 1 Range of DET 2 Range of DET
304. ven and injection port should be below 50 C Check this before setting the column inlet pressure to 0 kPa The column inlet pressure should be 0 kPa NOTE Removing the septum when the injection port is under pressure causes an abrupt pressure shift which can change the position of the glass wool in the insert 2 Remove the septum nut and take out the needle guide and septum Septum nut Needle guide Septum Top of Injection port ind Fig 12 4 1 122 GC 2010 Bi Installing the new septum 1 Insert the septum into the injection port NOTE Use tweezers to handle the septum Touching the septum will contaminate it causing ghost peaks Tweezers Septum Co ts 2 Injection port Do not touch the septum M e Fig 12 4 2 2 Replace the needle guide then the septum nut Tighten the septum nut by hand as far as possible and return a semicircle Septum nut CA Needle guide Septum Top of injection port Fig 12 4 3 Ss cC2010 123 29 12 Injection Port 1 2 5 Split Splitless Injection System Bi Split injection system In a split injection system only a portion of the sample injected into the injection port is introduced into the capillary column The remaining sample is sent to the split line due to high sample volume or concentration Refer to 3 4 AFC and APC control L3 PURGE TFC CARRIER PURGE VENT Capillary column F
305. vent No Description 131 134 Turn detector controller on off 141 146 Turn carrier gas and septum purge on off 147 158 Turn detector gas on off 171 Turns high pressure injection on off 181 198 Turn AUX APC on off For details about the event No refer to 17 4 Event No GC 2010 16 Special Functions 16 4 Pre Run Program 16 4 6 Pre Run Program set up example Switches B contact of Event 91 four minutes in to the program 1 Time 4 0min v 2 Relay 3 Relay v 4 Switch point v 5 Event 91 92 v 6 Event 91 v 7 Point B v 8 Setting is completed 236 GC 2010 Screen display Edit program Time min 4 00 Edit program n E Detector Flow controller Relay d SEE AC On Off Relay u point n Off point switch point Evental 92 n i Va Evental 4b Point E Timetmi Function Value 1 ad am Wal E 3 16 Special Functions 1 6 5 Direct Operation 16 5 1 Screen description Select 5 DIRECT OPERATION from the FUNC key screen to display the screen shown in Fig 16 5 1 Input the event No and press the Execute key to execute the specified event For a description of the event No refer to 17 4 Event No Event 9l Return Fig 16 5 1 Direct operation setup screen 16 5 2 Parameter list EVENT Range 500 500 Default Runs the operation assi
306. w rate control errors Code Message cs Note 2005 2007 CARx purge leaks Yes x 1 3 2014 2017 2020 2023 DetAPC n makeup gas leaks Yes 2015 2018 2021 2024 DetAPC n hydrogen leaks Yes n 1 4 2016 2018 2022 2025 DetAPC n air leaks Yes 2026 2043 APC y leaks Yes y 1 18 NOTE The prressure cannot reach the set value Check whether gas is supplied and whether gas is leaking from connections Gas leaks may be occurring in several locations Example Ifthe purge flow rate is too low the message Purge leaks may appear If the carrier gas is also leaking the ESC or TFC error message may not be displayed first GC 2010 Pressure flow rate control errors valve leak error 19 Troubleshooting 19 2 Error Messages Code Message CS Note 2048 2050 CARx purge valve leaks Yes x 1 3 2057 2060 2063 2066 DetAPC n makeup valve leaks Yes 2058 2061 B 2064 2067 DetAPC n hydrogen valve leaks Yes n 1 4 2059 2062 s 2065 2068 DetAPC n air valve leaks Yes 2069 2086 APC y valve leaks Yes y 1 18 2132 2133 CAR m AFC valve leaks Yes m 1 2 Gas is flowing even though the set value is 0 kPa or ml min If gases are supplied an AFC APC valve error may have occurred Turn off the system and contact your Shimadzu representative Abnormal component operation Code Message CS Note 2091 2093 CARx purge is out of control Yes x 1 3 21
307. zone names can be changed Heater Name Customization Port Type INJ1 SPL INJZ WEI DETi FID DET TCDO To change the names refer to AUKS eet 5 3 5 Changing item names AUA ooo in 5 3 Basic Key Operations AUS les im OE DEF 86H BIEL EHO OP STU OZ OY qc ego Return Alphabet LowerChr Fig 16 6 15 Heater port name setup screen 16 6 8 4 Carrier Name Customization Select 6 GC CONFIGURATION from the FUNC key screen and then 6 PORT NAME CUSTOMIZATION and finally select CARRIER NAME CUSTOMIZ to open the screen shown in Fig 16 6 16 To change the names refer to 5 3 5 Changing item names yl Carrier Name Customization in 5 3 Basic Key Operations Port Type Name CARL AFC PU GC2018 CARE AFC PU CARS CARS CARS EPEC Ue GH JEL 80 OPE SETU vk OY qc egg Return NumerChr LowerChr Fig 16 6 16 Carrier name setup screen GC 2010 gt 249 16 Special Functions 16 6 GC Configuration 16 6 8 5 AUX APC Name Customization Select 6 GC CONFIGURATION from the FUNC key screen and then 6 PORT NAME CUSTOMIZATION and finally AUX APC NAME CUSTOMIZ to open the screen shown in Fig 16 6 17 Only listed APC options can be named AUX APC Name Customization Fort amp PC1 a amp PC2 APCS APC To change the names refer to APCS 5 3 5 Changing item n

HPLC

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents